Home

User Manual - Green Telecom

1. For KX UT670 The KX UT670 SIP phone has 24 flexible buttons Each button can be assigned a feature telephone number extension number etc with a custom label for each You can switch the display between single row display and full screen display In single row display 6 flexible buttons are displayed and you can press the Page key to display another row of buttons In full screen display all 24 flexible buttons are displayed at once Row 4 Row 3 Ws Row 1 Row 2 Bank DN 1 ms OSI aa p gt a Sales 1 Sales 2 To switch display KX NT366 KX NT553 KX NT556 KX NT560 KX UT248 KX UT670 NEXT PAGE NEXT PAGE O O gt 00 M e B Press NEXT PAGE or Page key to display the desired page User Manual 259 1 14 4 Self Labelling KX NT366 KX NT553 KX NT556 KX NT560 KX UT248 KX UT670 only For KX NT366 KX NT553 KX NT556 KX NT560 users When you answer an incoming call or when you seize an outside line the display automatically changes to the page that contains the green lit button After customising each button you can set the displayed text for the button For details about customising buttons refer to 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons For KX UT248 and KX UT670 users You can customise the flexible buttons and set the displayed text for each button using Web Maintenance Console For details about customising buttons refer to Customising
2. How to Follow the Steps An example of system operation is shown below Calling Another Extension 2a eeneuemnem eee To call an extension Intercom Call PT SLT PS SIP Extn Zz PN gt Ga DSS gt es Talk Dial extension number Ze a or press DSS Off hook The DSS button light shows the current status as follows Off The extension is idle a Red on Your or another extension is using the line aa d To call using a directory refer to 1 14 2 Using the Directories e For quick operation e Hands free Operation BHeHEEeBeHsE If you are an operator or dial some extensions frequently DSS buttons are useful Feature title Telephone types The abbreviations of telephone types are explained in Telephone types in procedures below Operation steps The description of the icons are explained on Icon Descriptions Conditions Hints You can make an intercom call and have a conversation in hands free mode using the SP PHONE button ISF Customising Your Phone e 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Select the seized line when going off hook e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Direct Station Selection DSS button Programming References The related or required programming is noted Telephone types in procedures The following abbreviations are displayed at the t
3. groups a Hurry up C6 Incoming call distribution group extension no Wrap up System Alarm w Day Night C 01 2 35 GE Tenant no Answer C0 Release EB Toll Restriction Call Barring C2 Toll Restriction Call Barring Level 1 7 ISDN Service C3 Desired no max 32 digits Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR eee allo RCMIGHCHGINGRECHIGGNGINGMIGCHGINCHIGNGIGINCMIGHoiis 4 User Manual 319 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons 320 Button Programming Input Connected Line Identification Restriction 5 COLR ISDN Hold 6 Headset Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual Tenant no Network Direct Station Selection NDSS C9 Another PBX extension no CTI C0 Primary Directory Number cs PDN Secondary Directory s oi S Number SDN C2 Extension no _ delayed ringing time 0 7 Check in 0 Check out ED Cleaned up 2 Two way Record He AB dis A eek e 0 UM group s floating extension no Voice mail floating extension no Two way Transfer C9 1 UMgroup s floating extension no Voice mail floating extension no One touch Two way Transfer C9 C1 UM group s floating extension no Voice mail floating extension no Extension no Incoming call distribution group extension no Live
4. ee oe E S ort oa fF G Not available for a PS Only available for KX T7633 KX T7636 IP PTs except KX NT265 KX NT321 KX DT343 KX DT346 KX DT543 KX DT546 telephones Not available for the KX T7665 This setting applies to both outside and intercom calls For intercom calls this feature must be enabled through system programming Only available for certain digital proprietary telephones Only available for IP PTs and certain digital proprietary telephones Only available for KX NT300 series except KX NT321 KX NT560 KX DT343 KX DT346 telephones Registering and cancelling a Bluetooth wireless headset may take time Please avoid any interruption during that time by for example going off hook CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your password extension PIN The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Keeping your PIN secret b Selecting a complex random PIN that cannot be easily guessed c Changing your PIN regularly e After the programme number is entered the programme title is displayed The programming screen can be changed with the Navigator Key Up or Down i e You can select the parameter with the Navigator Key Up or Down instead of entering a number EE User Manual 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode To store the names and
5. personal speed dialling no 2 digits system speed dialling no 3 digits 2 phone no 1 0 1 2 3 Redial Redialling the Last Number You Dialled Last Number Redial User Manual 5 3 1 Feature Number Table Feature While dial tone is heard aa Additional digits buttons 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer To cancel callback ringing Automatic 46 Callback Busy Cancel To cancel CCBS Cancel Leaving a Message Waiting Indication Calling Back the Caller Who Left an Indication Message Waiting For an extension leaving a message waiting indication To leave cancel For an extension receiving a message waiting indication To call back To clear 70 1 0 extension no 2 0 your extension no 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension Remote COS Access To call with a verification code Verification Code Entry 1 2 8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside Direct Inward System Access DISA Calling through DISA To an extension In All Security Mode only To an outside party In Trunk Security Mode All Security Mode only 1 2 9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA Remote Setting From another extension Through DISA X47 extension no extension PIN phone no verification cod
6. to accept then go to Auto Forwarding To delete a mailbox The System Manager should delete mailboxes that are no longer needed When another person accesses the Unified Messaging system the action is automatically cancelled 4 PON Enter the mailbox number C1 to delete the mailbox 1 Log in to the System Manager s mailbox To reset a mailbox password When a password is forgotten the System Manager must reset the password before it can be reassigned by the subscriber 1 Log in to the System Manager s mailbox o a el Enter the mailbox number C1 to delete the password User Manual 279 2 2 1 System Manager Features pe The System Manager password cannot be reset here The System Administrator can reset gt the System Manager password using Web Maintenance Console e After the password is reset if the System Administrator has set Default Password for New Mailboxes to Enable the password will be set to the default password If set to Disable the mailbox will have no password Setting Class of Service COS Parameters 280 A Class of Service COS defines the set of system services available to the mailboxes assigned to it There are 66 Classes of Service they can be assigned to mailboxes by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance Console or by the System Manager using a telephone COS No 65 and No 66 are assigned by default to the M
7. Any charges recorded here are not related to charges that the hotel operator records when checking out a room User Manual 1 13 1 Walking Extension 1 13 Exchanging the Settings between Extensions 1 13 1 Walking Extension You can exchange the settings set at another extension with your own settings This allows you to use your own settings including your extension number on another person s extension Settings such as extension number and One touch Dialling memory are available at the new extension It is also possible to exchange the DSS Console settings along with the extension settings Walking Extension is useful for example when you move to a new location in the office This feature is also known as Walking Station To exchange your settings with another extension PT SLT PIN Personal Identification Number NS gt Waa gt oeno gt gt Off hook gt gt Dial your extension Enter 727 number exensionPN O D Tone Enter extension PIN max 10 digits On hook An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature Refer to Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension Extension PIN Personal Identification Number in 3 1 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming Your previous extension will receive the old settings of your new extension Extension settings can be exchanged between SLT and SLT PT and PT or SLT and PT If you are using a KX
8. Used to have a Log in Log out button for another incoming call distribution group User Manual 27 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones Button Feature Log in Log out for all groups Used to have a Log in Log out button for all groups Hurry up Used to transfer the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming call distribution group to the overflow destination Wrap up Used to switch the wrap up status Ready and Not Ready mode System Alarm Used to confirm a PBX error Time Service Day Night Used to switch the time service mode Lunch Break Answer Used to answer an incoming call Release Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer Toll Restriction Call Barring Used to change the toll restriction call barring level of other extension users temporarily ISDN Service Used to access an ISDN service Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR services Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Used to switch between the COLP and COLR services ISDN Hold Used to transfer a call using telephone company Headset Used to talk using the headset Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual Used to switch the time service mode Automatic or Manual Two way Record Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox
9. Available tone types vary depending on the telephone you are using KX NT300 series except KX NT321 KX NT500 series KX DT300 series except KX DT321 KX DT500 series KX T7600 series except KX T7665 Tone types 01 to Other telephones Only tone types 01 to 08 are available It is possible to enter a tone type number from 09 to 30 but you will hear tone type 02 e Only one ringing tone can be selected for all PDN buttons on your extension To clear the button gt oo Press PROGRAM or PAUSE 322 User Manual Press desired flexible button To continue dD AUTO DIAL gt 2 gt STORE Enter 2 Press ENTER or STORE Press PROGRAM or PAUSE 3 2 1 User Programming 3 2 System Programming Using Web Maintenance Console 3 2 1 User Programming You can edit your personal information as well as limited extension and mailbox settings using Web Maintenance Console You can view menus and setting items but you can edit only a limited number of items In addition you can download the UM IMAP Session Controller for Microsoft Outlook For details refer to gt IMAP in 1 8 6 Other Features Accessing Web Maintenance Console for the First Time Logging in to Web Maintenance Console Edit User Screen Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console Automatic Two way Recording for Manager Logout e The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice Uy e e e
10. Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd 2014 PNQX6954ZA DD0714AHO
11. Table 2 Option mode 12 13 14 15 User Manual 253 1 14 2 Using the Directories Table 2 Option mode for NE model 254 User Manual 1 14 2 Using the Directories Table 2 Option mode for Greece User Manual 255 1 14 3 Accessing System Features System Feature Access 1 14 3 Accessing System Features System Feature Access You can access a feature with the Feature Access menu To access Feature Access menu and select the feature KX NT300 KX NT500 KX DT300 KX DT500 KX T7600 While on hook Press Right Press Up or Down four times until the feature appears Features Refer to Automatic Callback Busy Cancel 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer Group Call Pickup 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup Paging 1 7 1 Paging Doorphone Call 1 11 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected Door Open 1 11 1 Ifa Doorphone Door Opener is Connected External Relay 1 11 2 If an External Relay is Connected External Background Music 2 1 4 Turning on the External Background Music BGM KX UT series While on hook Ment o co Press Menu a ry v Press Up or Down until the feature appears Features Refer to Group Paging 1 7 1 Paging Direc
12. To dial PT SLT SIP Extn 75 AUTO DIAL STORE personal speed a gt gt x gt dialling no Off hook Press AUTO DIAL Enter Dial personal speed or enter dialling number 2 digits i e To call using a directory refer to 1 14 2 Using the Directories e For SIP phone users Telephones display only personal speed dialling numbers of Using Numbers Stored in the PBX System Speed Dialling You can make calls using speed dialling numbers stored in the PBX PT SLT PS SIP Extn SD AUTO DIAL gt Q gt system speed a dialling no Off hook Press AUTO DIAL Dial system speed or enter dialling number 3 digits i e To call using a directory refer to 1 14 2 Using the Directories e For SIP phone users Telephones display only system speed dialling numbers EE To a Preset Number by Going Off hook Hot Line You can make an outside call simply by going off hook if you have preprogrammed your phone This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling To store a phone number PT SLT PS D aaam gt o o a eo 2 Se C Tone Off hook Enter 740 Enter 2 Enter desired Enter On hook phone number max 32 digits Enter outside line access number before outside phone number 38 User Manual 1 2 2 Easy Dialling To set cancel PT SLT PS 1 Set 2 Co Cancel C Tone v SS gt EDan gt Off hook Enter 740 Enter 1 to set On hook or
13. Transferring to a Private Network TIE Line Access During a conversation you can make a call to an extension connected to another PBX in a private network and transfer a call to it User Manual 261 1 15 1 Cellular Phone Features To transfer Cellular Phone During a conversation 4 gt GS v Dial extension number or Enter enter 7 and the dial private phone number Talk The party is placed on hold This step can be omitted a When transferring a call from an analogue trunk you cannot talk to the destination party after dialling an extension number or 7 private phone number Transferring to an Outside Phone Number During a conversation you can make a call to an outside phone number and transfer a call to it To transfer Cellular Phone During a conversation Cod C99 D E e 3 outside line group no Dial outside phone Enter Enter automatic line access number Tale On hook number or enter outside line group access number and then outside line group number The party is placed on hold This step can be omitted a When transferring a call from an analogue trunk you cannot talk to the destination party after dialling the outside phone number 262 User Manual 1 15 1 Cellular Phone Features Adding Other Parties during a Conversation Conference To establish a conference call Cellular Phone During a conversation GO 2 Cem gt
14. User Manual 3 2 1 User Programming Item Description No DTMF Input Operation Specifies the operation taken when no DTMF input a caller does not dial anything is received after the Personal Greeting Recording The caller will be guided to leave a message Disconnect All Day The line will be disconnected regardless of the time of day Disconnect Only After Hours The line will be disconnected only after hours No DTMF Input Operation Wait Time Specifies the duration of time to wait for DTMF input before the action set in No DTMF Input Operation is performed 0 10 s Personal Distribution List Item Description List 1 4 Members Personal Distribution Lists are used to send the same messages to several mailboxes in a single operation A maximum of 4 lists can be maintained with each list containing a maximum of 40 mailboxes Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the list Follow the steps below to edit list members 1 Click Edit for a Personal Distribution List 1 4 Members item 2 Under Subscribers To Add click the checkbox in No for each mailbox to add referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox owners names 3 Click Add 4 Click OK Follow the steps below to remove members from a list 1 Click Edit for Personal Distribution Lists 1 4 Members item 2 Under Distribution click the checkbox in No for each mailbox to add referring to t
15. SP PHONE I montor D GSN ive cal or MONITOR a QJ O Screening Press J Press SP PHONE or j Live Call Off hook MONITOR Off hook ee Screening MONITOR o e The Live Call Screening LCS button light shows the feature status as follows Off LCS is off Flashing green rapidly Alerting in the Private mode Flashing green slowly Monitoring Red on LCS is on The manager extension can clear an extension PIN e This feature is available for a single line telephone if it is connected to a proprietary telephone in parallel Private mode only To answer the call while monitoring press Recall hookswitch Only the handset monitoring in the Private mode is available for PS users IL Customising Your Phone e 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Live Call Screening Mode Set Select the mode either monitoring the message through the speaker automatically or receiving while the caller leaves a message e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Live Call Screening LCS button 232 User Manual 1 11 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Recording a Conversation You can record a conversation into a mailbox while talking on the phone You can select the mailbox each time you record a conversation XP To record into your mailbox Two way Record During a conversation To stop recording T press this button again Record Press Two way Record To record into another mailbox T
16. Two way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specific extension One touch Two way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specific extension with one touch Live Call Screening LCS Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an incoming caller is leaving a message and if desired intercept the call Voice Mail Transfer Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension Also used to access the Unified Messaging system or the voice mail features of a VPS with one touch Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Used to access an extension connected to other PBXs in the network with one touch CTI Used to access CTI features Check in Used to switch the room status of extensions from Check out to Check in Check out Used to switch the room status of extensions from Check in to Check out Cleaned up Used to switch the room status of extensions between Ready and Not Ready Primary Directory Number PDN Used to make and receive both outside and intercom calls 28 User Manual 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones Button Feature Secondary Directory Number SDN and pick up or transfer calls to it Used to show the current status of another extension call the extension Directory Number DN KX UT series SIP phones except KX UT113 KX UT123 only Used to make intercom or outside calls
17. a e 1 Example To enter 5 00 press 5 To enter 5 15 press 515 e 2 This option may not be available if the Unified Messaging system is programmed to use 24 hour time e 3 Example If today is February 16 and you enter 17 the message will be delivered tomorrow If today is February 16 and you enter 5 the message will be delivered on March 5 e Auto Receipt is not enabled by default For more information consult your System Administrator e New urgent messages are played before any other messages However old urgent messages are treated like regular messages messages are played starting with the oldest Transferring Messages You can transfer forward messages in your mailbox to other subscribers However please note that you cannot transfer receipt messages or messages that were specified by the sender as private When transferring a message you can e Specify the recipient by entering another subscriber s mailbox number User Manual 155 1 8 3 Message Playback and Related Features e Specify several recipients by entering a Personal Group Distribution List number refer to Personal Group Distribution Lists or a Mailbox Group number e Record your own comments and send them along with the transferred message a No acknowledgement will be given to indicate the message has been transferred e Only new and old messages can be transferred To transfer a deleted message recover the message first
18. 3 digits o e In some countries areas the PBX may not be able to automatically make a faulty outside line N unavailable for use User Manual 273 2 1 7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Monitor 2 1 7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Monitor NDSS buttons can be customised on any extension connected to your PBX An NDSS button allows an extension user to monitor another extension connected to another PBX oP in a private network The NDSS button light shows the current status of the monitored extension in the same way as a DSS button When it becomes unnecessary to monitor an extension connected to another PBX the manager can stop the PBX from monitoring it Any NDSS buttons set to monitor that extension will also stop monitoring another PBX extension no gt S amp S gt GaGaGaGa gt sti ne NDSS Off hook Enter 784 Dial another PBX extension On hook number and then enter or press NDSS i e To restart monitoring of an extension after performing this operation go off hook press the corresponding NDSS button and go on hook aa Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Network Direct Station Selection NDSS button 274 User Manual 2 2 1 System Manager Features 2 2 Configuring Unified Messaging Features 2 2 1 System Manager Features The System Manager can configure mailboxes change class of service COS setting
19. 8 5 Set Bookmark During voice message playback only 8 6 Resume from Bookmark position Voice messages only 9 Fast Forward During playback only Save This Message as New 0 Help Receive Old Message During or after playback Repeat Message Previous Message Next Message Erase Message Send Reply Transfer Message Message Envelope Rewind During playback only Pause Restart During playback only 8 4 Volume Up During playback only 8 5 Set Bookmark During voice message playback only 8 6 Resume from Bookmark position Voice messages only 9 Fast Forward During playback only 0 Help ONAROKRWNA Continued from previous page 1 8 7 Quick Reference Mailbox Management 1 Record Personal Greetings 2 Set Password 3 Enter Owner s Name 4 Set Group Distribution List 5 Record Caller Name Number 6 Set Personal Custom Service 8 Set Remote Call FWD to Outside 9 Set Numbers for Automatic Log in and Toll Saver Set AA Status 1 Set Call Transfer Status 2 Set Covering Extensions 3 Set Message Reception Mode 4 Set Incomplete Call Handling For No Answer 5 Set Incomplete Call Handing For Busy 6 Set Telephone Number for Transfer Record Personal Greeting 1 No Answer 2 Busy Signal 3 After Hours 4 Caller ID 5 Temporary 6 Absent Message p Message Notification 1 Message Waiting Lamp 2 Device Status 3 Assign Telephone Numbers 2 Change Absent M
20. Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages or Personal Greetings for Caller ID You can create your own personal custom service and allow your callers to access the following features Transfer to Mailbox The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox or another mailbox you specify here where he or she can leave a message Transfer to Extension The system will transfer the caller to the extension you specify when creating the custom service Transfer to Outside The system will transfer the caller to the outside telephone number you specify when creating the custom service This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator or System Manager Transfer to Custom Service The system will transfer the caller to the Custom Service you specify here Voice Mail Service The system will prompt the caller to enter a mailbox number and leave a message Automated Attendant Service The system will prompt the caller to dial an extension number in order to speak with someone else Intercom Paging The system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature Your name will be announced to alert you to the call Repeat Greeting The caller can play your greeting message back from the beginning in order to listen to your Personal Custom Service options once again Transfer to Operator The system will transfer the caller to the operator or to your Covering Extension if you have assigned
21. Enter a maximum of 32 characters consisting of 0 9 x and Note If Call screening is selected the transfer destination will hear the call screening prompt before the call is transferred User Manual 3 2 1 User Programming Item Description Transfer to specified telephone number 2 3 4 5 Selection Other If None or Call screening is selected for Selection and the call could not be transferred to the number specified in Transfer to specified telephone number 1 the call will be transferred according to these settings for this scenario in numerical order of priority Note If Call screening is selected the transfer destination will hear the call screening prompt before the call is transferred Select Other Extension or Covering Extension 2 If Other is specified enter a maximum of 32 characters consisting of 0 9 X and Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer Specifies how the scenario handles a call when there is no answer More than one option can be selected Leave a Message Allows the caller to record a message e Transfer to a covering extension Transfers the caller to a covering extension e Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging Pages you by intercom e Transfer to operator Transfers the caller to an operator Return to top menu Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension e Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu Transfers the caller
22. If you use a Panasonic display proprietary telephone you can check your own extension number on the display Press the TRANSFER button or Soft S1 button while on hook ECO mode If you use a KX NT543 KX NT546 or KX NT560 IP PT in ECO mode the ECO icon is shown on the display during programming mode refer to 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons For more information consult your dealer Using a Navigator Key Jog Dial Volume Key The Navigator Key can be used for the display contrast and the volume control or you can search for desired items on the display Press the Navigator Key Volume Key or rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction The contrast or the volume level and the items will change as follows Navigator Key Up Up Up Level increases Level increases Level increases A a Left gt Right Left gt Right Left a gt Right y v Down Down Down Level decreases Level decreases Level decreases 24 User Manual 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones Jog Dial Volume Key Left anti clockwise Level decreases Right clockwise ZON Level increases Up Level increases VOLUME Down Level decreases Up Level increases AN Volume Vv Down Level decreases Examples The displays and the illustrations shown as examples are from a telephone connected to the PBX Restrictions Some features may be rest
23. Retrieving a held call mennad Brask hujnnunnnnnnnnmnnnnnnnnnn hunnun nnnm e Picking up another call Paging Answering a paging announcement e Answering the call through a speaker e You establish a call with an extension in the following cases e The called extension has hands free Answerback enabled and is not a KX UT series SIP phone e Voice calling mode e When making a call to or froma doorphone Tone 4 1 Is i i i i i Establishing or leaving a conference gt Tone 5 1s A call has been put on hold 388 User Manual Notes User Manual 389 For Future Reference Please print record and retain the following information for future reference Note The serial number of this product can be found on the label affixed to the unit You should record the model number and the serial number of this unit as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft MODEL NO SERIAL NO DATE OF PURCHASE NAME OF DEALER DEALER S ADDRESS DEALER S TEL NO Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd 1 62 4 chome Minoshima Hakata ku Fukuoka 812 8531 Japan Web Site http wwwpanasonic net Copyright This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd and may be reproduced for internal use only All other reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd
24. SS gt Geet one hk Off hook Enter 43 Talk KX UT series gt CS Press any dial key 0 9 Talk To allow deny a paging announcement Paging Deny PT KX UT series S gt Baa Co Allow C Tone Off hook Enter 721 Enter 1 or 0 On hook pe e The following are extensions that cannot receive a paging announcement J Portable station Single line telephone Proprietary telephone that is ringing or busy Proprietary telephone in Paging Deny mode Proprietary telephone in DND mode Non KX UT series SIP phone e System programming may be required for some IP PT users to receive paging announcements e Even if the announcement is not paging your extension you can answer it if it is paging your group 132 User Manual 1 7 3 Making a Conference Group Call 1 7 3 Making a Conference Group Call You can call multiple parties assigned as members of a group conference group and establish a multiple party conversation with the called parties You can make a conference group call to both extensions and outside lines including analogue lines The following two modes are available e Conference Mode the called parties can join the conversation automatically Conference Mode e Broadcast Mode the called parties can hear the caller s voice announcement and then be allowed to join the conversation by the caller Broadcast Mode a e Ifyou dial a conference group numbe
25. Select One touch from Type Then enter the desired number in Dial max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 x T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Note e Ifyou store an outside party s number you should first store a line access number If you need to enter an account code you can enter the specified account code before the line access number lt Example gt SECRET 49 1234 0 9 123 4567 Ji Account code Account Account code Automatic line Phone number feature no code delimiter access number e For KX UT series SIP phone users Use only 0 9 and for One touch Dialling buttons If characters other than these are stored they will be considered invalid Only the digits up to an invalid character will be sent when using that One touch Dialling button User Manual 341 3 2 1 User Programming 342 Button Steps Incoming Call Distribution Group ICD Group Select ICD Group from Type Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in Extension Number To specify the ring tone select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number Message Select Message Waiting from Type Message for Another Extension Select Message Waiting from Type Then enter the extension number or incoming call distribution group extension number in Extension Number Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Both calls Select FWD
26. User Manual 31 1 2 1 Basic Calling 1 2 Making Calls 1 2 1 Basic Calling Calling Another Extension Calling an Outside Party Making a Call to a Private Network TIE Line Access Using an Account Code Account Code Entry l e amp e amp Calling Another Extension To call an extension Intercom Call PT SLT PS SIP Extn extension no gt 4 ORJ O__ SDN Off hook Dial extension number or press DSS or SDN o e The DSS button light shows the current status as follows Aa Off The extension is idle Red on Your or another extension is using the line You have to press the SDN button once or twice depending on the mode of the SDN button For details refer to 1 5 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension i e To call using a directory refer to 1 14 2 Using the Directories e For quick operation EE If you are an operator or dial some extensions frequently DSS buttons are useful e Hands free Operation You can make an intercom call and have a conversation in hands free mode using the SP PHONE button Customising Your Phone e 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Select the seized line when going off hook e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Direct Station Selection DSS button 32 User Manual 1 2 1 Basic Calling To call an operator Operator Call You can call an extension or a gro
27. series Remote FWD Settings Using Group FWD Button FWD DND Settings Using Fixed FWD DND 7 V3 Button Forwarding Your Calls Using ISDN Service 7 VY Call Forwarding CF by ISDN 1 6 2 Showing a Message on the Caller s Telephone Zi 7 y Display Absent Message 1 6 3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone Extension Dial Lock To lock v v v To unlock v v v To make an outside call while your extension is yf y s locked 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Recording a Normal Greeting Message v v v Recording a Greeting Message for Each Y Time Mode Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message Box Leaving Voice Messages Listening to Voice Messages Left by Callers Accessing Your Message Box from an Outside Telephone Accessing the Message Box of Another Y V Y Extension from Your Extension 1 7 1 Paging Group Paging Paging and then Transferring a Call 1 7 2 Answering Denying a Paging Announcement To answer v v v v v To allow deny a paging announcement Paging wf j Deny User Manual 365 5 1 1 List of Operations by Telephone Type Telephone Type SIP phone Features PT PS SLT Non KX UT KX UT series series 1 7 3 Making a Conference Group Call Conference Mode v v v v v Broadcast Mode v v v v v Join Aft
28. C2 to accept the current setting then go to the next parameter 2 Enter the group number 1 33 3 2 to accept Maximum Number of Caller 4 4 to change the current setting IDs for Caller Name Announcement C2 to accept the current setting then go to the next parameter 2 Enter the number of announcements that can be programmed by subscribers 1 30 0 None 3 2 to accept Mailbox Capacity Warning 1 1 to change the current setting C2 to accept the current setting then go to the next parameter 2 Enter the warning threshold 1 60 min or 0 None 3 2 to accept oe Greeting for Caller 4 T to change the current setting enable or disable 2 2 to accept Caller ID Screen 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable 2 2 to accept Call Transfer to Outside 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable 2 2 to accept Subscriber Tutorial 1 1 for Normal Mode C2 for Simplified Mode C3 to disable Notify of Transfer 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable 2 2 to accept Directory Listing 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable 2 2 to accept Auto Receipt 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable 2 2 to accept Autoplay New Message 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable 2 2 to accept First Playback Urgent 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable Messages 2 2 to
29. Group Monitor 2 Select an ACD Supervisor from the Supervisor selection drop down list 3 On the Layout of the Basic Settings select the layout for showing the monitor results 4 Select the ICD Group that you want to monitor from the Select ICD Group drop down list 354 User Manual 5 ge ead 4 1 3 Supervisory Monitor ACD Control On the Options you can change the following settings for the monitor screen Item Description Value Member Status View Mode Select the display mode for Standard Simple members status Highlighted Number of Current Specify the number of waiting 1 30 Display Waiting Calls 1 30 calls at which the Current Settings Waiting Calls display is highlighted Waiting Time 0 10 Specify the waiting time at 0 10 minutes min 10 sec which the Longest Waiting Time display is highlighted Colour Mode Select the colour to use to Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 highlight items on the screen Blinking Select whether items that are Enable Disable highlighted on the screen blink Click Apply When you finish configuring the settings click Start Monitor to start monitoring the selected ICD group Click Close Click OK ACD Report Analysis You can specify which items to include in the monitor result report the style in which to display the report profile and the output format 1 2 On the left side of the screen click Users gt ICDG Management
30. Talk a e Performing this operation after receiving multiple waiting indications will call back the extension that left the most recent message waiting indication User Manual 45 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer To clear message waiting indications left on your extension PT SLT PS SIP Extn gt amm gt gt a 1 amp C Tone Off hook Enter 70 Enter 0 Dial your On hook extension number o e The Message button light or Message Ringer Lamp shows the current status as follows Off No message Red on You have a message The display shows the messages starting with the most recent call e Ata called extension the MESSAGE button allows you to clear message waiting indications if you do not want to call the callers back To clear press the MESSAGE button and then press the soft button This operation cannot be performed using KX UT series SIP phones On your PT you can establish one or more Message for Another Extension buttons These buttons can accept the message waiting notification of other extensions or various incoming call distribution groups In other words you can monitor the message waiting notifications of other telephones A single line telephone extension user will receive a special dial tone as message waiting notification when going off hook The message waiting lamp of a single line telephone can also let you know that you have a message in the
31. Automated Attendant Service GES Exit Return to Previous Menu Help SHelalulioiic Switch Service mode If you are authorised to access a System Manager and or Message Manager follows fo service gt Message Manager service gt System Manager service T If pressed while in Subscriber Service you will be prompted to enter the desired mailbox number 2 If pressed while in Subscriber Service you will return to the Subscriber Service Main Menu When Using Voice Prompts The following commands can be used to help you navigate through Unified Messaging system menus Commands 5 and 7 are available only after you have accessed Subscriber Service Some commands may not be available depending on the COS settings of your mailbox Takes you back to the previous menu 0 Repeats the current menu Takes you back to the Main Menu User Manual You can record a message for another subscriber by entering his or her mailbox number when guided You can also log in to your mailbox by entering this command mailbox by the System Administrator you can switch between those services as 1 8 3 Message Playback and Related Features 1 8 3 Message Playback and Related Features Playing Messages Bookmarks Voice Messages only Recovering Deleted Messages Replying to Messages Transferring Messages Remote Access O e e e ee Playing Messages Callers and other subscri
32. Identification Number so that you can prohibit access to it Display Lock Refer to 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode e Directory entries generally should include name and number If the name is not registered i an entry cannot be displayed EE e The System Speed Dialling Directory can be displayed simply by pressing the AUTO DIAL STORE button while on hook 250 User Manual 1 14 2 Using the Directories Storing Names and Numbers To store a Personal Speed Dialling Directory item Display PT While on hook Gorm gt wo gt C gt gt D AUTO DIAL AUTO DIAL STORE STORE Enter phone number Press ENTER Enter name Press ENTER Press PROGRAM max 32 digits or STORE max 20 characters or STORE or PAUSE o e Telephone numbers and names displayed are stored using the first spare Personal Speed 5 Dialling memory available i e For more details refer to To store the names and numbers in personal speed dialling in 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode User Manual 251 1 14 2 Using the Directories Entering Characters You can enter the following characters The tables show you the characters available for each button Table 1 or Table 2 can be programmed Note For NE models the tables for Option mode differ depending on the system settings For details consult your dealer Table 1 Standard mode 252 User Manual 1 14 2 Using the Directories
33. R Tone Ring Tone R B Tone Ringback Tone extension no Dial an extension number outside Dial outside phone number phone no Dial the telephone number dial key Press any dial key 0 9 phone Press the HOLD button on your SIP Press the REDIAL button on your SIP phone When You Use a Panasonic Proprietary Telephone or KX UT Series SIP Phone Panasonic proprietary telephones and KX UT series SIP phones have useful feature buttons that simplify some operations For details refer to the Location of Controls or equivalent section in the documentation for your phone Customised Buttons If the term is in parentheses like Account in this manual it means a flexible button has been made into an Account button For more information refer to 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons when using a PT or PS or Customising the Flexible Buttons when using Web Maintenance Console Note For KX UT series SIP phone users e KX UT113 KX UT123 Customised buttons are not available e Other than KX UT113 KX UT123 The following buttons can be customised Single CO S CO DN One touch Dialling Log in Log out DSS Headset Wrap up Call Park Call Park Automatic Park Zone Button Feature Loop CO L CO Used to access an idle outside line for making outside calls Incoming outside calls from any outside line arrive at this button Group CO
34. and then click lt d Click OK Select the target time period for the ACD report on Agent Filter Settings Select Period To show the report on an agent basis perform the following steps a Click View Report The ACD Report Agent Report screen is displayed The filtered data is shown as follows Agent Total Answer The number of calls that the target agent answers Talk Time Total The total talking time for the target agent HH MM SS Average The average talking time for the target agent HH MM SS Max The longest talking time for the target agent HH MM SS Login Time The total login time for the target agent HH MM SS Not ready Time The total not ready time for the target agent HH MM SS Wrap up Time The total wrap up time for the target agent HH MM SS b The results report can be output in one of the following 3 ways e Graph Click Graph open the ACD Report Agent Graph screen and display the graph of the report Click Print to print the graph e Export Click Export and save the report file e Print Click Print to print the report c Click Close User Manual 4 1 3 Supervisory Monitor ACD Control For Call 1 On the Call Filter Settings Select Group screen set the group to analyse as follows a Click Select b Click the ICD group name you want to analyse from the ICD group names displayed on the Available oN c d Group fo
35. gt gt Enter 1 to end 4 Add to the greeting message you just recorded recording Delete the greeting message and exit Follow the prompts as necessary If you go on hook without accepting your new greeting CD No Answer Greeting it will not be saved Busy Signal Greeting CG After Hours Greeting C2 Caller ID Greeting CS Temporary Greeting C amp J Absent Message Greeting Record or delete other greeting messages as necessary by following the prompts or go on hook ae e The contents of the Absent Message Greeting prompt and the absent message displayed on telephones refer to 1 6 2 Showing a Message on the Callers Telephone Display Absent Message should be programmed to match through system programming 146 User Manual 1 8 2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox Werecommend stating your name in your greeting messages so that callers will know they i have reached the correct mailbox an e ATemporary Personal Greeting is played instead of all your other greetings until it is deleted Each time you log in to your mailbox the Unified Messaging system will ask you if you want to turn off delete your Temporary Personal Greeting e Direct Service Access If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings you can access Record No Answer Greeting Record Busy Greeting Record After Hours Greeting and Record Temporary Greeting features directly by dialling a specific Unified Messaging extension number
36. o Mga extension Bluetooth Removal To cancel the registration of a Confirm that the ID of your Bluetooth wireless headset Bluetooth wireless headset on C6 is displayed your extension extension PIN max 10 digits ENTER STORE To set an extension PIN same extension Extension PIN Personal PIN Identification Number stored extension To set your extension PIN or 9 0 PIN change the stored extension new extension PIN PIN To change the stored extension max 10 digits PIN ENTER STORE same extension PIN extension PIN max 10 digits To unlock Extension Dial Lock 0 To prevent other people from 9 1 using your telephone extension PIN max 10 digits To lock age Be Display Lock extension PIN To prevent other people from max 10 digits To unlock seeing your personal speed 0 dialling directory call log 9 2 SVM log and from playing extension PIN back the voice messages in max 10 digits To lock your message box ED User Manual 313 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 314 Item Programming Selection amp Parameter Input No Normal Any Flexible co a One touch Dialling buttons can be modified Pianta Mode ED Yes Only One touch a Sandie inset the dialling buttons can be modified he a dialling only c However to modify them there oe g ony is no need to enter 2 before the number
37. or DN button directly Press the ANSWER button ye Hands free Operation You can receive a call and have a conversation in hands free mode using the SP PHONE button KX UT133 KX UT 136 KX UT 248 users can have a conversation in hands free mode by pressing the flashing CO or DN button Customising Your Phone 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Select the seized line when going off hook Alternate Receiving Ring Voice Select the alerting method either ring or the other party s voice 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit an Incoming Call Distribution Group ICD Group Primary Directory Number PDN or Secondary Directory Number SDN button User Manual 57 1 3 2 Answering Hands free Hands free Answerback 1 3 2 Answering Hands free Hands free Answerback You can answer an incoming call without going off hook as soon as the line is connected When an intercom call arrives you will hear the caller talking without the phone ringing oP When an outside call arrives you will hear the caller talking after a preprogrammed number of rings Hands free Answerback for outside calls requires system programming To set cancel PT KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 While on hook a AUTO ANS MUTE Press AUTO ANS a e PT users The AUTO ANS button light shows the current status as follows Off Not set FE Red on Set e KX UT series SIP p
38. refer to Recovering Deleted Messages To specify the recipients by number PT SLT PS SIP Extn During or after voice message playback mailbox no Transfer the message 5 gt without recording gt gt OR comments personal group Enter 2 Enter 5 distribution list no C to accept Record comments mailbox group no Enter 1 or 2 Enter the mailbox number a personal group distribution list number and or a mailbox group number To record your comments mn gt 1 Record your comments Enter 1 Enter 2 On hook to end recording to accept To specify the recipients by name dialling by name PT SLT PS SIP Extn During or after voice message playback CD Select the announced name 5 gt 0 gt desired recipient s name gt CZ Hear the next name gt gt CG Repeat the current name Enter 5 Enter 1 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of Enter 1 2 or 3 the desired recipient s name Feansterth To record your comments Gi ranster the message without recording D g ET gt gt om p gt gt Q2 p F gt C Tone 25 Record comments Record your comments Enter 1 Enter 2 On hook Enter 4 or 2 to end recording to accept 156 User Manual 1 8 3 Message Playback and Related Features Remote Access You can call the Unified Messaging system while outside and log in to your mailbox in order to listen to your messages There are 2 ways to log in to your mailbox
39. to end recording C2 to accept Repeat steps 4 7 to record names for other Caller ID List numbers Remote Call Forwarding Set The Message Manager can program his or her extension from a remote location to forward various types of calls to the desired extension or an outside telephone There are 6 forwarding settings available 298 FWD All Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number FWD Busy Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when the line is busy FWD No Answer Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when there is no answer FWD Busy or No Answer Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when the line is busy or there is no answer FWD to Outside Forwards all incoming calls to telephone number 1 or 2 preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting or to any other telephone number FWD Cancel Cancels the forwarding setting e This feature is not available when the Message Manager s extension assigned for Operator 5 1 in the Day Mode is default In this case it should be changed to the operator s extension number For more information consult your System Administrator In order to use the FWD to Outside option the ability to forward calls to trunks must be enabled through system programming e Before setting Remote Call Forwarding to Outside you should first store up to 2 destination telephone numbers refer to Cu
40. you can answer the call while monitoring There are two DP methods available Default Hands free mode Hands free mode You can monitor the message automatically live through the telephone speaker Private mode You will hear an alarm tone while the caller is leaving a message 182 User Manual 1 8 6 Other Features Before operating e Create a Live Call Screening LCS button Personal Programming e Select the mode either Hands free or Private Personal Programming e Set the extension PIN Personal Identification Number e Set the Live Call Screening feature To set Live Call Screening PIN Personal Identification Number CO i Live Call gt extension PIN Screening Press Live Call Enter extension PIN Screening max 10 digits This is required only when an extension PIN is stored To cancel Live Call Screening Co Live Call Screening Press red Live Call Screening User Manual 183 1 8 6 Other Features Operation Flowchart The operations in the shaded areas can be done hands free Hands free Mode Private Mode Alarm Tone Monitoring Hands free Monitoring Handset Monitoring i mane ORS T D Ta A No operation U E N Press SP PHONE MONITOR or Live Call Off hook Screening Stop monitoring Answering SP PHONE Live Call Screening Stop Answering Stop Answering Press Live Call itori itori Screening monitoring the call monitoring the call M
41. 0 to cancel To dial PT SLT PS D Off hook o e To call another party dial the desired party s phone number before the preprogrammed 5 number is dialled e You should assign the intercom line as the seized line when going off hook Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing e It is possible to increase the delay before Hot Line is activated through system programming This can be useful if you require more time after going off hook to dial another telephone number or extension number Customising Your Phone e 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Select the seized line when going off hook Using a Preprogrammed Number Quick Dialling You can make a call simply by pressing the preprogrammed number for quick dialling PT SLT PS SIP Extn N gt quick dialling no Off hook Dial quick dialling number max 8 digits i e This is a useful feature for hotels For example to dial Room Service dial the digit 3 not the full extension number aa User Manual 39 1 2 3 Redial 1 2 3 Redial This is convenient when calling the same outside party again Redialling the Last Number You Dialled Last Number Redial Redialling the Last Number You Dialled Last Number Redial 40 PT SLT PS SIP Extn D Off hook User Manual coe REDIAL gt Cn Press REDIAL or enter Up to 32 digits can be stored and redialled After
42. 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions Using an Account Code Account Code Entry in 1 2 1 Basic Calling cannot make an outside call using the Aline access number was not stored One touch Dialling button or speed dialling m A line access number is required for outside calls amp 1 2 1 Basic Calling 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons cannot remember the feature numbers mp If the feature numbers have been changed from the default values write the new feature numbers in the table in 5 3 1 Feature Number Table mp Ask your dealer to change the feature numbers for easier use While talking to an outside party the line is e The time limit has run out disconnected amp 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation m Consult your dealer to extend the time limit if necessary Redialling does not function The dialled number was more than 32 digits 1 amp 1 2 3 Redial cannot have a conversation using the Bluetooth Make sure that the headset is properly headset registered to the module e mp Make sure that the headset is properly charged according to the manual of the headset mp Remove the wired headset from the headset jack Priority is given to the wired headset when both are connected cannot register de register or confirm the ID of e Make sure that the module is properly the Bluetooth headset installed in the IP PT DPT
43. 2 5 Accessing the ISDN Service ISDN Service Access Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Select CLIR from Type Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Select COLR from Type ISDN Hold Select ISDN Hold from Type Headset Select Headset from Type Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual Select Time Service Automatic Manual from Type Then in Parameter Selection select the Time Table tenant number to be used when Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic User Manual 343 3 2 1 User Programming 344 Button Steps Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Select NDSS from Type Then enter the another PBX extension number in Dial max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 Note The button may not be available depending on the networking method in use or the settings of the PBX CTI Select CTI from Type Primary Directory Number PDN Select PDN from Type Secondary Directory Select SDN from Type Then enter the extension number in Extension Number In Parameter Selection specify the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving Number SDN at an SDN button To specify the ring tone select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number Check in Select Check In from Type Check out Select Check Out from Type Cleaned up Select Cleaned Up from Type Two way Record Select
44. 4 1 What is This Tone Reorder Tone The outside line you tried to seize is ma 0A ELLE Ringback Tones Tone 1 1s i m E E PAE i Tone 2 1s Not available for KX UT series SIP lt phones Tn Do Not Disturb DND Tone Not available for KX UT series SIP erence AML M 00L UL 00 1 0 The dialled extension is refusing incoming calls While off hook Indication Tones Tone 1 eater T S eee 7 Tone 2 15s A call is on hold longer than the specified time seeded ldgasachae aataeniend eai T E ll ere When talking to an outside party Warning Tone 1s This tone is sent 15 10 and 5 lt __ a a a a ee disconnection For KX UT series SIP phones this tone is sent only once 15 seconds before the specified time for disconnection When setting the features or programming Confirmation Tones User Manual 387 5 4 1 What is This Tone Tone 1 4s 4 i i i i e The feature setting was set gt successfully Acallisreceivedin Veiceccallings Prem meee mater etter nae Aana ia mode Tone 2 1s e Before receiving a page through 9 gt an external speaker l m You receive a call in Hands free nnn CETEECEE f moun nome f nmnnnnnnnn momen moomoo mode e You established a call with a KX UT series SIP phone that has Hands free Answerback enabled Tone 3 1s Before the following features gt activate
45. 6 1 Forwarding Calls 108 The system has two modes 1 FWD DND Cycle Switch Mode and 2 FWD DND Setting Mode Ask your manager what mode your system is in if you are not sure For KX UT series SIP phones only FWD DND Setting Mode is supported 1 When in FWD DND Cycle Switch Mode Pressing the FWD DND button fixed button while in idle status will cycle the setting as shown below Coe 2 When in FWD DND Setting Mode Pressing the FWD DND button fixed button while in idle status allows you to switch the FWD DND status and set the FWD destination refer to FWD DND Settings Using Fixed FWD DND Button Note A FWD DND button customised button is always in FWD DND Cycle Switch Mode the mode cannot be changed e Transferred outside calls are also forwarded to the destination assigned for outside calls e When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from outside calls forwarding type forward destination we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD DND Outside calls and FWD DND Intercom calls and or Group FWD Outside calls and Group FWD Intercom calls because a the light patterns of the FWD DND Both calls button including FWD DND button fixed button and the Group FWD Both calls button will indicate the setting for either outside calls or intercom calls but not both Note The FWD icon on PS display reflects the setting for outside calls only b pressing the FWD DND Bot
46. 7 3 Making a Conference Group Call Join After Time Out Extensions or outside telephones can join the multiple party conversation that has been already started using this feature For example if the conference group members fail to answer when a conference group call is made they can join the multiple party conversation later using this feature They can join the conversation from outside telephones through DISA or TIE Line or extensions This feature is available for both modes Conference Mode and Broadcast Mode For security reasons you can set a specific entry code for the conference group call To join the conversation extensions outside telephones have to enter the same entry code Therefore you have to inform the parties to be added to the conversation of the entry code in advance For an extension originating the conversation To make a conference group call with an entry code PT SLT PS SIP Extn conference N gt A2 gt aap Ine gt Off hook Enter 32 Dial conference Enter entry code group number 1 digit max 8 digits gt gt gt eam g C Tone t Enter Talk 138 User Manual 1 7 3 Making a Conference Group Call For an extension joining the conversation To join a conversation with an entry code PT SLT PS SIP Extn SS gt GaGa gt amp gt camer p Convent pp Off hook Enter 32 Dial conference Enter group number 1 digit aes Bde gt gt D
47. ACD Report Select an ACD Supervisor from the Supervisor selection drop down list To load an ACD report a Click Report Profiles b Select the Profile Name c Click Load To save an ACD report a Click Report Profiles b Name the Profile Name max 32 characters c Click Save To select ACD report options a Click Option b In ACD Report Export CSV File Format select either Comma or Semicolon as the data separator c Click OK You can make an ACD report through 3 types of filters Group Agent and Call On the ICD screen select the target tab configure the settings as necessary and then click Apply User Manual 355 4 1 3 Supervisory Monitor ACD Control For Group 1 On the Group tab under Filter Settings select one of the following items in the View Mode drop down list Group Hour Day Date Month Trunk Caller ID CLIP Note If you select Hour specify the time range 0 00 23 59 in Range 2 On the Group Filter Settings Select Group screen set the groups to analyse as follows a Click Select b Click the ICD group name you want to analyse from the ICD group names displayed on the Available Group for ACD Report window Maximum 64 groups displayed c Click gt to move the ICD group you selected in step b to the Selected Group for ACD Report window Maximum 64 groups To delete an ICD group from the Selected Group for ACD Report window click the ICD group name and then click l
48. Call Forwarding Set Setting the Timed Reminder Day Night Recording Menu Recording an Emergency Greeting List of Prompts for VM and AA Service 288 e e O e A e eee Logging in to the Message Manager s Mailbox The procedures described in this section require the Message Manager to use a telephone however many of these procedures can also be performed using a PC with Web Maintenance Console For more information consult your dealer In order to perform these procedures with a telephone the Message Manager must log in before performing any Message Manager tasks To log in as the Message Manager 3 items of information must be known the UM group s floating extension number to access the Unified Messaging system the Message Manager s mailbox number and the Message Manager s mailbox password The Message Manager s mailbox number is 998 default depending on the mailbox number length specified in system programming The Message Manager s password can be assigned by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance Console or by the Message Manager using his or her extension telephone refer to Customising the Message Manager s Mailbox IS User Manual Before the Message Manager can perform Message Management recording Custom Service Menus messages etc Message Manager Access from Telephone must be enabled and Password for Message Manager Up to 16 numeric digits must be set by the System Administrator
49. Call via an External Speaker Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 1 3 4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS You can be notified of incoming outside calls through an external speaker These calls can be answered from any extension Through an external speaker PT SLT PS While hearing a tone S gt GaGaas gt 2 FS C Tone t Off hook Enter 42 Dial external pager Talk number 1 digit e You can also receive a paging announcement via a speaker with this operation E User Manual 61 1 3 5 Using the ANSWER RELEASE Button 1 3 5 Using the ANSWER RELEASE Button The ANSWER and RELEASE buttons are convenient for operators using headsets With the ANSWER button you can answer all incoming calls oP With the RELEASE button you can disconnect the line during or after a conversation or complete transferring a call To answer gt 4 Press ANSWER Talk To transfer a call During a conversation a DSS RELEASE la TRANSFER gt LOR The called gt desired party answers Press TRANSFER Press DSS or dial desired Press RELEASE phone number Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number To talk to a waiting caller While hearing a call waiting tone Press ANSWER Talk 62 User Manual 1 3 5 Using the ANSWER RELEASE Button To transfer an outside call to an extension with a one touch operation Dur
50. DND Both from Type FWD DND Outside calls Select FWD DND External from Type FWD DND Intercom calls Select FWD DND Internal from Type Group FWD Both calls Select Group Fwd Both from Type Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in Extension Number Group FWD Outside calls Select Group Fwd External from Type Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in Extension Number Group FWD Intercom calls Select Group Fwd Internal from Type Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in Extension Number Account Select Account from Type Conference Select Conference from Type Terminate Select Terminate from Type External Feature Access EFA Select EFA from Type Call Charge Reference Select Charge from Type Call Park Select Call Park from Type Then select Specific from Parameter Selection Specify the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number Call Park Automatic Park Zone Select Call Park from Type Then select Automatic from Parameter Selection Call Log Select Call Log from Type Call Log for ICD Group Select Call Log from Type Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in Extension Number Log in Log out Select Log in Log out from Type Then select None from Par
51. Enter the desired Call Transfer status Pp Follow the prompts as necessary gt aS On hook The prompts heard will vary depending on the feature you set in the previous step o e If Call Screening or Disable is selected calls will be transferred to an outside telephone if a telephone number has been programmed for call transfer to outside line refer to Assigning and Cancelling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to Outside Line Incomplete Call Handling When a call is directed to your extension via the Automated Attendant service Incomplete Call Handling will handle the calls if You do not answer the call These calls are considered no answer calls You are on another call These calls are considered busy calls e You have set Call Blocking refer to Call Transfer The status you set for Incomplete Call Handling determines what happens to these calls You can set one or more of the following for no answer calls and for busy calls separately If you select more than one option the caller will be prompted to select his or her desired option Leaving a Message The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox where he or she can leave a message for you Transfer to Covering Extension The system will transfer the caller to your Covering Extension refer to Assigning Your Covering Extension If you have not assigned your Covering Extension this option is not available Intercom Paging
52. Exit this software User Manual 193 1 8 7 Quick Reference 1 8 7 Quick Reference The flow below includes all top menu options and frequently used features Only options 1 4 and 0 are announced in the top menu when accessed If you press 0 help menu you can listen to the whole top menu options 1 9 The help menu may not be available from the top menu depending on the COS settings of your mailbox To Enter a Mailbox From a Remote Location Dial 6 mailbox number t gt Password Main Menu You have new messages 1 Listen to New Messages 2 Send a Message 3 Listen to Old Messages 4 Mailbox Management 5 Set Automated Attendant AA status 6 Message Notification 7 Change Absent Message 8 Call through Service 9 Other Features Hang Up Listen to New Messages 1 Voice Message All Messages HHE Send a Message Enter Mailbox Number 1 Record Message 2 Add Another Mailbox 3 Review Mailing List Listen to Old Messages 1 Voice Message All Messages BHE Continued on next page 194 User Manual Receive New Message During or after playback 1 Repeat Message 1 1 Previous Message 2 Next Message 3 Erase Message 4 Send Reply 5 Transfer Message 6 Message Envelope 7 Rewind During playback only 8 Pause Restart During playback only 8 4 Volume Up During playback only
53. Forward Do Not fl ee ae aeneae aasan Disturb as follows D ne e For Outside Calls To specify the forward type select the desired type from the For external calls drop down list then enter the telephone number or select Phone Home or Phone Mobile to specify the forward destination e For Intercom Calls To specify the forward type select the desired type from the For internal calls drop down list then enter the telephone number or select Phone Home or Phone Mobile to specify the forward destination 1 These phone numbers are set in the Contact tab of the Edit User screen Forinternat calls Note To apply settings to both outside and intercom calls click For both internal calls and external calls When you select this the setting of For external calls is applied to both outside and intercom calls 2 Click OK Storing names and numbers in personal speed dialling You can set frequently dialled numbers using two digit speed dialling numbers 00 99 A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed at your extension for your personal use 1 In the Telephony Feature tab click Speed Dialling View Edit Gun speed Dial 2 The available speed dialling numbers are shown in sets E o ro of 20 Select the desired set from Index DE 3 Enter the name of the Personal Speed Dialling number to call in Speed Dialling Personal Name max 20 characters 4 Enter the number to be dialle
54. G CO Used to access an idle outside line in a specified outside line group for making outside calls Incoming calls from outside lines in the assigned outside line group arrive at this button Single CO S CO Used to access a specified outside line for making or receiving outside calls 26 User Manual 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones Button Feature Direct Station Selection DSS Used to access an extension with one touch It is also possible to be changed to the other feature button For KX UT series SIP phones except KX UT113 KX UT 123 unlike a One Touch button this type of button cannot be used to dial feature numbers One touch Dialling Used to access a desired party or system feature with one touch Incoming Call Distribution Group ICD Group Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group for making or receiving calls Message Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication Message for Another Extension Used to have a Message button for another extension Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Both calls Used to forward all calls to a specified destination or refuse FWD DND Outside calls Used to forward outside calls to a specified destination or refuse FWD DND Intercom calls Used to forward intercom calls to a specified destination or refu
55. G CO _ _ Outside line group no 2 digits Single CO S CO 0 Outside line no 3 digits Direct Station Selection C Extension no DSS One touch Dialling C2 Desired no max 32 digits Incoming Call Distribution C3 0 Incoming call distribution group extension no Group ICD Group delayed ringing time 0 7 Message 4 0 Message for Another C4 0 Extension no Incoming call distribution group Extension extension no Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Both 4 1 calls FWD DND Outside calls Ca C2 318 User Manual 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Button Programming Input FWD DND Intercom calls C3 Group FWD Both calls C4 Incoming call distribution group extension no Group FWD Outside calls C5 Incoming call distribution group extension no Group FWD Intercom calls C6 Incoming call distribution group extension no Account Conference Terminate External Feature Access EFA Call Charge Reference Call Park HEEB BE Parking zone no 2 digits Call Park Automatic Park Zone GI Call Log A Call Log for ICD Group C4 Incoming call distribution group extension no Log in Log out C5 Log in Log out of a specified group C5 Incoming call distribution group extension no Log in Log out for all
56. List of Operations by Telephone Type e P PTs except models with a single line display e DPTs except models with a single line display Not available for the KX UT670 Live Call Screening LCS and Recording Your Conversation are only available for PTs and PSs Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder is only available for PTs SLTs and SIP phones OHCA is only available for certain DPTs Whisper OHCA is only available for IP PTs and certain DPTs Only available for DPTs Only available for Display PTs Only available for the KX NT300 series KX NT500 series KX DT300 series KX DT500 series and KX T7600 series Only available for the KX NT366 KX NT553 KX NT556 KX NT560 Only available for the KX UT248 and KX UT670 Setting the Timed Reminder is only available for PTs SLTs and SIP phones User Manual 369 5 2 1 Troubleshooting 5 2 Troubleshooting 5 2 1 Troubleshooting 370 Troubleshooting Problem Remedy The telephone does not work properly m Confirm with your manager that your settings are correct m f the problem persists consult your dealer The telephone does not respond when buttons are pressed The telephone is locked m Unlock your telephone amp amp 1 6 3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone Extension Dial Lock 2 1 1 Extension Control Some features do not work System management may restrict certain features mp Cons
57. Message Device Device No 1 2 3 You can be notified by e mail when a new message is recorded in your mailbox Click Edit for the extension to schedule program the settings and click OK to finish Note You can be notified by e mail when an outside call is missed For details refer to Changing Your Contact Information in 3 2 1 User Programming User Name Specifies the name of the user of the device E mail Address Specifies the e mail address of the device Only Urgent Messages Specifies if Message Waiting Notifications will be sent only for urgent messages Title Order Specifies the format of the title of the notification User Manual 333 3 2 334 1 User Programming Item Description Title String Specifies the text string to be included as part of the title of the notification Callback Number Specifies the callback number to be included in the notification max 32 digits Send Wait Time 0 120 min Specifies the delay between the message being left and the sending of the Message Waiting Notification Attach Voice File Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the voice message to the notification e mail Use Mode Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification e Not use The selected device is not used for message notification e Continuously The device is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox If Only Urgent Messages is s
58. Message Ringer Lamp 1 1 Before Operating the Telephones Page 14 Cellular Phone Features This PBX supports the use of cellular phones with the PBX Cellular phones can make and receive calls as if they were registered extensions 1 15 Cellular Phone Features Page 261 Wireless System This PBX optionally supports a Portable Station PS system PSs can be used in the PBX with other wired telephones 1 9 12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Page 212 Call Centre This PBX offers a built in Call Centre feature called Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group Incoming calls to an ICD Group can be queued or redirected to a preprogrammed destination answered in order of priority and monitored by a supervisor extension Customers Queuing 1 10 Utilising the Call Centre Page 216 Feature Highlights Built in Unified Messaging You can set incoming calls to be redirected to your mailbox to let callers leave voice messages when you are unable to answer the phone You can access your mailbox to listen to the messages when you are away from the office as well Hello this is John Smith Please leave your message 1 8 Using the Unified Messaging Features Page 140 Communication Assistant CA CA Client users can connect to the PBX without using an external server CA Client users can make calls by clicking in a phonebook on their PC
59. Message Waiting Lamp 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable Notification 2 2 to accept Device Notification for 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable Unreceived Messages 2 2 to accept External Message Delivery 4 T to change the current setting enable or disable e If set to Enable go to Prompt Mode 2 2 to accept Prompt Mode 1 1 for Primary C2 for System C3 for Caller Select e For System enter the system prompt number 1 8 2 4 to accept the current setting then go to External Message Delivery User Manual 2 2 1 System Manager Features Parameters Steps Auto Forwarding 1 N C41 If set to Disable a b c d 2 to change the current setting enable or disable The following mailbox settings are skipped Forwarding Mailbox Number Forwarding Delay Time Forwarding Mode The Auto Forwarding parameter is the last parameter to be entered To continue assigning or editing other mailboxes go back to STEP B To finish enter to accept Forwarding Mailbox Number a ade Enter the forwarding mailbox number es 2 to change the current setting to accept Forwarding Delay Time ey Enter the delay time and C1 2 to change the current setting to accept Forwarding Mode N C41 2 to change the current setting Copy or Move
60. Messages Left by Callers Accessing Your Message Box from an Outside Telephone Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension from Your Extension e This feature is not available for SIP Extensions Even if a caller leaves a voice messages for a SIP Extension the Message button light or Message Ringer Lamp will not turn on to tell you that a voice message has been received e You may hear a busy tone when trying to access your message box if too many other users are already accessing their message boxes In that case wait a few minutes and try again e Ifthe used recording space including greeting messages and voice messages left by callers for the SVM feature reaches a certain limit the display informs you that the recording space is almost full and you will hear dial tone 3 when going off hook Dial Tone 3 Uy REZET AMANNAN i e Operation Reference When Accessing Your Message Box After entering the SVM feature number 38 the operations below are available by entering EE the corresponding numbers Operation No Operation Co To clear the normal greeting message 1 To record a normal greeting message 2 To play back the normal greeting message C3 To listen to voice messages left by callers To set a greeting message for each time mode 6 To leave a voice message to another extension s message box User Manual 119 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message
61. R B Tone D Goes Wo D Ea FS Off hook Dial extension Enter 1 Talk number aS e SIP phone users cannot use DND Override to call someone who has set the DND feature but can let other extensions call them using DND Override when the DND feature is set User Manual 49 50 1 2 5 Accessing the ISDN Service ISDN Service Access 1 2 5 Accessing the ISDN Service ISDN Service Access You can access services provided by the ISDN GzP To access gases If all required digits are stored Q amine gt p gt co a Requires to dial ISDN Service gt service code gees additional digits Off hook Seize outside line Press ISDN service Or press ISDN service and then enter service code and then press ISDN service again a On hook a e Availability of features depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit an ISDN Service button User Manual 1 2 6 Alternating the Calling Method Alternate Calling Ring Voice 1 2 6 Alternating the Calling Method Alternate Calling Ring Voice The caller can alternate the alerting method either ring or voice when making an intercom call On the other hand any extension can set the alerting method either ring or voice when receiving an intercom call Ringing Default You can call the other party with a ring tone Voice calling You can talk to the other party i
62. The other party will be on hold To leave the conversation and then let the two parties talk During a conversation Ce DSS hi gt BS gt eR TRANSFER Press TRANSFER Press DSS or dial the other Talk to the Press TRANSFER On hook party s extension number other party During a conversation gt Q Ea Press Recall Dial the other party s Talk to the Press Recall On hook hookswitch extension number other party hookswitch 78 User Manual 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting Answering Call Waiting in the PBX Answering Call Waiting from the Telephone Company Answering Call Waiting in the PBX During a conversation a call waiting tone or voice announcement through the speaker or the handset occurs when an outside call has been received or another extension is letting you know a call is waiting You must activate this feature to use it Default Disable No call Intercom calls No tone Outside calls You can answer the second call by disconnecting 1 or holding 2 the current call 1 To disconnect the current call and then talk to the new party PT SLT PS KX UT series While hearing a tone T N F Talk to the On hook Off hook new party 2 To hold the current call and then talk to the new party While hearing a tone Ove Press HOLD Talk to the new party INT INTERCOM Disregard this step if both Press
63. The system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature Your name will be announced to alert you to the call Transfer to Custom Service The system will transfer the caller to the Custom Service you specify here Transfer to Operator The system will transfer the caller to the operator User Manual 1 8 5 Transferring Calls Return to Top Menu The caller is returned to the top menu of the Automated Attendant service and can then choose to call a different extension To set Incomplete Call Handling status PT SLT PS SIP Extn 4 No answer calls Leavirig a Message boani ilb gt 5 gt gt 2 Transfer to Covering Extension gt gt og in to your mailbox ane C55 Intercom Paging y 4 Transfer to Custom Service Enter 5 Enter 4 or 5 5 Transfer to Operator 6 Return to Top Menu Enter the desired Incomplete Call Handling status To continue Follow the prompts gt gt as necessary gt 2 Accept The prompts heard will vary depending Enter 1 or 2 on the feature you set in the previous step On hook a e When Call Blocking is enabled blocked calls are treated by Incomplete Call Handling for no answer calls Assigning Your Covering Extension A Covering Extension is an extension that receives your calls instead of you Your calls can be transferred to your Covering Extension in 2 ways By the Incomplete Call Handling Feature When the Incomplete Call Handling feature handle
64. Toset To cancel 12H 1 hour minute O AM 1 PM 0 once 1 daily 24H 1 hour minute 0 once 1 daily 0 User Manual 379 5 3 1 Feature Number Table 380 Feature While dial tone is heard Default New Additional digits buttons 1 9 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA For intercom calls No call Tone OHCA Whisper OHCA For outside calls No tone Tone 731 732 0 No call 1 Tone 2 OHCA 3 Whisper OHCA 0 No tone 1 Tone 1 9 4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Callers Telephone Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Public Your extension X72 1 9 5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller s Telephone Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR To show To prevent 7X0 1 9 6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party s Telephone Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR To show To prevent X7 1 1 9 7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation Executive Busy Override Deny To prevent To allow 733 1 9 8 Turning on the Background Music BGM Toset Tocancel 751 BGM no 1 digit 0 1 9 9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones Data Line Security Tose
65. Two way Record from Type Then enter the UM group s or the voice mail group s floating extension number in Extension Number The UM group s and the voice mail group s default floating extension number is 500 Two way Transfer Select Two way Transfer from Type Then enter the UM group s or the voice mail group s floating extension number in Extension Number The UM group s and the voice mail group s default floating extension number is 500 Specify the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One touch Two way Transfer in Ext No of Mailbox For example a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss If the cell is left empty the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time One touch Two way Transfer Select Two way Transfer from Type Then enter the UM group s or the voice mail group s floating extension number in Extension Number The UM group s and the voice mail group s default floating extension number is 500 Enter extension number or incoming call distribution group extension number to Ext No of Mailbox Live Call Screening LCS Select LCS from Type Voice Mail Transfer Select Voice Mail Transfer from Type Then enter the UM group s or the voice mail group s floating extension number in Extension Number The UM group s and the voice mail group s default floating extension number
66. UT670 when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled a status icon appears on the display For details refer to the documentation for your phone The FWD DND button light shows the current status as follows Off Both features are not set Red on FWD mode Flashing red slowly DND mode For KX UT series SIP phones you can see the current status on the display User Manual 199 1 9 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND The system has two modes 1 FWD DND Cycle Switch Mode and 2 FWD DND Setting Mode Ask your manager what mode your system is in if you are not sure For KX UT series SIP phones only FWD DND Setting Mode is supported 1 When in FWD DND Cycle Switch Mode Pressing the FWD DND button fixed button while in idle status will cycle the setting as shown below ie als 2 When in FWD DND Setting Mode Pressing the FWD DND button fixed button while in idle status allows you to switch the FWD DND status and set the FWD destination refer to Switching FWD DND Status Using Fixed FWD DND Button Note A FWD DND button customised button is always in FWD DND Cycle Switch Mode the mode cannot be changed If your extension has set this feature a calling extension will hear DND tone If this feature is set the Call Forwarding FWD feature does not work Specified extensions can override this feature and call DND extensions DND Override When making a call using an SDN button to a PDN
67. Voice Mail Transfer Press Voice Mail Transfer To transfer a call to a mailbox During a conversation DSS Voice Mail gt Transfer desired extension no Press Voice Mail Press DSS or dial desired Transfer extension number User Manual 175 1 8 5 Transferring Calls To transfer your own call to the called extension s mailbox J Voice Mail Pan Crates DSS Off hook Dial extension number DND Tone Press Voice Mail or press DSS Transfer o e Indication tone after going off hook 5 s lt lt _ _ _ gt 1 1 eel LL e If using a PS in parallel with a PT or SLT in Wireless XDP Parallel mode you cannot use the Voice Mail Transfer button to forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button 176 User Manual 1 8 6 Other Features 1 8 6 Other Features Interview Mailbox Message Waiting Notification Personal Caller Name Announcement Live Call Screening LCS Recording Your Conversation Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log in and Toll Saver Personal Custom Service Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder Setting Absent Message Remotely Call through Service Communication Assistant plug in for Microsoft Outlook IMAP L aR a dk dk HHH HHH Interview Mailbox An interview mailbox is a mailbox de
68. You can control your status in an incoming call distribution group When in the Log out mode incoming calls to the group will not ring at your extension When you return calls will again ring at your extension Default Log in Even if your extension is logged in you can have a specified time period wrap up time when you will not receive calls after es completing a previous call This time can be used for you _ 7e to write a report and so on a You can also manually select Not Ready mode to ki temporarily leave a distribution group n s am Not Read ei i 1 6 eee To set Log in Log out 216 PT SLT PS SIP Extn ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group C0 Log out E Fe X gt aaa gt ca Off hook Enter 736 Enter 0 or 1 ICD Group P Al Enter ICD Group extension On hook number or User Manual 1 10 1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out Wrap up ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group While on hook ICD Grou _ Specified gt Log in Log out ORJ Al Press Log in Log out Enter ICD Group extension number or KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 While on hook Log in Log out for all groups Log in Log out of a specified group Press Log in Log out for all groups or Log in Log out of a specified group While on hook Log in Log out of a specified group Press Log in Log out of a specified
69. a conversation c_ hone no Ta G4 Press ISDN Hold Dial phone number Talk On hook This step can be omitted During a conversation C Tone 5 2 GaGa gt Come gt FS gt ae Press Enter 62 Dial phone number Talk On hook TRANSFER This step can be omitted 68 User Manual 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer During a conversation yj in che CEE gt rfc gt T Press Recall Enter 62 Dial phone number Talk On hook hookswitch This step can be omitted e To retrieve the held call press the TRANSFER button Recall nookswitch Even if you go on hook while transferring a call it is transferred e After the call is transferred the line becomes idle EE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit an ISDN Hold button Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service To transfer a call with announcement Attended Transfer During a conversation TRANSFER D outside G0 2 cam gt GE gt Ok gt S Press TRANSFER Seize outside line Dial outside phone On hook number User Manual 69 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer During a conversation D outside ma a i ie gt Seize outside line Dial outside phone On hook Press Recall hookswitch number To transfer a call without announcement Blind Transfer During a conversation TRANCHER D i cu e Gea gt gt C Tone Press Enter 61
70. a reminder Hold N Recall If an outside call is not answered within a specified time it is automatically disconnected If Automatic Call Hold has been preprogrammed you can put the current call on hold automatically by pressing another PDN button to make or answer another call 102 User Manual 1 5 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Call Transfer Using SDN Button You can transfer a call to a PDN extension with a simple operation using a corresponding SDN button To transfer a call to a PDN extension During a conversation gt mn Press SDN Talk On hook This step can be omitted Pe e System programming is required to use this feature during a conversation with an extension e When an SDN button is in Standard SDN Key Mode you have to press the SDN button twice to transfer the call unless you used that SDN button to answer an incoming call IE Customising Your Phone 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Select the seized line when going off hook e 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Select the seized line when going off hook e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Primary Directory Number PDN or Secondary Directory Number SDN button User Manual 103 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls gt Forward
71. accept User Manual 2 2 1 System Manager Features Parameters Steps Announce Message 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable Transferred Information 2 2 to accept Caller ID Announcement 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable 2 2 to accept Announce Option Menu 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable After Erasing Messages 3 3 2 2 to accept New Message Length 1 C1 to change the current setting enable or disable Announcement 2 2 to accept 1 Not available for COS No 65 Message Manager and COS No 66 System Manager Remote Time Service Mode Setting You can set the time service mode from an outside telephone even when you are away from the office To set the time service mode C1 to set Day mode C2 to set Night mode C3 to set Lunch mode C4 to set Break mode 1 Log in to the System Manager s mailbox 4 3 Enter the tenant number and 4 1 tochange 5 Select the desired Time Service mode entry Changing the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting When the Unified Messaging system answers calls it greets the callers with a Company Greeting and then activates an Incoming Call Service The System Manager or System Administrator can choose The appropriate company greeting for each time mode Day Night Lunch and Break of each call service The default
72. any extension while talking to the doorphone PT SLT PS SIP Extn w E RE C Tone y Enter 5 On hook o e The door open will be triggered for a specified time period 224 User Manual 1 11 2 If an External Relay is Connected 1 11 2 If an External Relay is Connected Preprogrammed extensions can switch on a relay e g alarm connected to the PBX To switch on the relay PT SLT PS S gt w gt Cam l C Tone Off hook Enter 56 Enter relay number On hook 2 digits i e The relay will be switched off after a specified time period aa User Manual 225 1 11 3 If an External Sensor is Connected 1 11 3 If an External Sensor is Connected Preprogrammed extensions can receive an alert call from an external sensor e g security alarm connected to the PBX To answer a sensor call PT SLT PS SIP Extn Off hook On hook e Ifyou do not answer a sensor call within a specified time period the sensor call will stop IE Dial Tone Definitions e 54 Whatis This Tone 226 User Manual 1 11 4 If a Host PBX is Connected 1 11 4 If a Host PBX is Connected Accessing External Services External Feature Access EFA Accessing External Services External Feature Access EFA You can access special features e g Call Waiting offered by a host PBX or telephone company This feature is only effective for an outside call lt Example gt To hold the current call and then
73. be added to the e mail as an attachment Consult your System Administrator for more information a Displaying the number of new messages is only available with a 6 line Display PT For more information consult your System Administrator To turn Message Waiting Lamp Notification On Off PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt C61 gt 1 Enter 61 Enter 1 to enable disable lamp notification On hook User Manual 179 1 8 6 Other Features To turn Device Notification On Off PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt C62 gt bb Enter 62 Enter the desired device number 1 6 Send notification for all messages CD Usea preprogrammed schedule GO LORI gt 2 Receive notification always continuously gt g Send notification G Turn off notifications for urgent messages only Enter 1 or 2 Enter 1 2 or 3 nad e Device number 4 5 or 6 is used to specify a device number that is Device No 1 2 or 3 for E mail Text Message Device in Web Maintenance Console e To use the Device Notification feature for device number 1 2 or 3 the telephone number for each device should first be assigned To change device numbers PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt C6 3 gt gt 14 Enter 63 Enter the desired Enter 1 to change device number 1 3 the assigned number To delete the assigned number press 3 then go on hook to finish gt outside telephone no gt
74. be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator e Ifyou are using a PRI line you may need to enter at the end of outside telephone numbers Consult your System Administrator for more information Voice Mail Transfer If you cannot answer calls you can forward them to your mailbox You can select the type of incoming calls Intercom Calls Outside Calls Both Calls that are forwarded If your telephone has a Message button the Message light turns on when a message is left in your mailbox You will hear an indication tone when going off hook regardless of whether or not your telephone has a Message button 174 User Manual 1 8 5 Transferring Calls You can also create a Voice Mail Transfer button on your phone to transfer received outside calls to a mailbox of another extension so that calling parties can leave messages Using the Voice Mail Transfer button you can also perform operations with one touch for PT and PS only To forward your calls to your mailbox PT SLT PS SIP Extn 9 Both Calls Cancel OR All Calls PAN gt CILA gt G9 Outside Calls Busy ORJ No Answer 9 Intercom Calls Busy No Answer Off hook Enter 71 Enter 0 to 2 as you desire Enter required number For Cancel go on hook directly after entering 0 UM group s floating Gm gt gt D h Enter UM group s floating Enter extension number To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing While on hook
75. before For KX UT670 dialling an outside phone number Press Conference Start User Manual 87 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation To add another party on hold to a conference During a 3 to 7 party conference bo GA Press CONF Press CONF Talk with multiple parties Press the flashing CO ICD Group PDN or SDN corresponding to the party on hold To talk to two parties alternately in a three party conversation During a conversation lal TRANSFER Press TRANSFER During a conversation 1P m Press Recall hookswitch 88 User Manual 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation To disconnect one party and then talk to the other in a three party conversation During a conversation r TRANSFER Press TRANSFER once Press FLASH RECALL or twice to establish a conversation with the party to be disconnected INTERCOM INT The other party will be put on hold Press the flashing CO ICD Group PDN SDN or INTERCOM corresponding to the party on hold In this case the FLASH RECALL button on a proprietary telephone must be set to Flash Recall mode through system programming During a three party conversation pressing the TRANSFER button or Recall hookswitch alternates between the other parties in the conversation You can have a conference with a maximum of eight parties comprising intercom or outside lines simultaneously During a conversation involving four or more parties you ca
76. can delete voice messages in your mailbox Once a message has been deleted it is retained until the end of the day then it will be permanently deleted Deleted messages can be recovered after which they will be treated as old messages User Manual 153 1 8 3 Message Playback and Related Features 154 To recover a Deleted Message PT SLT PS SIP Extn During or after voice message playback Enter 3 Replying to Messages You can reply to messages left in your mailbox by either calling back the caller or by leaving a message in the callers mailbox Calling back is possible when the person who left you the message is another subscriber Calling back outside callers is possible if their Caller ID information is received by the system however this feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox Replying by leaving a message in the caller s mailbox is possible only if the caller is another subscriber i e the person must have his or her own mailbox When replying by leaving a message in the caller s mailbox you can set any of the following e Urgent Status The message will be heard before other messages by the recipient e Private Status The recipient will not be able to forward the message ensuring privacy e Auto Receipt You will receive notification receipt message once the recipient has played back the message Finally you can send your reply immediately or set a m
77. can lock your call log display by using an extension PIN Personal Identification Number gt so that you can prohibit access to your logged information Display Lock Refer to 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode If a call arrives while you are using the call log the call log display will be replaced with the caller s information User Manual 249 1 14 2 Using the Directories 1 14 2 Using the Directories You can call using the directories Personal Speed Dialling Directory System Speed Dialling Directory and Extension Number Directory Only personal directories can be stored edited or deleted on your extension If a call arrives while you are using a directory the display will be replaced with the caller s information Calling with the Directory gt Storing Names and Numbers gt Entering Characters o e PS users Refer to the documentation for your PS 8 Calling with the Directory To select and call KX NT300 KX NT500 KX DT300 KX DT500 KX T7600 While on hook Press Right until Press Up or Down Off hook desired directory until desired appears party appears a e The display order is as follows One time Personal Speed Dialling Directory Two times System Speed Dialling Directory Three times Extension Number Directory e To cancel or exit press the CANCEL or FLASH RECALL button e You can lock your personal speed dialling directory by using an extension PIN Personal
78. can receive the calls from the doorphone You can open the door Doorphone Call Opening a Door Door Open Doorphone Call To call from the doorphone Doorphone o00000 Press doorphone button For KX UT series SIP phone users If the doorphone number and name are stored in the phonebook of your phone the doorphone information is displayed on your phone when a call arrives from the doorphone For KX UT670 SIP phone users The video feed from a network camera can be displayed on your phone s display when a call arrives from a doorphone and the following settings are configured on your phone The network camera is registered to a contact The doorphone number is registered to the contact and Doorphone is selected as the label for the phone number For details about the settings refer to the documentation for your phone User Manual 223 1 11 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected To call the doorphone PT SLT PS SIP Extn DD gt Goa gt chm G Off hook Enter 31 Enter doorphone Talk number 2 digits o e f no one answers a doorphone call within a specified time period the call is cancelled A Opening a Door Door Open Some extensions may be prohibited from using this feature From a specified extension PT SLT PS SIP Extn D gt GGG gt Gamm 2 w amp C Tone Off hook Enter 55 Enter doorphone On hook number 2 digits From
79. cc eseeeeseeeceeseeeeeeeeeeens 306 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode cscccs ccccccssiceccccccteccatanessseccedtdaeesdatantaidinbid catdecanideadee 308 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons x2ctice ceccsendiveatasesaieeneseedadslelcenestesuie Gindinypdoesseanseed teense 318 3 2 System Programming Using Web Maintenance Console sseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 323 3 2 1 User ProgramMiINg arsusiri aed ease ae a aa E abate a aT ENET 323 4 Customising Extensions and the System for Managers 349 4 1 Manager Programming sccccwensitwenurrencimertvandususn tains naiieiddsnssiemsaeus laaninudinienninuntcntendlenieaninaniiieves 350 4 1 1 Programming Information cee cent cece Ge atte ca eae eee a eee beta eee ees ee acer coatseaa ete 350 4 1 2 Manager Programming ss 25 cescaauecicrcece ve cesedideei neta ut seul ete vo rnaeeitote ue nanna 351 4 1 3 supervisory Monitor ACD Control cc ccsccccsis csacectecdes sa savaseitacectececeedtatadtuvsstetdsestdcauseanadee 353 5 1 payee se nore r er ene ne eee eee nese tn eee eee anenee aiae 361 5 1 List of Operations by Telephone Type cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeaeeeeaneaeeseesneeeees 362 5 1 1 List of Operations by Telephone Type cece ccc cccecccneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaaaeaneeeseeeeeeeeeeess 362 5 2 EES FO GAG sate wniiconnsdancccncemesrinnanteeaeeinestiaantineicanenbanaeainmesennmanaunedinngnmuadaananienene 370 5 2 1 Troubleshooting ronsrniai irira a a TEN EENET Ea 3
80. each device the notification is enabled or disabled according to a preset schedule The Message Manager can enable a device according to a schedule However the System Administrator must first assign a destination number to the desired device 1 Log in to the Message Manager s mailbox 2 2 Enter the device number 1 6 e Device number 4 5 or 6 is used to specify a device number that is Device No 1 2 or 3 for E mail Text Message Device in Web Maintenance Console e Ifa telephone number has not been assigned to the selected device number 1 2 or 3 you cannot set the device status Refer to To assign notification numbers to assign a telephone number Select the desired message type C1 to notify all messages C2 to notify urgent messages Select when the device will be used for message notification C1 for schedule a notification is sent each time a message is received but only during the times programmed by the System Administrator C2 for continuously C3 for disable notifications are not sent Customising the Message Manager s Mailbox The Message Manager can customise the Message Manager s mailbox by changing the following parameters The Message Manager s mailbox password The extension numbers of Operator 1 2 and 3 User Manual 293 2 2 2 Message Manager Features 294 Telephone numbers 1 and 2 used for call forwarding destinations when Remote Call Forwarding i
81. eee Accessing Web Maintenance Console for the First Time This step is required only when accessing Web Maintenance Console for the first time N e For the IP address of the PBX login name and password ask your System Administrator e Ifthe configuration of the Web browser or PC changes the certificate may need to be installed again Once a certificate has been installed Web Maintenance Console will be displayed after step 2 1 Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance Console port number into the address bar and then press Enter 2 If you connect to Web Maintenance Console using SSL a security alert window is displayed Follow the prompts to install a security certificate The procedure may vary according to your browser Logging in to Web Maintenance Console After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console the login window is displayed and a login name and password must be entered Web Maintenance Console Username Password Login User Manual 323 3 2 1 User Programming a e Ifyou attempt to log in but enter an incorrect password three times you may not attempt to log in again for a 5 minute period CAUTION For security change the password the first time that you programme the PBX e Itis strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access e To avoid
82. finish gt gt 2 Delete a Caller ID number LOR 2 Delete one number CG Review all assigned Caller ID numbers then go on hook to finish Enter 1 or 2 Enter the desired option C Delete the announced number Keep the number and announce the next number then repeat this step Enter 1 or 2 On hook Changing Your Password You can protect your mailbox by setting a password to prevent unauthorised access to your mailbox If your mailbox has a password you must enter it using the dial keys 0 9 whenever you log in to your mailbox Your password can contain up to 16 digits You can change your password at any time When choosing a password avoid using obvious number combinations If you forget your password have your System Administrator or System Manager clear your password You may then set a new one 148 User Manual 1 8 2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox To change your password PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt C4 2 1 gt your desired password C gt gt Enter 421 Enter the desired password and Enter 2 to accept On hook a CAUTION e Itis strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access e To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX keep the password secret If it becomes known to others the PBX may be misused e Change the password periodically Changing or Deleting Your Subscrib
83. for operations A flexible number is shown as L09 half shaded key Use the new programmed number if you have changed the feature number Write the new number in 5 3 1 Feature Number Table Appendix Notice The default value of a flexible feature number may vary depending on country area User Manual 23 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones If you use a single line telephone which does not have the or keys 6 5 O it is not possible to access features that have X or in their feature numbers F Ss Tone You will hear various tones during or after an operation for confirmation Refer to 5 4 1 What is This Tone Appendix Display In this manual the display refers to the display of a Panasonic telephone If your telephone is not a Panasonic display telephone the message will not be displayed If you use a Panasonic display telephone the display helps you confirm the settings Some telephones also give you easy access to features Messages are displayed according to the feature used By pressing the corresponding button on the side or at the bottom of the display or by pressing the Navigator Key you can access various features Furthermore depending on the display telephone used you can operate features or make calls using the displayed message Refer to 1 14 Using a Telephone with a Display Notice In this manual the display messages are described in English Your Extension Number
84. gt GGG gt csi gt CHD gt Coeur gt gt Off hook Enter 7 5 Enter outside line Enter Enter your multiple number 3 digits subscriber number MSN D The display shows gt gt L 9 gt 1 c a ne the selected type Enter Enter 1 On hook User Manual 1 6 2 Showing a Message on the Caller s Telephone Display Absent Message 1 6 2 Showing a Message on the Caller s Telephone Display Absent Message You can show the reason you do not answer if the caller uses a Panasonic display proprietary telephone There are eight preprogrammed messages and one for your personal message 16 characters The selected message is shown on the display of your telephone For callers using KX UT series SIP phones the message will not be shown on their display Message no Message Example 1 Will Return Soon Gone Home At Ext Extension number Back at Hour Minute Out until Month Day In a Meeting OO MO NI OD oa BI Ww bd A message assigned for each extension Personal Absent Message To set PT SLT PS SIP Extn C1 wii Return Soon 2 cone Home SS gt CILA gt Ga Ext Extension no 4 Back at Hour Minute CE out until 3 33 Month Day Off hook Enter 750 Gin a Meeting a 2 T Enter required number C Tone y Enter On hook To cancel PT SLT PS SIP Extn XJ m o YS C Tone Of
85. headset PT KX UT series D Off hook To talk in hands free mode during a conversation using the headset PT KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 Headset Press red Headset x e The Headset button light shows the current status as follows Off Headset mode off Red on Headset mode on e This feature is not available for the KX T7665 98 User Manual 1 4 8 Using the Headset Headset Operation For KX NT300 series except KX NT321 KX NT560 KX DT343 KX DT346 KX UT248 i telephone users an With KX NT300 series except KX NT321 KX NT560 KX DT343 KX DT346 KX UT248 telephones you can use a Bluetooth wireless headset registered on your extension as a headset Operating Distance Please keep the telephones with connected Bluetooth Modules 3 m or more apart from each other Also if a Bluetooth headset is in use near a telephone with a connected Bluetooth Module other than the one it is registered to noise may be heard Move away from the telephone and closer to the one it is registered to to improve the signal Noise Signals are transmitted between this module and the Bluetooth headset using radio waves For maximum distance and noise free operation it is recommended that the module is situated away from electrical appliances such as faxes radios PCs or microwaves e Systems using the 2 4 GHz ISM Industrial Scientific and Medical band may interfere with this product Examples of such systems a
86. hook Press NDSS Talk a To start monitoring another PBX extension after customising an NDSS button go off hook press the NDSS button and go on hook EF The NDSS button light will show the current status as follows Off The extension is idle Red on The extension is busy ILS Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Network Direct Station Selection NDSS button Using an Account Code Account Code Entry You may give a specified account code to extension users and check their telephone usage You can specify an account code for each client and check the call duration PT SLT PS SIP Extn Ee ay D gt d a EJZDED Off hook Press Account or Enter account code Enter enter 49 max 10 digits outside gt gt Dial outside phone number Seize an outside line before entering an outside phone number User Manual 35 1 2 1 Basic Calling S e A Panasonic proprietary telephone extension user can enter an account code during a conversation and when hearing reorder tone after the other party hangs up e Account codes may use the digits 0 through 9 Depending on the settings of your PBX you may be required to enter an account code to make an outside call If you enter the wrong code press the X key and re enter the account code For your convenience you can store the code with the phone number in the memory e g Speed Dialling aa C
87. is 500 User Manual 3 2 1 User Programming Button Steps DN Select DN from Type The UM group s default floating extension number depends on system programming For more information consult your System Administrator or System Manager aS For KX NT366 KX NT553 KX NT556 KX NT560 users You can set the text displayed for each flexible button for the phone s Self Labelling feature in Label Name on the Flexible Button screen e For KX UT248 and KX UT670 users You can set the text displayed a maximum of 10 characters for each flexible button for the phone s Self Labelling feature in Label Name on the Flexible Button screen Changing Your Password You can change your password for the Web Maintenance Console in the Login Account tab of the Edit User screen 1 Inthe Login Account tab Password 4 16 characters G ves Edit User E ce coe eiee emer oor moe in length can be edited Note ra prteetan che eet eae Entry for the password is hidden and displayed as dots 2 Click OK Automatic Two way Recording for Manager If you are designated as a supervisor for Automatic Two way Recording you can set the recording for extensions you are supervising and listen to the recorded conversations as messages through Web Maintenance Console Calls to and from specified extensions can be automatically recorded to a mailbox For each targeted extension the following types of ca
88. line access number and then outside phone number On hook For KX UT series max 26 digits For non KX UT series SIP phone users a The following features are available for SIP phone users Making calls Answering calls Holding calls Transferring calls You cannot go on hook before the transferred party answers The available operations using feature numbers are limited Refer to the telephone types displayed at the top left of each operation The tones listed in 5 4 1 What is This Tone are not available for SIP phone users Tones or the tone types may vary depending on the type of telephone being used For example when you put a call on hold a specific tone for the SIP phone may be heard or no tone may be heard Any number pressed while hearing a Busy DND Reorder tone such as the feature number to activate Automatic Callback Busy will be ignored The operations for SIP phones may differ from the steps in this manual and may vary depending on the type of telephone being used User Manual 7 Feature Highlights f To execute an operation some SIP phones may require that the OK button is pressed after pressing all the buttons of the operation Notes for KX WT115 PS Users The operation and display of the KX WT115 may differ from KX TCA series PSs For example when the KX WT115 is not answered while using it in parallel with a wired telephone the display of incoming
89. numbers in personal speed dialling C10 gt O personal speed Dd gt dialling no gt gt AUTO DIAL STORE Press PROGRAM Enter 10 and then press ENTER Enter personal speed or PAUSE Or press STORE dialling number 2 digits ie CLS a Ei 7 AUTO DIAL AUTO DIAL STORE STORE Enter phone number Press ENTER Enter name Press ENTER max 32 digits or STORE max 20 characters or STORE PROG PROGRAM Press PROGRAM or PAUSE o e To enter characters refer to Entering Characters User Manual 315 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode To edit the names and numbers of personal speed dialling Ci jo gt LO personal speed gt a gt dialling no gt gt AUTO DIAL STORE Press PROGRAM Enter 10 and then press ENTER Enter personal speed or PAUSE Or press STORE dialling number 2 digits To erase a number or character CLEAR m Alr Press Left or Right Press CLEAR to select a desired part D gt AUTO DIAL To insert a number or character STORE Press ENTER or STORE alr gt number character Press Left or Right Enter a number or to select a desired part character It will be inserted in front of the selected part Clearing Features You can clear or change to features as follows Features Default Setting Display Switching Mode Automatic Hot Line Off Calling Line Identification Restrict
90. one refer to Assigning Your Covering Extension You can also select what happens when a caller makes no selection No DTMF Input Operation while listening to your greeting perhaps because the caller is using a rotary pulse telephone The caller can either be transferred to your mailbox or be disconnected a The following dialling keys are assigned to the following features by default and cannot be changed End recording C41 2 Begin recording while listening to personal greeting message User Manual 187 1 8 6 Other Features Exit To create your personal custom service PT SLT PS SIP Extn eee gt 4 6 1 gt desired dialling key gt 1 p gt Enter 461 Enter the desired dialling key 0 3 9 Enter 1 that you want to assign an option to Skip this step if you are creating your D Transfer to a mailbox Personal Custom Service for the first time then enter the desired mailbox number Transfer to an extension then enter the desired extension number Transfer to an outside telephone may not be available GO Next enter the outside line access number C2 gt and the desired outside telephone number including area code if needed C Transfer to a Custom Service Enter 2 then enter the desired Custom Service number to accept G Activate Voice Mail Service C6 Activate Automated Attendant Service Call Transfer Service Activate p
91. pressing REDIAL if you hear a busy tone again press REDIAL to retry If you want to log outgoing intercom calls to the outgoing call log consult your System Installer If you have seized a trunk pressing the REDIAL button will be ignored if the last number you dialled was an extension Automatic Redial To redial automatically press the SP PHONE button and then the REDIAL button or press the REDIAL button directly It will keep trying the busy number until the called party answers or until a specified timeout You can perform other tasks during dialling To cancel press the FLASH RECALL button Some outside lines may not support this feature This feature is not available for the KX T7665 or PS 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer Reserving a Busy Line Automatic Callback Busy Setting Callback on an ISDN Line Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS Sending a Call Waiting Notification Call Waiting Leaving a Message Waiting Indication Calling Back the Caller Who Left an Indication Message Waiting Joining an Existing Call Executive Busy Override Monitoring Another Extension Call Monitor To an Extension Refusing the Call DND Override Reserving a Busy Line Automatic Callback Busy You can set the telephone to receive callback ringing when a dialled extension becomes idle when
92. prompted to record his or her name The Unified Messaging system then calls you and plays back the caller name You can choose whether to answer the call e Leave a Message Transfers the caller to the mailbox Intercom Paging Pages you by intercom e Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service VIP Filter If Leave a Message is selected for Selection and Enable is selected for this setting calls from certain phone numbers will be transferred directly to your extension or specified telephone number e Telephone Number 1 2 3 Specifies the telephone numbers that the VIP Filter setting will be applied to When a call is received from any of the numbers specified here the call will be transferred immediately to the destination specified in Transfer to Selection Transfer to Selection Specifies the transfer destination for calls transferred according to the VIP Filter setting Extension The call is transferred to your extension Other The call is transferred to the telephone number that is specified in Transfer to Other Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu Select a Custom Service from the drop down menu if Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu is selected for Selection Transfer to specified telephone number 1 If None or Call screening is selected for Selection specifying a telephone number here will transfer the caller to that telephone number
93. remotely Automatic Log in When logging in to your mailbox remotely from a preprogrammed outside telephone number assigned as a Caller ID number you do not need to enter any special commands or your mailbox number The Unified Messaging system can recognise the telephone number you are calling from and therefore determine you are the caller refer to Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log in and Toll Saver This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox e Manual Log in Manual Log in is necessary if logging in to your mailbox when your mailbox is not programmed for Automatic Log in or when you are calling from a telephone number not programmed for Automatic Log in i Ask your System Administrator what telephone number you should dial in order to access the Unified Messaging system remotely EE Remote automatic log in From Outside Telephone Call the Unified Messaging system from the preprogrammed gt En gt gt outside telephone number assigned as a Caller ID number Enter your password and Enter 1 to play back messages This step can be omitted if your mailbox requires no password EDEB Call an extension GDCD Call the operator gt C C9 gt Be Enter 9 On hook Follow the prompts when finished or enter 8 or 80 i e The number of rings you hear before the Unified Messaging system answers your call can indicate whether or no
94. select a tab for the desired type of prompt User Manual 325 3 2 1 User Programming To record a prompt Select a Prompt No and click Play Record When Record from extension is selected a b c d Specify the extension number of the telephone used for recording then click Connect When the specified extension rings go off hook Click Record Stop or Play to record or play a system prompt Click Disconnect When Import from recorded file is selected a b c d e Click Browse The Open dialogue box appears Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you wish to import Select the desired WAV file Click Open to import the file Click OK To start and stop prompt playback a b c Select the desired prompt Click Play Record Click Play or Stop To delete a specific prompt a b c Customising your mailbox setting Select the desired prompt Click Delete Click OK You can change your mailbox setting in the Unified Message tab of the Edit User screen 1 In the Unified Message tab click Advanced setting ss 2 The Mailbox Settings box appears Mailbox Parameters oK Cancel 326 User Manual The following items are editable Mailbox Parameters 3 2 1 User Programming Item Description Mailbox Password Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox If a default password is programmed by an administrator that password wi
95. sent using one of the following features e Message Delivery Sending a message to other subscribers refer to Message Delivery External Message Delivery Sending a message to parties that do not have Unified Messaging system mailboxes extension users and outside parties refer to External Message Delivery l o e e ee There are several ways to determine the recipients of your messages You can specify recipients by e Mailbox number or subscriber name specifies an individual recipient for Message Delivery e Personal Group Distribution List number or Mailbox Group number specifies a group of recipients for Message Delivery e Extension number or telephone number specifies an individual recipient for External Message Delivery e External Message Delivery List number specifies a group of recipients for External Message Delivery Message Delivery You can send messages to other subscribers You can specify message recipients either by number or by subscriber name To specify the recipients by number e Enter the subscriber s mailbox number e Enter a Personal Group Distribution List number refer to Personal Group Distribution Lists e Enter a Mailbox Group number these must be created by the System Administrator For more information consult your System Administrator To specify the recipients by name Enter the first few letters of the subscriber s name Dialling by Name feature Once you h
96. telephone numbers in numerical order of priority 3 Click OK to finish Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when there is no answer 1 Click Edit 2 Select the setting from the following items More than one option can be selected e Leave a Message Allows the caller to record a message Transfer to a covering extension Transfers the caller to a covering extension Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging Pages you by intercom e Transfer to operator Transfers the caller to an operator e Return to top menu Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension e Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service 3 Click OK to finish User Manual 3 2 1 User Programming Item Description Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when the extension is busy 1 Click Edit 2 Select the setting from the following items More than one option can be selected Leave a Message Allows the caller to record a message e Transfer to a covering extension Transfers the caller to a covering extension Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging Pages you by intercom e Transfer to operator Transfers the caller to an operator e Return to top menu Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension e Transfer to specifi
97. to play 3 At the bottom of the screen select Phone 4 Click the J play button Note If ALL has been selected for the Mailbox filter the J play button will be disabled Select a specific mailbox to enable the J play button 5 Inthe window that appears enter the extension number in Specify Extension of the extension at which to play back the messages and then click Connect 6 Go off hook when the extension rings to establish a call with the UM message playback system 7 During the call click Play to listen to the currently selected message If multiple messages were selected in step 1 you can click Prev and Next to cycle through and listen to the selected messages 8 When you are finished listening to messages click Disconnect or go on hook Logout To logout of Web Maintenance Console click the ij logout button to end the programming session and return to the Login screen When this option is chosen system data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the System Memory 1 Click the ij logout button A confirmation message will be displayed 2 Click Yes a If the computer running the Web browser that is connected to Web Maintenance Console is shut down or the Web browser is closed any changes that have not been saved will be lost Always end your programming session by clicking the H logout button For more information consult your System Administrator User Manual 347 3 2 1 User Progra
98. 1 2 directly from the top menu To record 1 Log in to the Message Manager s mailbox 2 for Custom Service 1 Menu Day for Custom Service 2 Menu Night C1 to change the message C1 to record a message Record the message C1 to end recording C2 to accept oe a ee e This feature is not available when the Quick Menu and Greeting Recording setting is Be disabled for the Message Manager s mailbox For more information consult your System Administrator e Direct Service Access dd If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings you can access this feature directly by dialling a specific Unified Messaging extension number from your extension Automatic login must be enabled to use Direct Service Access refer to Automatic log in For details about these Unified Messaging extension numbers consult your System Administrator 300 User Manual 2 2 2 Message Manager Features Recording an Emergency Greeting An emergency greeting can be recorded as Company Greeting 1 directly from the top menu The emergency greeting can be used in times such as when the company must be closed due to bad weather To record 9 a oo eS 1 Log in to the Message Manager s mailbox C1 to change the message C1 to record a message Record the greeting C1 to end recording C2 to accept a This feature is not available when the Quick Menu and Greeting Recording setting i
99. 16 numeric digits must be set by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance Console After logging in the system will announce the number of total messages the number of new messages or the length of new messages These announcements depend on the mailbox settings and COS settings for the System Manager If there are new messages in the mailbox the messages will be played automatically The System Manager can listen to them continuously without listening to the system prompts This feature is only available when Autoplay New Message is activated for the System Manager s COS If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console the System Manager cannot create or edit mailboxes The system will announce Sorry this function is not available For more information on logging in refer to Logging in to Your Mailbox for the First Time Manager Service switching You can switch mailboxes simply by pressing from the subscriber service menu in the following order CC service gt Message Manager service gt System Manager service T User Manual 275 2 2 1 System Manager Features a e For KX UT series SIP phone users When using the MESSAGE button please press the MESSAGE button before going off hook Manual log in PT SLT PS SIP Extn p MESSAGE I System Manager s ce om gt Transfer gt Enter 6 Enter and System Manager s UM group s floating mailbox numbe
100. 2 ide li outside party s Em p gt tee gt mD o gt S3 Enter the outside line access number Dial the outside party s telephone Enter 2 On hook needed for making outside calls number max 32 digits including to accept outside line access number e Before you can forward your calls to an outside telephone you should first store the telephone numbers you plan on using with this feature You can store 2 telephone numbers for use with Remote Call Forwarding e Ifyou change one of the outside telephone numbers for Remote Call Forwarding you will need to set Remote Call Forwarding to FWD to Outside once again before the new outside telephone number will be used as the forward destination If you do not do this the old telephone number will continue to be used To set cancel Remote Call Forwarding From Outside Telephone extension no of CD FWD all the transfer destination 2 FWD Busy gt Enter the extension number ee Log in to your mailbox J gt C9 4 gt C3 FWD No Answer of the transfer destination then go to STEP B Enter 94 4 FWD Busy or No Answer LOR 3 FWD to Outside then go to STEP A 6 Cancel call forwarding then go to STEP B STEP A Enter required number C4 Set telephone number 1 2 Set telephone number 2 ap 3 Set another outside line outside party s telephone number gt access no gt telephone no Enter required number Enter the outside line access Dial the o
101. 2 a a gt gt Fone Enter the caller ID number Enter 2 State the caller s name caller s telephone number 20 digits max to accept and To continue STEP B gt gt 1 gt 2 gt 2 End Enter 1 to end Enter 2 recording to add Enter 1 or 2 On hook User Manual 181 1 8 6 Other Features To change Caller ID numbers and recorded names PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt p gt 4 C5 02 PP Enter 452 Change the Caller ID number then go to STEP A in To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names LOR gt gt Change the caller s name gt gt then go to STEP B in To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names Accept the current item as is and skip to the next item gt E then repeat this step y On hook To delete Caller ID numbers and recorded names PT SLT PS SIP Extn Delete all numbers gt then go on hook to finish Log in to your mailbox gt 453 gt d On hook Enter 453 2 Delete one number PP Enter 1 or 2 CD Delete the announced number gt gt LOR Keep the number and announce the next number then repeat this step Enter 1 or 2 When finished go on hook o e The number of callers you can assign for this feature is controlled by the System 5 Administrator Live Call Screening LCS While a caller is leaving a message in your mailbox you can monitor the call without answering If you so desire
102. 70 5 3 Feature Nu umber Table civeaiaastveteanedaasaansasrnisrnnicndensada usa sicieneeerinaasniaistadababedibieaaneniions 374 5 3 1 Feature Number Table ices ce oat Ss accent steals usa lea edt ae enna en eececee 374 5 4 WVIAC US This TONE wcvccncsatincadicendieneassteicaieacteatsiuatuenstaabadocruanenaiiuaaiueceileeteaacnaieeanene 385 5 4 1 Whats TMS TONS 2 axccccrees cares teats 2nd ate ates dan a a ce auto REEERE 385 User Manual 11 Table of Contents 12 User Manual Section 1 Operation This section shows you step by step how to use each feature Read this chapter to become familiar with the many useful features of this PBX User Manual 13 1 1 1 For Your Safety 1 1 Before Operating the Telephones 1 1 1 For Your Safety 14 To prevent personal injury and or damage to property be sure to observe the following safety precautions The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is operated or handled improperly This notice means that misuse could result in death A WARNING or serious injury CAU TION This notice means that misuse could result in injury or damage to property The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be observed S This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must
103. Before Operating the Telephones If it is enabled ask your dealer to disable ECO mode For other types of IP PTs contact your dealer User Manual 373 5 3 1 Feature Number Table 5 3 Feature Number Table 5 3 1 Feature Number Table Numbers listed below are the default settings There are flexible feature numbers and fixed feature numbers If you change the flexible feature numbers fill in your assigned numbers new in the list for future reference 374 Feature While dial tone is heard Default New Additional digits buttons 1 2 1 Basic Calling To call an operator Operator Call To select an idle outside line automatically Automatic Line Access To select an idle outside line in the specified outside line group automatically Outside Line Group Access Making a Call to a Private Network TIE Line Access Using an Account Code Account Code Entry 9 0 0 9 X49 outside phone no outside line group no 2 digits outside phone no private phone no account code outside phone no 1 2 2 Easy Dialling Using Numbers Stored at Your Extension Personal Speed Dialling To store Todial Using Numbers Stored in the PBX System Speed Dialling Todial To a Preset Number by Going Off hook Hot Line Tostore Toset Tocancel 30 KK KK 740 personal speed dialling no 2 digits phone no
104. CO ICD Group PDN parties are extensions SDN or INTERCOM User Manual 79 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting While hearing a tone C Tone Y gt omm l Press Recall hookswitch Talk to the Enter 50 new party KX UT113 KX UT123 While hearing a tone As D HOLD e C Tone 4 Press HOLD Talk to the new party KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 While hearing a tone 4 m es CJ S CO Press HOLD Press the flashing DN Talk to the new party or S CO After talking to the new party second call you can disconnect 2 1 or hold 2 2 it and then retrieve the first call 80 User Manual 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting 2 1 To disconnect the second call and then talk to the original party During a conversation as On hook Off hook Talk to the original party Press CO ICD Group PDN SDN or INTERCOM KX UT113 KX UT123 During a conversation Pr SH gt amp gt hd On hook Off hook Press HOLD Talk to the original party KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 During a conversation is On hook Off hook Press the flashing DN or S CO Talk to the original party PT SLT PS During a conversation T No ww k C Tone Talk to the On hook Off hook Enter 50 original party User Manual 81 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting 2 2 To hold the second call and then talk to the original party After holding it you can talk to the original party Then yo
105. Call Screening LCS 9 2 Voice Mail Transfer C9 4 UMgroup s floating extension no Voice mail floating extension no User Manual 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons 1 X FLASH RECALL PAUSE Secret INTERCOM and TRANSFER can also be stored If you do not want to display the stored number when making a call press the Secret INTERCOM button before and after the numbers you wish to conceal If you store an outside party s number you should first store a line access number If you need to enter an account code you can enter the specified account code before the line access number lt Example gt we SECRET me x49 1234 0 9 f 123 4567 Ji E Account code feature no Account code Account code delimiter Automatic line Phone number access number 2 For a PF button 2 is not required to enter before the desired number 3 Depending on the settings of your PBX you may be required to enter delayed ringing time 0 Immediate 1 1 ring 2 2 rings 3 3 rings 4 4 rings 5 5 rings 6 6 rings 7 No ring In this case you can automatically join a new ICD Group by creating a button for that group 4 This button is not available for a PS 5 0 Day Night Lunch Break 1 Day Night Break 2 Day Night Lunch 3 Day Night 6 Availability of this button depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company Refer to 1 2 5 Accessing the ISDN Service ISDN Service Access 7 This button
106. Callers Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message Box Both Calls 710 0 Cancel Outside Calls X711 2 All Calls floating extension no for the SVM feature User Manual 5 3 1 Feature Number Table Feature While dial tone is heard ae Additional digits buttons Intercom Calls X712 3 Busy floating extension no for the SVM feature 4 No Answer floating extension no for the SVM feature 5 Busy No Answer floating extension no for the SVM feature 1 7 1 Paging Group Paging 33 paging group no 2 digits 1 7 2 Answering Denying a Paging Announcement To answer X43 To deny 721 1 To allow 0 1 7 3 Making a Conference Group Call 32 To call and start a conversation conference group no 1 digit entry code Tocalland make an announcement conference group no 1 digit entry code Join After Time Out To make a conference group call conference group no 1 digit entry with an entry code code Tojoin a conversation with an entry conference group no 1 digit entry code code 1 8 5 Transferring Calls Voice Mail Transfer Both Calls 710 0 Cancel 2 All calls Outside Calls 711 3 Busy 4 No Answer Intercom Calls 712 5 Busy No Answer UM group s floating extension no 1 9 1 Setting the Alarm Timed 760 Reminder
107. Conversation 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation Adding Other Parties during a Conversation Conference Leaving a Conference Unattended Conference Leaving a Conference Leaving Three party Conference Letting a Third Party Join Your Call Privacy Release Adding a Third Party during a Conversation Using the ISDN Service Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN Adding Other Parties during a Conversation Conference You can add one or more parties to your conversation x For KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 SIP phone users When you press the CONFERENCE CONF Conference button for the first time to establish FE a conference call the DN S CO button for the call will turn off and a new DN button will light green for the conference call Even if you add more parties only the newly lit DN button is lit up for the call To establish a conference call During a conversation CONF ee Q ee no C Tone gt bh Talk to the new party one h Talk with multiple parties Press CONF or TRANSFER Dial desired phone number Press CONF Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number KX UT series During a conversation A A CONFERENCE 2 gt CONFERENCE C Tone desired gt Dial desired phone number acs ne 4 Press CONFERENCE Talk to the Press CONFERENCE new party Talk with multiple parties Seize an outside line before dialling
108. DN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Holding in a System Parking Zone Call Park You can put a call on hold in a common parking zone of the PBX so that any extension can retrieve the parked call You can use this feature as a transferring feature A call can be put into either a specified parking zone Specified or any idle parking zone Auto If a Call Park button and Call Park Automatic Park Zone button have been established you can select either way to park by simply pressing the corresponding button When a call is parked automatically or more than one call has been parked at the same time you need to specify the parking zone number to retrieve the required call To set PT PS KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 During a conversation EE Call Park Press Call Park 74 User Manual During a conversation a parking zone no Specified Soo a Y Press TRANSFER Enter 52 Enter a specified parking zone number 2 digits or press to park at an idle parking zone automatically If you hear a busy tone enter another parking zone number or press again During a conversation a gt D52 gt FFA Press Recall Enter 52 Enter a specified parking hookswitch zone number 2 digits If you hear a busy tone enter another parking zone number To retrieve Call Park Retrieve PT PS KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 Call Park Press a flashing Call Park PT SLT PS SIP E
109. Dial outside phone Enter On hook TRANSFER number During a conversation A tsid P 2 amma gt gt gt T l E Press Recall Enter 61 Dial outside phone Enter On hook hookswitch number a e The availability of this feature depends on your SIP service provider J e You cannot return to the held call after dialling the destination s number Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a One touch Dialling button store the Blind Transfer feature number 70 User Manual 1 4 2 Holding a Call 1 4 2 Holding a Call Holding Holding in a System Parking Zone Call Park a e For users of non KX UT series SIP phones The holding operation for SIP extension users may differ from the steps in this section and may vary depending on the type of telephone being used Holding There are two types of hold The difference between them is that other people can retrieve your held call Regular Hold or not Exclusive Call Hold As they can be alternated ask your manager what the current mode is To hold Call Hold During a conversation HOLD ee ae 2 e es GacSaama cre 9 C Tone Press HOLD or press TRANSFER and On hook then enter 50 During a conversation P o cama 2 Pe C Tone Press Recall Enter 50 On hook hookswitch SIP Extn During a conversation G G Press HOLD On hook User Manual 71 1 4 2 Hol
110. During a conversation DSS O Two way gt Transfer another extension no Press Two way Press DSS or enter Transfer another extension number To stop recording press this button again To record into another mailbox with one touch One touch Two way Transfer During a conversation One touch Two way Transfer Press One touch Two way Transfer User Manual 185 1 8 6 Other Features x The Two way Record button light Two way Transfer button light or One touch Two way _ Transfer button light shows the current status as follows Off Not recording On Recording the conversation Note When you record your Two way telephone conversations you should inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded i e Ifall Unified Messaging system ports are busy when you try to use one of these features you will hear a warning tone dial tone or busy tone depending on the feature you are trying to EE use Recording time when using these features may be limited For more information consult your System Administrator EE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Two way Record button a Two way Transfer button and a One touch Two way Transfer button Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log in and Toll Saver When logging in to your mailbox remotely i e from an outside telephone to listen to your messages the Remote Automatic
111. E E Maint E WetadueUeataraleeeenteemevaNeee 130 1 7 2 Answering Denying a Paging Announcement ceeeeeeeeeceeneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenaaaaaa 132 1 7 3 Making a Conference Group Call sicccsssctusactesciiedciwsces deetinetemebearvale nasser 133 1 8 Using the Unified Messaging Features ssssesesceeceeeeeeeseseseeseeececeeseeeeeeeeeeesnnees 140 1 8 1 What is the Unified Messaging system sicvsccstrseiiuvoets nen cides becdeddetesuctiesiasn eta uaiveanes 140 1 8 2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox cc ciccecsizdentcccecesechtecsadcessacatdeasaciedeeiiders tenses 141 1 8 3 Message Playback and Related Features ccccccecesseseecnceeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeeeneneeeneneneeees 151 User Manual 9 Table of Contents 1 8 4 Sending Messages essa 8te htc ca tena dec sche ete aacen ceclendectecccun ced sa cecsn ence aee teed cath eetnetctedeanadect 159 1 8 5 iranstermning Wis Co eem merece eretreer een ere crease ey eee ene ene tc erent eet A eine tonne nar eer ease sere err 169 1 8 6 Other Feature Spee eer e ESAE eres eter ete eerie cary A EEE ee eer ert Te 177 1 8 7 Quek Referent rusan on a Saeed ht cava coum E N EEN 194 1 9 Setting the Telephone According to Your NeedS sssssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 197 1 9 1 Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder seesssssssssiriiesseteeeerrrrrnirrrttesesesrtrrinrrrnssssssrrerernnt 197 1 9 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND 22 2 ccecccceve ces cc
112. Extension PIN Personal Identification Number You can assign a password to each extension The following features require an extension PIN 1 Screening calls Live Call Screening LCS 2 Prohibiting other people from seeing your personal speed dialling directory call log SVM log and from playing back the voice messages in your message box Display Lock 3 Using the same settings as your extension at other extensions Walking Extension 4 Remote Control Operation Walking COS 5 Extension Dial Lock Clear To set PT SLT PS SIP Extn PIN Personal Identification Number SS gt Ea gt gt on gt gt Off hook Enter 799 Enter 1 Enter extension PIN max 10 digits gt gt gt oense gt CO of F Enter Enter same extension PIN Enter max 10 digits On hook 306 User Manual To cancel 3 1 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming PT SLT PS SIP Extn PIN Personal Identification Number tored D DS gt Eaa gt gt n Se gt C Tone Off hook Enter 799 Enter 0 Enter stored extension PIN On hook CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your password extension PIN The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Keeping your PIN secret b Selecting a complex random PIN that cannot be easil
113. G AM desired delivery time is os Enter the desired delivery time and Enter 1 for AM 2 for PM 3 gt gt gestied day pf the month gt Ge or delivery To record your message Enter the day of the month for delivery and To record your message CD Request a receipt D 4 E ED hu gt gt s C Tone 2 Continue Enter 2 Record your message Enter 1 or 2 to accept You can pause and resume recording by pressing 2 If you pause for more than gt gt C1 gt 20 seconds recording will stop automatically Enter 1 Enter 2 to end recording to accept User Manual 165 1 8 4 Sending Messages 166 a e 1 Example To enter 5 00 press 5 To enter 5 15 press 515 e 2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24 hour time e 3 Example If today is February 16 and you enter 17 the message will be delivered tomorrow If today is February 16 and you enter 5 the message will be delivered on March 5 e Ifyou set a password required for listening to the message make sure you notify each recipient what the password is e Ifyou are using a PRI line you may need to enter at the end of outside telephone numbers For more information consult your System Administrator e Auto Receipt is not enabled by default For more information consult your System Administrator External Message Delivery Lists Your external message delivery lists allow you to send messages
114. ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Ifa call arrives while you are using the call log the call log display will be replaced with the caller s information Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Call Log button or Call Log for ICD Group button Calling with the Outgoing Call Log You can redial using the outgoing call log To call KX NT300 KX NT500 KX DT300 KX DT500 KX T7600 While on hook a v t Press Left Press Up or Down Off hook until desired number appears oe The following PSs can use outgoing call log information to other extensions including TIE with same information as a PT connected to the PBX KX TCA185 KX TCA285 KX TCA385 e PSs other than these may not display the same outgoing call log information as a PT connected to the PBX e For details about referencing the outgoing call log refer to the PS s documentation To call with the REDIAL button Display PT While on hook v Press REDIAL to Press REDIAL Press Up or Down Off hook display the outgoing until desired number call log appears 248 User Manual 1 14 1 Using the Call Log o e System programming is required for this operation N j e This operation is available only for PTs with a display To store the caller s information in personal speed dialling Display PT When the desired party is displayed gt AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE ae e You
115. II Calls extension no FWD BSY FWD Busy gt LOR access no phone no FWD B NA FWD Busy No Answer max 32 digits gt CE Press the fixed FWD DND button Press UP or DOWN with the Navigator Key to select the desired item Enter destination extension number or outside line access number and then outside phone number Enter ENTER Press ENTER to set A confirmation tone will be heard To set the timer for No Answer and Busy No Answer While on hook when in FWD DND Setting Mode REA gt gt STORE gt Press the fixed FWDIDND button Press STORE A 15 or 015 112 User Manual gt AUTO DIAL STORE Enter time seconds 0 120 Press STORE to set A confirmation tone will be heard You can enter the time as a 1 3 digit number For example 15 seconds can be entered as 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls To set forwarding status and outside destinations to ring in parallel for outside calls to an ICD Group While on hook when in FWD DND Setting Mode eae CD Virtual Ps 1 os 5 Virtual PS 2 AUTO DIAL d C6 Virtual PS 3 gt O gt gt Virtual PS 4 STORE Press the fixed Enter 4 to 7 Press STORE FWDIDND button To cancel ringing FWD off Enter 0 LOR gt gt NOOR To set ringing CD FWD AII Calis access no phone no Press STORE max 32 digits to set Enter 1 Enter outside line access number and then outside phon
116. Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer Call Screening The system will prompt the caller to record his or her name If you are available to answer calls the system will ring your extension and play back the name of the caller You can then answer the call if you choose If you do not or cannot answer the call the call will be handled according to the settings you have made for Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer Intercom Paging The Unified Messaging system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature The call will not ring at your extension Your name will be announced to alert you to the call If you do not or cannot answer the call the call will be handled according to the settings you have made for Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer Transfer to Mailbox The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox where he or she can leave a message for you The call will not ring at your extension Transfer to Custom Service The system will transfer the caller to the custom service you specify here The call will not ring at your extension Disable Call Transfer Turns the Call Transfer feature off The call will ring at your extension User Manual 169 1 8 5 Transferring Calls 170 To set call transfer status PT SLT PS SIP Extn Call Blocking Call Screening x Intercom Paging Log in to your mailbox gt 5 1 gt Transfer to Mailbox Transfer to Custom Service Enter 51 Disable Call Transfer
117. Information Using Preprogrammed Messages Printing Message 1 12 2 Recording Information Using Preprogrammed Messages Printing Message 242 You can record a variety of information from your extension using up to 8 preprogrammed messages Message information from all extensions is recorded with the PBX For example it is possible to use this feature as a time card by selecting preprogrammed sign in and sign out messages In a hotel type environment this feature can be used to record room information from a room extension For a list of preprogrammed messages consult your dealer To record PT SLT D gt E gt sero gt Concer J gt GD 2 GP C Tone Off hook Enter 761 Enter message Enter parameter Enter On hook number 1 8 if required Depending on the content of the selected message you may be required to enter a numeric parameter such as a price or time Enter the correct number of characters as required for fF the message For information about required parameters consult your dealer lt Example gt If Snack has been programmed as message number 1 for recording charges for room snacks consumed hotel employees would enter data as in the example below using the room extension x 761 1 0300 i a message no parameter Snack charge e Whena preprogrammed message is selected detailed information is recorded automatically as shown below 02 02 00 10 45AM 1234 Snack 03 00
118. LT PS SIP Extn C4 List number 1 Log in to your mailbox gt C9 3 2 gt LOR List number 2 Enter 932 Enter 1 or 2 CG a a Delete the announced member gt gt LOR gt Cz Keep the member and 2 Delete one member announce the next member Enter 1 or 2 Enter 1 or 2 On hook Repeat this step to delete other members User Manual 167 1 8 4 Sending Messages Receiving External Delivery Messages When you send an external delivery message the Unified Messaging system will call each of the specified recipients When a recipient answers the call the system will guide him or her through the following procedure After a recipient has listened to an external delivery message he or she can send you a reply to your message and even set urgent or private message status To receive a message and reply PT SLT PS SIP Extn When a recipient answers the call C1 gt 4 digit password C gt The message is played back P gt Enter 1 to receive Enter a 4 digit password and the message required for listening to the message If you did not set a password this step will be skipped g 4 TE 2 C Tone Enter 2 to reply Record a reply Enter 1 Enter 2 to end recording to accept To end the call press then go on hook to finish CD Make the message urgent 41 Make the message private gt gt gt C2 Continue 2 Continue Enter 1 or 2 Enter 1 or 2 On hook e Ifthe reci
119. Log in refer to Remote Access and Toll Saver features identify you by recognising your telephone number caller ID In order to use these features you must first store the telephone numbers that you will use to access your mailbox remotely Automatic Log in and Toll Saver may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox To assign PT SLT PS SIP Extn CD Change telephone number 1 Log in to your mailbox gt 49 gt 2 Change telephone number 2 Enter 49 Enter 1 or 2 If you have already set a telephone number and wish to change it press 1 after selecting telephone number 1 or 2 gt gt Cee JG gt Do O Enter your outside telephone number Enter 2 On hook max 20 digits including area code if needed and to accept o e The System Administrator must enable Automatic Log in and Toll Saver for your mailbox FF before it can be used 186 User Manual 1 8 6 Other Features Personal Custom Service A Personal Custom Service is a set of options you can present to your callers allowing them to press buttons on their telephones in order to access certain features You should explain the options available to your callers in each of your personal greeting messages for example This is name can t take your call right now Press 3 to leave me a message Press 4 to speak with my assistant Press 5 to dial another extension For details on recording your greeting messages refer to
120. M floating extension numbers depends on system programming For more information consult your System Administrator or System Manager The default floating extension number 591 for the SVM feature depends on system programming For more information consult your System Administrator or System Manager User Manual 383 5 3 1 Feature Number Table 384 Feature While busy DND or call tone is heard after dialling Detsalt 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer Sending a Call Waiting Notification Call Waiting 1 To an Extension Refusing the Call DND Override Joining an Existing Call Executive Busy Override 3 Leaving a Message Waiting Indication Calling Back the Caller Who 4 Left an Indication Message Waiting Monitoring Another Extension Call Monitor 5 Reserving a Busy Line Automatic Callback Busy Setting 6 Callback on an ISDN Line Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 1 2 6 Alternating the Calling Method Alternate Calling Ring Voice x Feature While dialling or talking Fixed Number 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation Adding Other Parties during a Conversation Conference 3 1 11 1 Ifa Doorphone Door Opener is Connected From any extension while talking to the doorphone 5 User Manual 5 4 1 What is This Tone 5 4 What is This Tone 5 4 1 What is This Tone While on hook Ring Tones The following ton
121. Message Waiting Lamp of your telephone turns on when a new message is recorded Telephone Device Device No 1 2 3 Specifies the Message Waiting Notification schedule for each device The following parameters can be specified for devices 1 2 and 3 Click Edit for the extension to change set Device Notification for Unreceived Message to Yes and set program the settings then click OK to finish Only Urgent Messages Specifies if notifications will be sent only for messages designated as urgent Dial Number 0 9 T X Assigns a telephone number to Device 1 2 or 3 You can also specify the number to be dialled by entering it from your telephone allowing you to set this feature on a case by case basis Enter a maximum of 32 digits consisting of 0 9 x and special codes e Dial Pause default 1 s e Dial Pause default 3 s e T Dial Tone Detection e X Callback Number Entry Code 0 9 x Dial Code Note If you are using a PRI line you may need to enter at the end of outside telephone numbers No of Retries Specifies the number of times the Unified Messaging system will try to send notification if the device is busy or if there is no answer Busy Delay Time min Specifies the time in minutes the Unified Messaging system waits before retrying message notification when the called device is busy No Answer Delay Time min Specifies the time in minutes the Unified Messaging system wa
122. ND gt The current FWD DND status for outside calls is displayed Press the fixed Press the fixed FWD DND FWD DND button button again to switch the status To switch the FWD DND status for intercom calls While on hook when in FWD DND Setting Mode gt gt The current FWD DND status gt for intercom calls is displayed Press the fixed Press the fixed FWD DND FWD DND button button again to switch the status To set and clear FWD DND for outside intercom calls While on hook when in FWD DND Setting Mode lt r fole s k FWD DND CD Outside Calls gt gt 2 Intercom Calls Press the fixed Enter 1 or 2 Press STORE FWDIDND button gt D FWD DND off AUTO DIAL gt gt cD DND on STORE Press STORE Enter 0 or 1 to set A confirmation tone will be heard User Manual 201 1 9 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND pe e This step can be omitted To set and clear FWD DND for all calls KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 While on hook ae ole FWD DND Off FWD DND off FORWARD DO NOT DISTURB ci A Do Not Disturb DND on Press the fixed Press UP or DOWN with Press ENTER to set FWD DND button the Navigator Key to select the desired item A confirmation tone will be heard 202 User Manual 1 9 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA 1 9 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Ca
123. NT300 series except KX NT321 KX NT560 KX DT343 KX DT346 telephone with a Bluetooth wireless headset and exchange the settings with another KX NT300 series except KX NT321 KX NT560 KX DT343 KX DT346 telephone user you cannot use your Bluetooth wireless headset at the other extension Bluetooth wireless headsets are registered on extensions themselves Therefore you have to register a Bluetooth wireless headset on each desired extension For details about registration refer to Bluetooth Registration in 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode User Manual 243 1 13 2 Enhanced Walking Extension 1 13 2 Enhanced Walking Extension 244 In addition to exchanging the settings between extensions Walking Extension you can change the status of your extension to Service in or Service out Enhanced Walking Extension Service in An extension is in use normal status Service out Extension Dial Lock gt 1 6 3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone Extension Dial Lock Do Not Disturb DND 1 9 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND and Display Lock 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode are activated on an extension When the extension is set to Service out the extension user cannot do the following e Make unauthorised outside calls e Receive calls e See their personal speed dialling directory call log or SVM log This feature is useful when a one person uses the same extension setting
124. ONITOR Press ngs q me a SP PHONE SS SPPHONE Gp MONITOR SS 5 ial Montor AO i FAI o Press Off hook MONITOR Off hook On hook Live Call Screening o e The Live Call Screening LCS button light shows the feature status as follows 5 Off LCS is off Flashing green rapidly Alerting in the Private mode Flashing green slowly Monitoring Red on LCS is on The manager extension can clear an extension PIN e This feature is available for a single line telephone if it is connected to a proprietary telephone in parallel Private mode only To answer the call while monitoring press Recall hookswitch Only the handset monitoring in the Private mode is available for PS users EE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Live Call Screening Mode Set Select the mode either monitoring the message through the speaker automatically or receiving while the caller leaves a message e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Live Call Screening LCS button 184 User Manual 1 8 6 Other Features Recording Your Conversation You can record a conversation into a mailbox while talking on the phone You can select the mailbox each time you record a conversation oP To record into your mailbox Two way Record During a conversation To stop recording T press this button again Record Press Two way Record To record into another mailbox Two way Transfer
125. Paging You can make a voice announcement to proprietary telephones or external speakers or both in the preset group simultaneously To page PT SLT PS SIP Extn D i Oe A Off hook Enter 33 Dial paging group Announce Talk number 2 digits me e Ifthe group which you paged is already being used for paging you hear a busy tone 130 User Manual 1 7 1 Paging Paging and then Transferring a Call PT SLT PS During a conversation TRANSFER GGG gt Pasinggroun Enter 33 Dial paging group number 2 digits LOR P ral Press TRANSFER or Recall hookswitch The other party is placed on hold D Wait for an g E gt gt a a ie gt answer gt i gt y Talk On hook Announce The held party and the paged extension are connected and start a conversation SIP Extn During a conversation 7 TRANSFER XFER aaa gt PAP KX UT series Enter 33 Dial paging group Press TRANSFER number 2 digits Other than KX UT series Press HOLD The other party is placed on hold Wait for an fe gt answer gt Cs gt aS Talk On hook Announce The held party and the paged extension are connected and start a conversation Ps e After you go on hook the caller can talk to the person who answers the page User Manual 131 1 7 2 Answering Denying a Paging Announcement 1 7 2 Answering Denying a Paging Announcement To answer PT SLT PS SIP Extn
126. Panasonic User Manual Hybrid IP PBX Model No KX N S 0 0 Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use In particular be sure to read 1 1 1 For Your Safety Page 14 before using this product KX NS700 PFMPR Software File Version 004 00000 or later Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at http panasonic net pcc support pbx Feature Highlights Feature Highlights IP Communication This PBX supports IP communication using a variety of IP telephones such as the KX NT300 KX NT500 series with Self Labelling and or Bluetooth wireless headsets Panasonic IP Softphones and SIP phones IP Proprietary Telephone les IP Softphone SIP phone Consult your dealer Remote Office This PBX supports the use of SIP phones connected from a remote office over an IP network through an SBC session border controller SIP phones can be set up by simply connecting the phones to the LAN at the remote office Consult your dealer 2 User Manual Easy Operation If you are using a certain Panasonic telephone that is equipped with a Navigator Key Jog Dial and a display it helps you to access the desired feature easily Also you will be informed of the arrival of an incoming call or a message waiting by the lamp if it is equipped Navigator Key Jog Dial
127. Panel For details refer to the documentation for your operating system To configure settings and view information While this software is running you can configure settings and view information about the software Right click the icon in the notification area and then select an item Notification area icon Item Description Settings Language Select the language to use for the settings dialogue box and the notification area menu No Operation Timer Enter the time period after which the selected account is changed from the Unified Messaging account to the default Outlook inbox if there has been no user activity Timer value 30 to 600 seconds Recommended timer value 30 to 60 seconds User Manual 1 8 6 Other Features Item Description E Mail Account for UM Enter your Unified Messaging e mail account The maximum size is 256 characters If nothing is entered all of the e mail accounts using IMAP are assumed to be Unified Messaging accounts You can copy the mail account from Mail Account in the General tab of the Internet E mail Settings dialogue box To open the Internet E mail Settings dialogue box In Outlook 2007 click the Tools menu Account Settings gt Change More Settings button In Outlook 2010 click the File menu gt Info gt Account Settings Change More Settings button About Display the copyright and version of this software Exit
128. SLT Non KXUT GUT series i series 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer Transferring to an Extension in the PBX v v v v v Transferring to an Outside Party Using the V 2 4 z Vv PBX Service Transferring a Call Using the ISDN Service 2 p F Call Transfer CT by ISDN Transferring to an Outside Party Using the P V SIP Service 1 4 2 Holding a Call v v v v v 1 4 3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately Call V Vv Splitting 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting v v v v 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation Adding Other Parties during a Conversation V of V Conference Leaving a Conference Unattended z V Conference Leaving a Conference Leaving Three party 7 J 3 Conference Letting a Third Party Join Your Call Privacy J z Release Adding a Third Party during a Conversation Using the ISDN Service Three party Conference 4 v v SPTY by ISDN 1 4 6 Mute v v v 1 4 7 Letting Other People Listen to the Z Conversation Off hook Monitor 1 4 8 Using the Headset Headset Operation v v 1 5 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary V V Directory Number SDN Extension 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls Forwarding Your Calls Call Forwarding V y Z FWD 364 User Manual 5 1 1 List of Operations by Telephone Type Telephone Type SIP phone Features PT PS SLT Non KAT EUT series
129. SVM Recording a Normal Greeting Message To record PT SLT PS S gt Off hook Enter 38 The greeting message is played back gt gt Press STORE or any dial key 0 9 x To play back PT SLT PS SYS gt Off hook CA gt Enter 38 A confirmation tone is heard C Clear gt OR C1 Rerecord gt gt Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting message is being played back This step can be omitted 120 User Manual CAA gt a es Record message Enter 1 Example You have reached John am sorry cannot take your call right now Please leave a message A confirmation 0 Clear gt tone is heard GT gt CI Rerecord Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting message is being played back On hook The greeting message is played back C Tone gt gt On hook 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM To clear PT SLT PS Gia gt Se Off hook Enter 38 Enter 0 On hook Recording a Greeting Message for Each Time Mode In addition to a normal greeting message you can record a specific greeting message for each time mode day lunch break night To record PT SLT PS C0 Day X gt Waa gt M gt o gt CZ Lunch C Break Off hook Enter 38 Enter 8 Enter the desired Enter 1 time mode D gt AUTO DIAL STORE D The greeting message 4 4 is played b
130. Service Uy ooo e You can transfer a held call without talking and go on hook even if the transferred party does not answer the call If a transferred call is not answered within a specified time it will ring at a preprogrammed extension if set or at your extension again If you are off hook at that time you will hear an alarm tone If an outside call is not answered within a specified time it is automatically disconnected e For users of non KX UT series SIP phones Even if your telephone has a TRANSFER button you cannot use it to transfer calls Please make sure to use the HOLD button The transfer operation for SIP extension users may differ from the steps in this section and may vary depending on the type of telephone being used Blind Transfer Blind Transfer may be available on your phone For details about using Blind Transfer refer to the documentation for your SIP phone This feature is not available when transferring to an outside party using the SIP service Transferring to an Extension in the PBX To transfer During a conversation a 7 EE a gt 4 gt 5 extension no Press Press DSS or dial Talk On hook TRANSFER extension number This step can be omitted User Manual 65 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer During a conversation Eo dL m gt a Press Recall Dial Talk On hook hookswitch extension number This step can be omitted SIP Extn Du
131. T PS SIP Extn 09 Both Calls Cancel All Calls SS gt CICALA gt GB Outside cals gt Busy No Answer 3g Intercom Calls Busy No Answer Enter 71 Enter 0 to 2 as Enter required you desire number For Cancel go on hook directly after entering 0 destination extension no D ar r E a ome access no phone no max 32 digits Enter destination extension number Enter On hook Or enter outside line access number and then outside phone number User Manual 105 106 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls To set Follow Me from another extension PT SLT PS 09 Both Calls Ea T G Ci Outside Calls Follow Me N E E gt gt Follow Me Cancel gt gt C2 Intercom Calls Off hook Enter 71 Enter 0 to 2 as Enter 7 or 8 you desire gt gt r extension no C Tone y Dial your On hook extension number i e When using a proprietary telephone you can set or cancel Call Forwarding by pressing the FWD DND button fixed button instead of 710 EE When using a KX UT series SIP phone except KX UT670 you can also press the FWD DND button and then press up or down with the Navigator Key to set or cancel Call Forwarding for all calls For KX UT670 there is no physical FWD DND button on the phone For details refer to the documentation for your phone To set the timer for No Answer and Busy No Answer PT SLT PS SIP Extn S gt aa gt Ge 2 Ow Off hook Enter 713 Enter ti
132. The PC and fax machine communication failed An indication tone may have interrupted communication amp 1 9 9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones Data Line Security User Manual 371 5 2 1 Troubleshooting Problem Remedy do not want to show my telephone number to the calling or called party s telephone 1 1 9 5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller s Telephone Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR 1 9 6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party s Telephone Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR want to show my telephone number to the calling or called party s telephone amp amp 1 9 4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller s Telephone Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP cannot send a call waiting tone to the dialled extension The other party has not set the Call Waiting feature amp Sending a Call Waiting Notification Call Waiting 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting 1 9 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA The other party has set Data Line Security amp amp 1 9 9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones Data Line Security forgot the password Ask the manager to assist you 1 2 1 1 Extension Control The background music started suddenly m Turn off th
133. USE o Ifyou do not desire that the Call Waiting FWD DND or Hot Line to be cleared by this feature 5 please ask your dealer User Manual 317 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons You can customise the flexible buttons and or programmable feature PF buttons on PTs Add on Key Modules and PSs They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or as feature buttons a e To enter programming mode when using a PS refer to the documentation for your PS J e The buttons in the table below can only be set on certain flexible buttons as follows Flexible buttons on PTs Add on Key Modules PSs all buttons can be set Flexible buttons on DSS Consoles all buttons except CTI and Primary Directory Number PDN buttons can be set Programmable feature PF buttons only the One touch Dialling button can be set e For KX UT series SIP phone users You cannot customise the flexible buttons with the following method from your phone You can customise the flexible buttons using Web Maintenance Console For details refer to Customising the Flexible Buttons PROG To continue oa PROGRAM PROGRAM programming gt aa gt gt ieee gt gt A PAUSE AUTO DIAL Press PROGRAM Press desired Follow Press PROGRAM STORE inai Press ENTER t or PAUSE flexible button programming inpu or STORE or PAUSE Button Programming Input Loop CO L CO Group CO
134. You can make outside calls by accessing the subscriber service menu from an outside telephone and dialling an outside destination To login to your mailbox from an outside telephone refer to Remote Access To call an outside party From Outside Telephone Log in to your mailbox gt gt Enter 8 Enter the outside line access number needed for making outside calls gt o Ce eK Dial the outside telephone number and Talk e This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator 8 Communication Assistant plug in for Microsoft Outlook If the Communication Assistant plug in for Microsoft Outlook is installed to your PC you can access the contents of your mailbox from your PC through Microsoft Outlook Voice messages appear in subscribers inboxes as e mail messages With the Outlook plug in you can do the following e Play back voice messages on a PC or through a telephone e Record and send voice messages from a PC or telephone e Forward and reply to messages to another subscriber e Call back the sender of a message quickly when the message has caller information included e Export voice message data e Attach voice messages to other e mail messages x e For details about using the Outlook Plug in refer to the documentation of Communication Assistant IMAP If your e mail client supports IMAP4 you can access the contents of your mailbox through an e mail client and you can do the followin
135. You can pick up the call by pressing the same DSS button again A busy tone is heard and the caller information of the call to another gt a__ k extension is displayed t Press flashing DSS Press DSS again Talk o e Ifyou receive a call waiting tone you can ask a third party to pick up your second call with FF Directed Call Pickup User Manual 59 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup Answering a Call from Another Telephone Call Pickup Group Monitor Depending on system programming PT users such as colleagues can view the caller information of a call to another extension which belongs to the same call pickup group The user can view the caller s information on the LCD while their PT is idle You can pick up the call by pressing the ANSWER soft button To pickup a call While displaying monitoring information for a call pickup group Press ANSWER Talk a e Available telephones are as follows IP PTs DPTs 1 Except models with a single line display e While the caller information is displayed on the LCD going off hook will not answer the call Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking Up Your Calls Call Pickup Deny You can deny or allow other people to pick up your calls PT SLT PS SIP Extn S gt ammm gt oe 2 a C0 allow Off hook Enter 720 Enter 1 to deny On hook or 0 to allow 60 User Manual 1 3 4 Answering a
136. a gt gt e 2 EGS Lock Tone Off hook Enter 78 Enter 2 to unlock Enter extension On hook or 3 to lock number a The manager can use Remote Extension Dial Lock to unlock any extension whether that extension was locked remotely Remote Extension Dial Lock or from the extension itself Extension Dial Lock 266 User Manual 2 1 2 Time Service Mode Control 2 1 2 Time Service Mode Control The manager extension or the preprogrammed extension can change the time mode Day Lunch Break or Night There are two methods Automatic or Manual of changing the time modes Automatic enables the time mode for each day of the week to change automatically You may also change it manually Manual enables to change a mode manually as follows To change the time mode Day Night Lunch Break While on hook Time Service Day Night Lunch Break Press Time Service Day Night Lunch Break until the desired mode appears PT SLT PS SIP Extn Co Day CI Night D SS gt a a FS GB Break i Off hook Enter 780 Enter 0 to 3 On hook as you desire To select the time service switching mode Automatic Manual While on hook Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual Press Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual a e Besides the time mode there is Holiday mode It can change mode once on a specified date e The Time Service Day Night Lunch Break button light shows the curre
137. ack gt F Enter OGM floating On hook extension number User Manual 271 2 1 5 Recording Outgoing Messages OGM To record from an external BGM MOH port SS gt GaGa gt G gt Off hook Enter 36 Enter 3 Enter BGM port number 1 digit A OGM floating D You hear CONF D The message gt gt a the message gt O c F n is recorded gt gt gt Progress Enter OGM floating Lone amp extension number 0Ne Press CONF Press STORE When the time limit The message i 3 passes it stops is played back automatically On hook To clear the message DX maa gt gt Off hook Enter 36 Enter 0 OGM floating gt gt extension no Progress y Tone amp C Tone Enter OGM floating On hook extension number i e The default of OGM floating extension numbers depends on system programming For more information consult your System Administrator or System Manager aa 272 User Manual 2 1 6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line Trunk Busy Out 2 1 6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line Trunk Busy Out When a problem is found on a certain outside line the PBX automatically makes it unavailable for use temporarily The manager can manually enable the outside line and allow users to use it again To re enable an outside line PT SLT PS DY gt DD gt Canim 9 aS C Tone Off hook Enter 785 Enter outside line number On hook
138. ack pe C Tone dial key Record Press STORE or any message dial key 0 9 Example You have reached John am sorry am out for lunch right now Please leave a message A confirmation CO Clear gt tone is heard CD Rerecord Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting On hook message is being played back User Manual 121 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM To play back PT SLT PS Day SS gt GaGa gt gt Din G7 Break Off hook Enter 38 Enter 8 Enter the desired Enter 2 time mode A confirmation Clear The greeting message gt gt tone is heard is played back CD Rerecord On hook Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting message is being played back a e This step can be omitted To clear PT SLT PS Day S gt Wma gt w Dwor C Break Off hook Enter 38 Enter 8 Enter the desired time mode TB aS Enter 0 On hook pa e If both the greeting message for a certain time mode and the normal greeting message have been recorded callers will hear the greeting message for that time mode However if no greeting message has been recorded for a certain time mode the normal greeting message will be played instead 122 User Manual 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message Box You can set incoming calls to be redirected to your own
139. aging Repeat the greeting 3 Transfer to the operator Enter the desired option To delete options from your personal custom service PT SLT PS SIP Extn Soe C461 P desired dialling key gt 3 pp Enter 461 Enter the desired dialling key 0 3 9 Enter 3 that you want to delete an option from On hook 188 User Manual 1 8 6 Other Features To select the No DTMF Input operation PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt C4 C6 C1 gt 1 gt 1 Enter 1 to select Enter 461 the No DTMF Input Operation Enter 1 Message recording Disconnect the caller gt 2 Disconnect the caller when call was received after hours message recording for all other times Enter 2 to accept Enter the desired option To confirm the settings for your personal custom service PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt 46 gt Enter 46 Enter 2 On hook to review gt gt The System Administrator or the System Manager must enable Transfer to Outside for your 5 mailbox before it can be used e The Transfer to Outside option can be used a maximum of 4 times in your Personal Custom Service e Ifyou are using a PRI line you may need to enter at the end of outside telephone numbers For more information consult your System Administrator Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder You can receive an alarm at your telephone to remind you of a meeting appointment or as a
140. akers To select and start stop the background music PT SLT PS SIP Extn external S gt GaGa gt e yw C Tone Co Enter external Enter BGM number pager number 1 digit or 0 to stop 1 digit or for all Off hook Enter 35 On hook 270 User Manual 2 1 5 Recording Outgoing Messages OGM 2 1 5 Recording Outgoing Messages OGM The manager extension can record three kinds of greeting messages OGM as follows user group or outside party without operator assistance 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group message Used to greet and guide callers to an incoming call distribution group 3 Timed Reminder message Used for a wake up call message when the extension answers the Timed Reminder 1 DISA message Used to greet and guide callers so that they access an extension C All messages have their own extension numbers You can select the desired message You have two methods for recording a message One is recorded using the handset and the other is recorded from an external BGM MOH port To record SS gt Gauss gt O Off hook Enter 36 Enter 1 F 2 REA D OGM floatin The message d Heli es P QD crrone iS played back C Tone Enter OGM floating Record Press STORE On hook extension number message When the time limit passes it stops automatically To play back SS gt GaGa gt Off hook Enter 36 Enter 2 OGM floating D The message Em gt gt eae jsplayedb
141. all Log Calling with the Outgoing Call Log N e PS users Refer to the documentation for your phone e KX UT series SIP phone users Both outside call information and intercom call information is recorded automatically in the incoming call log For details about using the call log refer to the documentation for your KX UT series SIP phone The following PSs can use the incoming call log information in the same way as a wired PT when they receive a call from other extension including TIE KX TCA185 KX TCA285 KX TCA385 PSs other than these may not display the same incoming call log information as a PT connected to the PBX e For details about referencing the incoming call log refer to the PS s documentation Calling with the Incoming Call Log When you receive a call including external sensor calls call information is recorded automatically in the incoming call log A preprogrammed number of calls can be logged per extension When the call log is full and other call arrives the oldest call is deleted You can modify the logged telephone number When the Call Log button light turns on there is a call which you did not answer The following information is logged e Callers Name e Date Time call received e Answered or Not Answered Confirmed or Not Confirmed e Callers Phone Number To confirm the log information with the Call Log button Display PT While on hook Call Log Press Call Log until desired party appear
142. alling without Restrictions e To confirm number before dialling you can enter a phone number and confirm it on the dd display and then go off hook Predialling EE e Call Charge Reference You can confirm your total call charges by pressing the Call Charge Reference button To make acall to another party without going on hook press the FLASH RECALL button It will re access the outside line and provide external dial tone Pressing the Terminate button will provide intercom dial tone You can dial the new phone number without going on off hook e Hands free Operation You can make an outside call and have a conversation in hands free mode using the SP PHONE button Customising Your Phone e 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Select the seized line when going off hook e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Loop CO L CO button a Group CO G CO button a Single CO S CO button a Terminate button or a Call Charge Reference button Making a Call to a Private Network TIE Line Access You can access extensions connected to other PBXs in a private network To call PT SLT PS SIP Extn extension no D gt private phone no Off hook Dial extension number or enter 7 and then dial private phone number 34 User Manual 1 2 1 Basic Calling a Which type of telephone number must be entered depends on the settings of your PBX D gt gw hg Off
143. ameter Selection User Manual 3 2 1 User Programming Button Steps Log in Log out of a specified group Select Log in Log out from Type Then select Incoming Group from Parameter Selection And enter the Incoming call distribution group extension number in Extension Number Log in Log out for all Select Log in Log out from Type groups Then select All from Parameter Selection Select Hurry up from Type Hurry up Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in Extension Number Wrap up Select Wrap up from Type System Alarm Select System Alarm from Type Time Service Day Night Select Time Service from Type Then in Parameter Selection select which time modes will be switched manually Lunch Break In Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number select the Time Table tenant number to be used for changing time modes in Automatic Switching mode Answer Select Answer from Type Release Select Release from Type Toll Restriction Call Barring Select TRS Level Change from Type Then select the Toll Restriction Call Barring Level 1 7 from Parameter Selection ISDN Service Select ISDN Service from Type Then enter the desired number in Dial max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 x T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Note Availability of this button depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company Refer to 1
144. an be used to make and receive all calls including both outside and intercom calls Having multiple PDN buttons allows multiple calls to be queued at the extension Extensions that have a PDN button are called PDN extensions SDN button The light of an SDN button displays the current call status of the registered extension similar to a DSS button In addition this button can be used to perform the 100 following operations e call the PDN extension SDN Direct Dial answer calls ringing at the PDN extension e hold calls and retrieve calls held by the PDN extension Call Hold and Call Hold Retrieve e transfer calls to the PDN extension Call Transfer Using SDN Button Extensions that have an SDN button are called SDN extensions gt E The extension that is registered as the destination of an SDN button must have at least one PDN button One extension can have up to 8 PDN buttons e An extension can have only one SDN button for each PDN extension The button light of each PDN SDN button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern PDN Button Status SDN Button Status Off The PDN exten sion is idle Green on The extension is on a call using the PDN button The extension is on a call using an SDN button Flashing green slowly A call is on hold at the PDN extension Regular Hold A call answered with the SDN button is on hold Regular Hold Flashing green m
145. an outside phone number For KX UT670 Press Conference Start User Manual 85 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation During a conversation rrAsren p C j misken gt J gt gt phone no t C C Tone Press TRANSFER Dial desired Talk to the Press TRANSFER Enter 3 phone number new party Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number hg Talk with multiple parties During a conversation 1 desired i yp d E d e d Pe P 3 C Tone ii Press Recall Dial desired Talk to the Press Recall Enter 3 hookswitch phone number new party hookswitch Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number hg Talk with multiple parties 86 User Manual 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation To establish a conference call when receiving a call from an outside party during a two party conversation During a conversation hk Press HOLD Press the flashing Talk to the Press CONF CO PDN or SDN new party or TRANSFER TRANSFER i re es 5 gt a Press the flashing CO ICD Group Talk to the Press CONF or press Talk with PDN SDN or INTERCOM original party TRANSFER and then enter 3 multiple parties corresponding to the original party To add four or more parties to a conference PT PS KX UT series During a conversation To continue desired D gt gt es amp 2e bg Press CONF Dial desired Press CONF phone number Seize an outside line
146. ancel ICD Group extension no Forwarding Your Calls Using ISDN X7X5 Service Call Forwarding CF by ISDN Toset To cancel To confirm outside line no multiple subscriber no 2 Unconditional 3 Busy 4 No Reply phone no outside line no multiple subscriber no 0 outside line no multiple subscriber no 1 User Manual 377 5 3 1 Feature Number Table 378 Feature While dial tone is heard Ga Additional digits buttons 1 6 2 Showing a Message on the 750 Callers Telephone Display Absent Message Toset 1 9 parameter Tocancel 0 1 6 3 Preventing Other People from 77 Using Your Telephone Extension Dial Lock Tolock 1 To unlock 0 extension PIN To make an outside call while your x47 your extension no extension PIN extension is locked phone no 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Recording a Normal Greeting Message Torecord 38 1 To play back 2 Toclear 0 Recording a Greeting Message for Each Time Mode Torecord 8 0 Day 1 Night 2 Lunch 3 Break 1 To play back 8 0 Day 1 Night 2 Lunch 3 Break 2 Toclear 8 0 Day 1 Night 2 Lunch 3 Break 0 To leave a voice message directly to 6 extension no another extension s message box Listening to Voice Messages Left 3 by
147. anual 1 8 3 Message Playback and Related Features envelope is played before each message after each message or only when you press 6 For more information consult your System Administrator The Unified Messaging system will automatically delete both new and old messages after a specified number of days have passed Your System Administrator or System Manager controls how many days messages are retained for Each time you play a new or old message the message retention counter resets e During playback you can increase the playback volume by pressing 84 If volume is at the highest setting pressing 84 will select the lowest setting as shown below Level 1 gt Level 2 gt Level 3 gt Level 4 gt Level 5 default i e For voice messages Unified Messaging system programming determines if the message EE Bookmarks Voice Messages only While listening to a message in your mailbox you can set a bookmark A bookmark lets you easily resume playback from a specific point in a specific message later You can set one bookmark for each message in your mailbox if you set a new bookmark the old one is deleted a e You cannot set or use bookmarks for deleted messages To set the Bookmark PT SLT PS SIP Extn During message playback C8 D5 Enter 85 To start playback at the Bookmark PT SLT PS SIP Extn During or after message playback C38 Le Enter 86 Recovering Deleted Messages You
148. arget ICD group HH MM SS Max The longest waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group HH MM SS Max Waiting Calls The maximum number of calls waiting in the queue of the target ICD group When View Mode is Group a pie graph will be created When View Mode is Caller ID CLIP a graph report cannot be created In other modes a bar graph will be created b The results report can be output in one of the following 3 ways e Graph Click Graph open the ACD Report Group Graph screen and display the graph of the report Click Print to print the graph User Manual 357 4 1 3 Supervisory Monitor ACD Control 358 e Export Click Export and save the report file e Print Click Print to print the report c Click Close For Agent 1 gt On the Agent tab under Filter Settings select one of the following items in the View Mode drop down list Agent Hour Day Date Month Note If you select Hour specify the time range 0 00 23 59 in Range On the Agent Filter Settings Select Agent screen set the groups to analyse as follows a Click Select b Click the agent name you want to analyse from the displayed agent names on Available Agent for ACD Report window c Click gt to move the agent you selected in step b to the Selected Agent for ACD Report window Maximum 128 agents To delete an agent from the Selected Agent for ACD Report window click the agent name
149. arious analyses based on that data To analyse the ACD report there are three filters Group Agent and Call The filtered ACD report data can be printed out and exported in CSV format You can also create graphs pie charts or bar charts to easily analyse ACD reports The flow from ACD report data collection to analysis is shown below User Manual 353 4 1 3 Supervisory Monitor ACD Control ICDG A ICDG B a ACD supervisor Start ACD logging Start Monitor Group Monitor Example Z Start Monitor Standard Mode Start ACD logging ICD Group aE aa 7 Current Waiting Call Longest Waiting Time Wrap up fa Real time ICDG information 5 02 53 Current Member Status eg oe Real time ICDG information x View ACD report Desired Filter set ACD report i Print 4 r Export CSV only L Graph Graph Example 1 Recording ACD report data is enabled at the same time the Group monitor starts Monitor Control amp Execute A user designated as an ACD Supervisor or Administrator can specify certain ICD groups to monitor and configure the monitoring settings Finally the user can start the monitor To configure the monitor settings and start monitoring You can configure the monitor control settings in the Group Monitor of the CDG Management in Web Maintenance Console 1 On the left side of the screen click Users gt ICDG Management
150. as well as use many other features PC Client Consult your dealer User Manual 3 Feature Highlights CA Call Accounting This application can calculate call cost estimates and track call activity for calls that are made through the PBX Installing the CA Call Accounting web server software allows you to access CA Call Accounting from any PC by using a web client You can sort and view print or export call information with the web client In addition reports can be created based on exported data PC Client PC PC Client Web Server Consult your dealer In This Manual The following abbreviations are used APT Analogue Proprietary Telephone Display PT Proprietary Telephone with a Display DPT gt Digital Proprietary Telephone IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone PS gt Portable Station PT gt Proprietary Telephone SIP extension SIP Extn Extensions of the PBX which uses Session Initiation Protocol for communication SLT gt Single Line Telephone PT is used as a generic term to represent IP PT DPT APT and Display PT The suffix of each model number e g KX NS7OONE is omitted The following icons are used frequently e i Hints FA Conditions Functional Limitation Depending on the PBX s software version some features may not function For details about which versions support these features consult your dealer Notice This PBX supports SIP Sess
151. ate in the conversation is set to 32 through system programming the keys on the conference originator s telephone DSS CONFERENCE TRANSFER FLASH etc will not function For a called extension To send a notification tone to the caller and join a conversation PT SLT PS Called Party During an announcement DSS Press DSS corresponding to the caller Wait for reply Press Recall hookswitch Caller During an announcement A notification tone co occurs and the display gt DSS gt h t shows the called party s information Press corresponding Talk Introduce the called party to the conversation N A maximum of 32 parties including the caller can join the conference Also depending on system settings a maximum of 32 parties including the caller can join the conversation dd e Push to Talk for PT SLT PS users If the Broadcast Mode and this mode are selected through system programming the called a5 PT SLT PS users can join the conversation by pressing any dial key 0 9 during the voice announcement By assigning PSs with the Hands free Answerback feature enabled to a conference group the caller can create a wireless paging system All of the called PS users with the Hands free Answerback feature enabled will hear the voice announcement Then any PS user can respond by pressing any dial key and their reply will be heard by all of the called parties User Manual 137 1
152. ating Ambient If installed in a closed or multi unit rack assembly the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient Therefore consideration should be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature Tma specified by the manufacturer Reliable Earthing Reliable earthing of rack mounted equipment should be maintained Particular attention should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit e g use of power strips SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS User Manual 19 1 1 3 Precautions 1 1 3 Precautions For users in the European Union only 20 Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries User Manual These symbols on the products packaging and or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste For proper treatment recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002 96 EC and 2006 66 EC By disposing of these products and batteries correctly you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling For more information about colle
153. ative Features sccciciccesecnnnesnenanensenstatnuantanddantsidusnsnenscawnniieisinsdsnandenessbenkdenuuasnenna 235 1 12 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features 235 1 12 2 Recording Information Using Preprogrammed Messages Printing Message 242 1 13 Exchanging the Settings between Extensions cccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenense 243 1 13 1 Walking TE RUGS PON ties tag ast teen encvsaetvagexvsacedientesensdamnweieccasceeaianeedn cede IEE E r eaaa 243 1 13 2 Enhanced Walking FE XIG INS OM occas te cerecccrecenes att cccceecdendusaccaneecedauueeana ctccune meses ueeteetoats 244 1 14 Using a Telephone with a Display sccescceseisnnndssnssessssicsussessegesnssnsensssensseuassesstesedtexttienenen 246 1 14 1 Using the Call Log ssaestaentecdeSecautdeatetesuepetentaxtastxerseise o2Sei0yec Ozecs Aaaa Eiaa iE iiini 246 1 14 2 Using the Director Siyeri a E E E 250 1 14 3 Accessing System Features System Feature ACCESS eeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 256 1 14 4 Self Labelling KX NT366 KX NT553 KX NT556 KX NT560 KX UT248 KX UT670 Ony etek cad cee das cadet cerns e daa a a a a E aa aaa a A ANE 258 1 15 Cellular Phone Features a nnesssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 261 1 15 1 Cellular Phone Features Seen eee renee eee eee cree rear ee rer ree Pree Perret ee treats rerty eereret 261 2 Manager Operation sssceceescccter
154. ature While dial tone is heard iad Additional digits buttons 2 1 2 Time Service Mode Control 780 Day Night Lunch Break 0 1 2 3 22 1 4 Turning on the External Background Music BGM Tostart Tostop X35 external pager no BGM no 1 digit BGM no 1 digit external pager no 0 x 0 2 1 5 Recording Outgoing Messages OGM To record To play back To record from an external BGM MOH port To clear X36 1 OGM floating extension no 2 OGM floating extension no 3 BGM port no 1 digit OGM floating extension no 0 OGM floating extension no 22 1 6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line Trunk Busy Out 785 outside line no 3 digits 22 1 7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Monitor 784 another PBX extension no 3 1 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension Extension PIN Personal Identification Number Toset To cancel 799 1 extension PIN same extension PIN 0 stored extension PIN ee ae Oak oO N The UM group s default floating extension number depends on system programming For more information consult your System Administrator or System Manager Manager only Manager and preprogrammed extension user only Supervisor only Hotel operator only The default of OG
155. ave specified the recipients you can record a message Before sending your message you can set any of the following e Urgent Status The message will be heard before other messages by the recipient e Private Status The recipient will not be able to forward the message ensuring privacy e Auto Receipt You will receive notification once the recipient has played back the message Finally you can send your message immediately or set a message delivery time User Manual 159 1 8 4 Sending Messages To send a message PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt gt Go to To specify recipients by number e y 2 or To specify recipients by name gt gt Enter 2 dialling by name To specify recipients by number mailbox no personal group Go to gt gt distribution list no P 2 To record your message LOR Enter 2 mailbox group no to accept Enter the mailbox number a personal group distribution list number and or a mailbox group number To specify recipients by name dialling by name CD Select the announced name gt gt C401 gt desired recipient s name p gt CG Hear the next name CG Repeat the current name Enter 1 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of Enter 1 2 or 3 the desired recipient s name Go to gt gt To record your message gt gt Continued on next page 160 User Manual 1 8 4 Sending Messages PT SLT PS SIP Extn Continued from previous page
156. aving a message waiting indication When the called extension is busy or does not answer your call you can leave a notification so that the called party may call you back For an extension receiving a message waiting indication As a message receiver the Message button light or Message Ringer Lamp lets you know that a call has been received If you receive notification you can call the caller back by a simple operation For an extension leaving a message waiting indication To leave a message waiting indication PT SLT PS When the called extension is busy or does not answer P MESSAGE D Ea Ca an y Press MESSAGE On hook or enter 4 To leave cancel a message waiting indication PT SLT PS SIP Extn KX UT series 1 Leave desired e D cama gt EE F Cancel Off hook Enter 70 Enter 1 to leave Enter desired On hook or 0 to cancel extension number User Manual 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer For an extension receiving a message waiting indication To check the left message and call back While on hook ar N Press MESSAGE Off hook until the desired extension appears To call back PT SLT PS p MESSAGE SS gt z CAA gt 2 Off hook Press MESSAGE or enter 70 and then 2 KX UT series While on hook S D gt 4 Off hook Talk Press MESSAGE SIP Extn SS gt GaGa gt D Off hook Enter 70 Enter 2 gt h
157. back feature is enabled the called extension can answer the conference group call without going off hook KX UT series SIP phones do not support the Hands free Answerback feature for a conference group call If using an SLT or SIP phone the caller can only originate a conference group call and cannot control the called parties call status manually For a caller User Manual 135 1 7 3 Making a Conference Group Call To make a conversation with a specific party During an announcement DSS Press DSS To make a conversation with a party in the group s preassigned order During an announcement A Press CONF o e When you press the CONFERENCE CONF Conference button after pressing a DSS Key you will make a conversation with the party who registered after the current party on call in the Conference Group To end a conversation with a specific party During a conversation To end a conversation with a specific party DSS Press DSS To end a conversation with the party who joined the conversation last TRANSFER Press TRANSFER To disconnect the party who joined the conversation last from the conference group call R FLASH RECALL Press FLASH RECALL 136 User Manual 1 7 3 Making a Conference Group Call o e In this case the FLASH RECALL button must be set to Flash Recall mode through system 5 programming e Ifthe maximum number of parties who can actively particip
158. be followed in order to operate the unit safely User Manual 1 1 1 For Your Safety AN WARNING For All Telephone Equipment e Do not allow rain to fall on the product or expose the product to moisture Do not let water oils or other liquids to splash onto the product Such conditions can lead to fire or electric shock and may impair the performance of the product e Do not place the product on an unstable or uneven surface If the product were to fall over it may cause injury or damage to the product e Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate the product where the power cord may be stepped on or tripped on e Do not supply power to a combination of devices that exceeds the total rated capacity of the wall outlets or extension cables used If outlets power strips extension cords etc are used in a manner that exceeds their rated capacity they emit large amounts of heat which could cause a fire e The product must only be installed and serviced by qualified service personnel The product should be used as is from the time of purchase it should not be disassembled or modified Disassembly or modification can cause a fire electric shock or damage to the product Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product e Products that require a power source should only be connected to the type of electrical power supply specified on the product label If you are not sure of the type of power supply
159. bers can leave voice messages for you and you can play them back later after you have logged in to your mailbox Messages in your mailbox are divided into 3 types e New Messages Messages in your mailbox which you have not played back yet e Old Messages Messages in your mailbox which you have played back but have not yet deleted e Deleted Messages Messages in your mailbox which you have deleted You can recover your deleted messages after which they will be treated as old messages refer to Recovering Deleted Messages If you do not recover deleted messages they will be permanently deleted at the end of the day When playing back a message the Unified Messaging system can also announce the message s envelope the date and time of the message and the message sender s information To play messages PT SLT PS SIP Extn Gi New messages f Log in to your mailbox gt gt Old gt CD Voice messages gt Listen to the message messages D C Deleted messages C4 All messages Pressing during message playback will return you to the previous menu You can then select another message type to listen to Enter 1 3 or 91 Follow the prompts as necessary o e This step is omitted depending on settings and COS settings of your mailbox Additional features are available during after the playback of voice messages Refer to the table below and press the appropriate dialling key The message types that
160. bled at your extension through COS programming e It is possible for an originating extension to leave a three party conversation with an outside party and let the two other parties talk by simply going on hook For the originating extension User Manual 47 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer To talk to each party alternately During a conversation To continue re Talk to the Press TRANSFER other party i e You can also deny others the possibility of joining your conversation Default Allow Refer EE to 1 9 7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation Executive Busy Override Deny 48 User Manual 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer Monitoring Another Extension Call Monitor The preprogrammed extension can monitor another extension After pressing a DSS button you can check the caller information of the call to another extension on the display Then you can choose to monitor the call if necessary To monitor PT SLT PS A busy tone is heard and the caller information of the call to another extension is displayed SS gt gt C5 J Monitoring starts C Tone Off hook Enter 5 a SIP phone users cannot use this feature but they can be monitored by other extensions To an Extension Refusing the Call DND Override The preprogrammed extension can call someone who has set the DND feature PT SLT PS DND Tone
161. call log is different from that of the display of KX TCA series PSs Notes for KX NT300 Series KX NT500 Series and KX UT Series Users If the primary PBX to which your telephone is connected fails the extension may automatically switch its connection to a secondary PBX e The time required to switch to the secondary PBX or back to the primary PBX is different depending on the type of your telephone e When the extension switches its connection to the secondary PBX your call will be disconnected if you are ona call e Even if the primary PBX becomes available again your telephone will not reconnect to it if you are ona call e For KX NT300 series and KX NT500 series users if background music BGM is being played through your telephone while it is connected to the secondary PBX it will not reconnect to the primary PBX when it becomes available Notes for KX NT543 KX NT546 and KX NT560 IP PT Users e While using a KX NT543 KX NT546 or KX NT560 IP PT in ECO mode IP network transmission speed is relatively slow and the secondary Ethernet port cannot be used To disable ECO mode consult your dealer Trademarks e Microsoft and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license All other tradema
162. can be used with each key a marked with a v Note that certain features are not available depending on the message type new old deleted Message Type Key Feature New Old Deleted C1 Repeat this message v v v User Manual 151 1 8 3 Message Playback and Related Features 152 Message Type Key Feature New Old Deleted 1 Replay the previous message v v v ez Play the next message v v v ED Delete this message e Ifa confirmation message is played press 1 v v eo to delete the message 3 Recover this message v 4 Reply to this message v v D Transfer this message v v 6 Play the message envelope v v v 7 lt During playback only gt a yf Rewind the voice message C8 lt During playback only gt j if V Pause restart message playback C3 CD lt During playback only gt V Y Increase playback volume 8 lt During voice message playback only gt Set a Bookmark for the voice message v v To restart message playback press 8 lt For voice messages only gt Start playback at the Bookmark for the voice v v message 9 lt During playback only gt 7 J Fast forward Save this message as new e After saving the message the next message v will be played I These keys only available when the appropriate COS settings are assigned to your mailbox For more information consult your System Administrator User M
163. can press the NEXT PAGE key to display other sets pages of 12 flexible button assignments as below Pages Total Flexible button KX NT553 2 24 KX NT556 3 36 Example KX NT556 NEXT PAGE mO gt For KX NT560 Page 3 Page 2 50008 The KX NT560 IP PT has 8 flexible buttons and the telephone s display shows which feature telephone number or extension number is assigned to each button You can press the Page key to display 3 other sets 258 User Manual 1 14 4 Self Labelling KX NT366 KX NT553 KX NT556 KX NT560 KX UT248 KX UT670 only pages of 8 flexible button assignments A different feature telephone number or extension number can be assigned to each button in each set This means that 32 flexible buttons are available Bank Home Sales 1 Sales 2 For KX UT248 The KX UT248 SIP phone has 8 flexible buttons and the telephone s display shows which feature telephone number or extension number is assigned to each button You can press the Page keys to display 2 other sets pages of 8 flexible button assignments A different feature telephone number or extension number can be assigned to each button in each set This means that 24 flexible buttons are available Bank Home Sales 1 Sales 2
164. ciesecececteteeccteaseneareccectes 199 1 9 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHC A ree e ea aE aa EE E EE 203 1 9 4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Callers Telephone Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP ccceeceeeeeceeeeeeetteteeeees 204 1 9 5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller s Telephone Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR cccccceeeeseseeececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 205 1 9 6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party s Telephone Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR cccccccccccccecceeeeeee eens ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 206 1 9 7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation Executive Busy Override CO Ysa cet eee e a a e a aa r eect ted tatet See e AS 207 1 9 8 Turning on the Background Music BGM ccsctscsccccscnceiecevencectntivetupsenessavdadugeidisescaeteeeedes 208 1 9 9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones Data Line Security ee 209 1 9 10 Checking the Time Service Status siscscsseassylivciceveccdvecsueteazenrssnadeastetes tansy ats Sinreieeeares 210 1 9 11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring Parallelled Telephone eee 211 1 9 12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone Wireless XDP Parallel ModE i E E E E E 212 1 9 13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wir
165. company greeting is Company Greeting 1 If the Company Greeting 1 is not recorded nothing will not be played The desired Incoming Call Service for each time mode of each call service The default service is Custom Service 1 for Day Lunch Break mode and Custom Service 2 for Night mode If the Custom Service is not recorded Automated Attendant service will be played The assignment of the Service Group for each Unified Messaging extension number Trunk o e Ifthe Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console the System Manager cannot change the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting The system will announce Sorry this function is not available User Manual 283 2 2 1 System Manager Features 284 To change the service group setting Log in to the System Manager s mailbox C5 2 ER to change the Service Group setting Enter the Service Group Number 1 64 Select the desired Time Service period entry SOMHGBHHNG for Day Time service for Night Time service for Lunch Time service for Break Time service to change the Company Greeting to change the Incoming Call Service then go to step 10 to change the setting to accept Select the desired setting entry C1 2 C3 2 AAEM to change a Company Greeting number to set the System Greeting then go to step 13 to disable then go to step 13 9 Enter a Company Greeting numb
166. computer in wav format and upload them to the Unified Messaging system For more information consult your System Administrator Prompts Common to VM and AA Services Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 363 Good afternoon 364 Good evening 365 Good morning 1211 Welcome to the Unified Messaging System 973 To enter by name press the hash sign and 1 974 To enter by name press the pound sign and 1 User Manual 301 2 2 2 Message Manager Features Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 221 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person s last name 326 For Q press 7 327 For Z press 9 693 Sorry there are no more matching names 701 Sorry this name cannot be found 392 Incorrect entry 842 To call the operator press 0 90 Calling the operator 599 Please wait a moment 1201 Welcome to the general delivery mailbox 596 Please leave a message at the tone 966 To end recording hang up or press 1 for more features 1026 To pause and restart recording press 2 1060 To review press 1 818 To accept press 2 979 To erase and try again press 3 829 To add press 4 978 To erase and exit press x 1018 To make this message private press 1 558 Otherwise press 2 733 Thank you for calling VM Prompts Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 593 Please enter your party s mailbox number 219 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the perso
167. corded using Automatic Two way Recording for that extension or select ALL e Status Specify the status for the recorded messages in the mailbox e Internal External Specify whether the recorded conversations were intercom calls or external calls or specify both Call Type Specify whether the recorded conversations were incoming calls or outgoing calls or specify both If Internal External is set to Internal or Both Call Type will be set to Both If Internal External is set to External Call Type can be set to Incoming Outgoing or Both e Phone Number Specify the phone number of the party calling the recorded extension e Caller Name Specify the name of the party that called the recorded extension may not be available for all recorded messages e Length Specify the length of the recorded conversations e Period Specify a time period in which calls were recorded To play a message For playback on the PC 1 Select the check box of a message to play 2 At the bottom of the screen select PC User Manual 3 2 1 User Programming 3 Click the J play button The message will be downloaded as an audio file for playback on the PC being used to connect to Web Maintenance Console For playback using the supervisor s designated extension 1 In the Mailbox filter select the mailbox whose messages you want to display and then click Search 2 Select the check boxes for one or more messages
168. ction and recycling of old products and batteries please contact your local municipality your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste in accordance with national legislation For business users in the European Union If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment please contact your dealer or supplier for further information Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union These symbols are only valid in the European Union If you wish to discard these items please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal Note for the battery symbol bottom two symbol examples This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved 1 1 3 Precautions CE The KX NS700NE and KX NS700UK are designed to interwork with the e Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of European countries e Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN basic rate access e Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN primary rate access Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd declares that the KX NS700NE and KX NS700UK are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipme
169. d 3 2 to accept Total Message Time 1 1 to change the total message time Available per Mailbox j C2 to accept the current setting then go to the next parameter 2 Enter the total message time 1 600 min or 0 Unlimited 3 2 to accept Message Retrieval Order 1 1 to change the current setting LIFO Last In First Out or FIFO First In First Out C2 to accept the current setting then go to the next parameter 2 2 to accept Prompt Mode 1 1 for Primary C2 for System For System enter system prompt number 1 8 2 3 to accept Delete Message CT to change the current setting enable or disable Confirmation 2 2 to accept Message Envelope 1 1 for Before Playback Mode C2 for After C3 for Require 4 to accept the current setting then go to the next parameter 2 4 to accept Caller ID Callback 1 1 tochange the current setting enable or disable 2 2 to accept Play System Prompt after 4 1 to change the current setting enable or disable Personal Greeting q 2 2 to accept Use Call Waiting on Busy 4 T to change the current setting enable or disable 2 2 to accept Message Cancel for Live 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable Call Screening 2 2 to accept User Manual 281 2 2 1 System Manager Features 282 Parameters Steps Intercom Paging Group 1 1 to change the paging group
170. d Line 2 Assignment Incoming The CO line no Which line do you prefer to 2 0 assigned to the answer when you go flexible button A CO ICD Group button off hook or CO G T A PDN button Co Ringing Tone Call Alternate Receiving Ring TB Directly The party s voice Voice is heard without ringing How do you prefer to receive 2 D cai an intercom call Ring only Prohibiting the 2 caller switching to the voice mode User Manual 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Item Programming Selection amp Parameter Input E No The telephone will not Parallelled Telephone ring Should the single line 2 telephone in parallel ring C1 Yes tThe telephone will ring Forced Answerback 0 No Disable Selection Do you prefer to answer a call without going off hook U2 Ea TB y Enabl regardless of the AUTO ANS eee button status Live Call Screening Mode You can monitor the ade i tad i Co message through the telephone Ich service do you preter speaker Hands free mode when a calling party is 2 GS recording a message in your TD Only an alarm tone is heard mailbox Private mode LCS Mode Set After 0 No Stop recording Answering Would you like to keep 2 6 recording after answer
171. d Retrieve Specified with a holding extension number holdi J X ma gt Ze Ge Off hook Enter 51 Dial holding extension Talk number User Manual 73 1 4 2 Holding a Call o e For PT users The CO or INTERCOM button light shows the current status as follows FF Regular Hold mode Flashing green slowly Your held call Flashing red Another extension s held call Exclusive Call Hold mode Flashing green moderately Your held call Red on Another extension s held call For KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 SIP phone users The S CO button light shows the current status as follows Regular Hold mode Flashing green slowly Your held call Flashing red Another extension s held call e Ifacallis not retrieved within a specified time you will hear an alarm as a reminder Hold Recall If an outside call is not answered within a specified time it is automatically disconnected e Hold Mode Change PT only After pressing the HOLD button if you press the HOLD button again the status switches from the Regular Hold mode to the Exclusive Call Hold mode or from the Exclusive Call Hold mode to the Regular Hold mode e If Automatic Call Hold has been preprogrammed you can put the current call on hold i automatically by pressing another CO ICD Group INTERCOM or DN button to make or EE answer another call e For the Call Hold Retrieve operation using a PDN SDN button refer to 1 5 1 Primary Directory Number P
172. d by the Personal Speed Dialling number in Speed Dialling Personal Number max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 x T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash 340 User Manual 3 2 1 User Programming 5 Click OK Customising the Flexible Buttons You can customise the flexible buttons on PTs Add on Key Modules PSs and KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 SIP phones They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or as feature buttons 1 In the Telephony Feature tab click Flexible Button View Edit 2 To set the flexible buttons specify each button on the Flexible Button screen Follow the table below to set each parameter When you finish click OK Button Steps Loop CO L CO Select Loop CO from Type To specify the ring tone select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number Group CO G CO Select Group CO from Type Then specify the outside line group number in Parameter Selection To specify the ring tone select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number Single CO S CO Select Single CO from Type Then specify the outside line number in Parameter Selection To specify the ring tone select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number Direct Station Selection DSS Select DSS from Type Then enter the extension number in Extension Number One touch Dialling
173. d once the party on the other end answers the call your recorded message will be played back You can specify message recipients by e Extension number e Outside telephone number e External Message Delivery List number refer to External Message Delivery Lists Unlike recipients who have their own mailboxes you have no way of knowing who may answer the call when the Unified Messaging system sends an External Delivery Message To protect the privacy of your messages you may assign a password that must be entered by the other party before your message is played back You can set Auto Receipt so that you will receive notification once the recipient has played back your message You can also send your message immediately or set a message delivery time Finally recipients of an External Delivery Message can reply to your message and can even set urgent and private message status o e This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator or System FF Manager User Manual 163 1 8 4 Sending Messages To send an external delivery message PT SLT PS SIP Extn A s Go to To specify a single recipient Log in to your mailbox gt C9 03001 gt or To specify multiple recipients gt gt external message delivery list Enter 931 To specify a single recipient r o gt gt aire ob Enter 1 Enter the outside line access number Dial the outside party s telephone number needed for making outside cal
174. delivered on March 5 e Auto Receipt is not enabled by default For more information consult your System Administrator e New urgent messages are played before any other messages However old urgent messages are played with other messages in the original order Personal Group Distribution Lists Personal Group Distribution Lists allow you to send messages to several subscribers at once refer to Message Delivery You can create and edit 4 Personal Group Distribution Lists and these lists can only be used by you You can assign 40 group members subscribers to each list and record a name for each group for example Sales Team Department Heads etc User Manual 161 1 8 4 Sending Messages To create and edit personal group distribution lists PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt 4 4 gt he aia arch Enter 44 Enter the desired personal group distribution list number 1 4 gt gt 41 G 4 gt gt p gt CI C Tone Enter 1 to record State the group name Enter 1 Enter 2 Enter 2 to add a name for the group to end recording to accept group members gt gt mailbox no of 2 the subscriber gt F Enter 2 to add Enter the mailbox number of the subscriber the subscriber you wish to add to the list toithelist Enter 1 or 2 To continue To delete members from personal group distribution lists PT SLT PS SIP Extn desired personal group Log in to your mai
175. described above The available options are as follows User Manual 125 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 126 Operation No Operations AL To play back the voice message from the beginning 2 To go to the next voice message ED To clear the voice message l Press the AUTO DIAL STORE button or enter 1 to confirm 4 To call back the caller who left the voice message 5 To go back to the previous voice message To leave a voice message directly in the message box of another extension Enter desired extension number C 6 If you cannot input the desired extension number within the specified time play back the voice message from the beginning If you enter an incorrect number for the desired extension number you will hear a reorder tone To play back your greeting message and record a voice message in your own 3 message box C 9 To end the call The operation numbers above may be changed to other numbers If you cannot activate these operations consult your system administrator In addition to the caller information that is recorded in the Call Log the following SVM Log information is recorded with voice messages left by callers e Callers Name e Callers Telephone Number e Time recording started e Voice Message Status New is displayed for voice messages that have not previously been listened to Old is displayed for
176. detailed room status information is recorded automatically This requires system programming lt Example gt co Dial Number 02 03 00 08 08AM 1234 Check out e To print out an invoice a printer should be connected to the PBX If the room extension is in use an invoice cannot be printed out lt Example gt kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Hotel kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Check in 01 JAN 00 06 31PM Check out 03 JAN 00 07 03AM Room 202 Mr Smith 01 01 00 06 52PM 202 01 Call amount 0012 24 30 FRO0084 50 001 02 01 00 06 07PM 202 01 123456789 10 12 FRO0010 20 1234567890 02 01 00 07 30PM 202 01 012345678901234 06 36 FRO0006 60 12345 02 01 00 08 45PM 202 01 0011234567890123 03 00 FRO0003 00 12345 Telephone 104 30 Tax 000 9 48 Minibar 4 00 Tax 000 0 36 Others 0 00 Tax 002 Hotel PBX Tel 41 3 12 34 56 78 Fax 41 3 12 34 56 78 E Mail 12345678 hotelpbx ch e The PBX can store a limited amount of room information When this storage becomes almost full the information of the extension that made the most calls is printed out automatically In this case the printout is similar to the example above but without categorised charge information and the total The PBX can then store new room information Call amount 0012 in the example above indicates that the information of 12 phone calls has previously been printed out automatically im Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Cu
177. ding a Call To retrieve a call Call Hold Retrieve PT SLT PS At the holding extension Call Hold Retrieve a co LOR gt Se gt Cs A confirmation LOR Fr eer gt tone is heard Press flashing CO or INTERCOM Off hook or enter 50 To retrieve an outside call from another extension only Regular Hold Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a held line number Sy gt ji hs A confirmation CDD Fe gt gt tone is heard Off hook Press CO or enter 53 and then held line number 3 digits To retrieve an intercom call or outside call from another extension only Regular Hold Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a holding extension number DSS Q gt Gas gt _ ees holding C Tone t Press DSS or dial Talk holding extension number Off hook Enter 51 72 User Manual 1 4 2 Holding a Call SIP Extn At the holding extension Call Hold Retrieve UL D is OR DN OR Ja HOLD C LOR Off hook HOLD Talk KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 Press flashing S CO or DN Other than KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 Press HOLD To retrieve an outside call from another extension only Regular Hold Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a held line number Q gt aaa gt E 4 Off hook Enter 53 Dial held line number 3 digits Talk To retrieve an intercom call or outside call from another extension only Regular Hold Call Hol
178. dots Email Addons 2 Click OK Changing Your Mailbox Password You can change your mailbox password in the Unified Message tab of the Edit User screen 1 Inthe Unified Message tab click Edit for Mailbox Password To change your message client password click Edit for Mailbox Password Message Client 2 Enter a password in Enter new password and then resa e re enter it in Confirm new password Enter new password 0 9 Confirm new password 0 9 N ote Cancel 7 r oe Entry for the password is hidden and displayed as dots wu 3 Click OK Registering a Prompt to the Mailbox You can display play record or delete the following prompts Mailbox Owner Name refer to Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber Owner Name Personal Greetings refer to Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages No Answer Greeting Busy Signal Greeting After Hours Greeting Caller ID Greeting Temporary Greeting and Absent Message Interview Mailbox Questions refer to Interview Mailbox Personal Caller ID Name refer to Personal Caller Name Announcement Personal Distribution List Voice Label refer to Personal Group Distribution Lists This feature may be disabled depending on your COS settings This feature may be disabled depending on your system programming settings or mailbox settings 1 In the Unified Message tab click Prompt Registration 2 Inthe Prompt Registration box
179. e verification code PIN phone no your extension no verification code extension PIN verification code PIN extension no your extension no verification code extension PIN verification code PIN outside phone no your extension no extension PIN feature no 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup Answering a Call from Another Telephone Call Pickup User Manual 375 5 3 1 Feature Number Table 376 Feature While dial tone is heard tied Additional digits buttons Group 40 group no 2 digits Directed x41 extension no Denying Other People the 720 Possibility of Picking Up Your Calls Call Pickup Deny Todeny 1 Toallow 0 1 3 4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Calls through an external speaker 42 external pager no 1 3 6 Identifying Malicious Calling X7 3 Parties Malicious Call Identification MCID 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer Transferring a Call Using the ISDN X62 phone no Service Call Transfer CT by ISDN Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service Blind Transfer 61 phone no 1 4 2 Holding a Call To hold Call Hold To retrieve a call 50 Call Hold Retrieve To retrieve a call Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a held line number 53 outside li
180. e the call will switch over to you except SIP phones User Manual 1 9 13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired Telephone One numbered extension 1 9 13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired Telephone One numbered extension Two telephones connected to the PBX can be set to share 1 extension number and both telephones can be set to ring One numbered Extension feature You can choose whether the sub extension associated with the main extension will ring when an incoming call is received To set PT SLT SIP Extn J E y C Tone D gt aaa gt o Gama Off hook Enter 48 Enter 1 Enter extension number On hook of the paired telephone To cancel PT SLT SIP Extn S gt qug m ll amp C Tone Off hook Enter 48 Enter 0 On hook To pickup call during conversation PT SLT SIP Extn S gt Off hook DSS ORJ caama Press lit DSS of the paired telephone Or enter 41 and then dial extension number of the paired telephone User Manual 213 1 9 14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension Extension Feature Clear 1 9 14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension Extension Feature Clear You can reset the settings of the following features on your extension to the default settings with one 214 operation This feature is also known as Station Programme Clear For KX UT series SIP phone users You can reset the settings of the following features on rs 7 your ext
181. e Calling Method Alternate Calling Ring Voice ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 51 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions iiedasiecene ct estcenzespazsciepin desea Leecntctivbesidnanuededeedectteedidtermepaienuiedecs 52 1 2 8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside Direct Inward System Access DISA ere cee ree E eer eer ence ree errr terre ere Te 53 1 2 9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA Remote SOMMO eiee teres tse aaa a a EEEE TEE donde A A a teeemasetaiee 56 1 3 R ceiving Calls aicese na aenaran Sadoe aaa Aae Aena aan En aana Nane SSEM Suaa 57 1 3 1 Answenng Calls sumirang ian aiaa n aE ET iaa EEEE R 57 1 3 2 Answering Hands free Hands free Answerback 222 ccccccceceseeeeeeeseeesseeeceeeeeeeeees 58 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup n se 59 1 3 4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker Trunk Answer From Any Station MAFASIA detec ee eeeteeeoceas 61 1 3 5 Using the ANSWERIRELEASE Button ics ste ee ses tip u ea cseeu sensations dd 62 1 3 6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties Malicious Call Identification MCID 64 1 4 During a Conversation i etesucsasetsrnuaeacnass tuncnmsacsisasisseinntadienusvhaicavesnuulss sanueianissauinsadainaiedssuasin 65 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer ssscccccccccsececasccaseed niece pues axtausnieccciesecsednnsencemiacsetemnitewieees 65 1 4 2 FHoldmg aC allore e a a er ree 71 1 4 3 Talking to Two Parties Al
182. e Message button to play back voice messages while on hook Display gt Lock is temporarily deactivated after you enter the extension PIN To clear voice messages from the SVM Log While on hook p MESSAGE TRANSFER Press MESSAGE Press TRANSFER Press STORE until desired SVM Log appears User Manual 127 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Accessing Your Message Box from an Outside Telephone You can remotely access your message box and perform any operations of the SVM feature through an outside line as if you were at your own extension From Outside Telephone PIN Personal Identification Number F The greeting QD gt Cemoro p meset gt COCA b gt Enter 47 while hearing Off hook Dial desired phone the greeting message number of a destination that has set the SVM feature For available operations your extension PIN 2 Ea 80 see Operation Reference gt C Tone amp Cs e d When Accessing Your D Tone Message Box Dial your Enter extension PIN Enter 38 extension number max 10 digits a e Ifyou hear a reorder tone when you try to leave a voice message directly in the message box of another extension that message box is unavailable You can enter another extension number by pressing X e When accessing your message box from an outside telephone you cannot call back callers who have left voice messages by pressing 4 while hearing th
183. e home for the day Personal Greeting for Caller ID Heard by callers from preprogrammed telephone numbers For details refer to Personal Greetings for Caller ID Temporary Greeting A special greeting that if recorded is heard by callers instead of the other greetings A common example might be This is name I m out of the office this week Absent Message Heard by callers when a personal greeting is set to a PBX s absent message and that absent message is currently set User Manual 145 1 8 2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox To record or delete your Personal Greeting Messages PT SLT PS SIP Extn CD No Answer Greeting CZ Busy Signal Greeting CG After Hours Greeting Log in to your mailbox p gt 4 41 gt CD Caller ID Greeting p gt gt gt 5 Temporary Greeting CED Absent Message p Greeting Select the desired greeting When you select Caller ID Greeting enter a Caller ID Greeting Number 1 4 When you select Absent Message Greeting enter an Absent Message Number 1 9 Enter 41 For Caller ID Greeting refer to Personal Greetings for Caller ID CD Change the greeting gt h 35 Delete the selected greeting Record your greeting message C Tone Follow the prompts as necessary The greeting will be deleted go on hook to finish CD Review 2 Accept gt gt 1 gt 3 Rerecord the greeting message repeat the steps above as necessary
184. e music 1 amp 1 9 8 Turning on the Background Music BGM 2 1 4 Turning on the External Background Music BGM do not want to display a number which is stored in memory m Conceal the number IF Storing Names and Numbers 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons want to confirm my extension number s Your Extension Number in 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones The date and time are not correct Set the date and time by system programming m Consult your dealer The visibility of the display is poor m Change the Display contrast level 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode want to specify the ringing tones amp To specify the ringing tones for each CO ICD Group PDN SDN or INTERCOM button DPT IP PT only 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons User Manual 5 2 1 Troubleshooting Problem Remedy The MESSAGE button light has lit up Another extension left you a message waiting indication or someone left a message in your mailbox while you were on the phone or away from your desk An SDN button on my extension does not work A PDN button is not assigned on the extension corresponding to your SDN button mp Create a PDN button on the desired extension amp 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons cannot use the secondary Ethernet port e mp If you are using a KX NT500 series telephone check whether ECO mode is enabled amp Display in 1 1 5
185. e number j A confirmation tone will be heard me Only one extension assigned as member 1 in each ICD group can perform the settings for virtual PSs e Itis possible to switch the forwarding status on off of a virtual PS by entering the number 4 7 of that extension then pressing the fixed FWD DND button instead of pressing the AUTO DIAL STORE button User Manual 113 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls Forwarding Your Calls Using ISDN Service Call Forwarding CF by ISDN 114 All calls are forwarded to an outside party using ISDN The following types of call forwarding are provided by the ISDN service Unconditional Call Forwarding Unconditional CFU When your extension is busy Call Forwarding Busy CFB When you do not answer Call Forwarding No Reply CFNR To set PT SLT PS Dy gt GGG gt pe gt CED gt CO gt gt Off hook Enter 7 5 Enter outside line Enter Enter your multiple number 3 digits subscriber number CZ Unconditional MSN gt gt Ci gt Si gt roneo gt CQ FP aR C Tone Enter Enter required number Enter desired Enter On hook phone number To cancel PT SLT PS DD gt GEGaGaGsa gt ee gt Ga gt Gane Off hook Enter 7 5 Enter outside line Enter Enter your multiple number 3 digits subscriber number MSN gt Ga gt PF A C Tone Enter Enter 0 On hook To confirm the condition Dy
186. e recording will stop you will hear a notification tone and the call will be disconnected in the following cases a the recording time for the voice message reaches the preprogrammed limit default 120 seconds b the recording space for the SVM feature reaches the limit i e When you are on the phone you can transfer the call directly to the message box of a desired extension by placing the call on hold temporarily then pressing X38 6 the desired EE extension number This allows the caller to leave a voice message in the message box of the desired extension 124 User Manual 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Listening to Voice Messages Left by Callers When a caller leaves a voice message information about that caller is also recorded as the SVM Log The SVM Log can be viewed using the display of a PT or PS by pressing the Message button To listen to voice messages While on hook Press MESSAGE Off hook until desired SVM Log appears PT SLT PS S gt Wma gt B Off hook Enter 38 Enter 3 PT SLT PS D Off hook Press MESSAGE or enter 702 To clear the voice message that you are listening to PT SLT PS While hearing the voice message D gt AUTO DIAL C3 Enter 3 Press STORE or enter 1 to confirm x e Various operations are available by entering numbers while you are listening to a recorded voice message using any of the methods
187. e voice message To listen to voice messages left in the message box of another extension From Outside Telephone PIN Personal Identification Number While hearing voice messages in your message box m gt AN gt aaa gt gt gt played back Enter 47 Dial desired Enter 8 extension number gt gt extension PIN gt CGwGac gt C Tone D T Enter extension PIN for Enter 38 that extension max 10 digits Enter 3 If the wrong extension PIN is entered you hear an alarm tone 128 User Manual 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension from Your Extension You can access the message box of another extension for example to record a greeting message for that extension by following the steps below PT SLT PS D Off hook PIN Personal Identification Number CHa Enter 47 ALIALA Enter 38 extension PIN J C Tone amp D Tone gt gt Enter extension PIN for that extension max 10 digits If the wrong extension PIN is entered you hear an alarm tone desired extension no gt gt gt Dial desired extension number For available operations see Operation Reference When Accessing Your Message Box User Manual 129 1 7 1 Paging 1 7 Making Answering an Announcement 1 7 1 Paging gt Group Paging Paging and then Transferring a Call Group
188. eate or edit a Log in Log out button a Log in Log out of a specified group button or a Wrap up button 218 User Manual 1 10 2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor 1 10 2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor Monitoring the Status of Waiting Calls Monitoring and Changing the Log in Log out Status of Extensions The extension assigned as a Supervisor extension can monitor and control the status of other extensions in an incoming call distribution group It should have a PT with 6 line display The display and DSS buttons show as follows or f ICD G Monitoring the Monitoring the Call Status Initial Display SS gt 739 gt extension gt a Call Status and Log in Log out Status a no SPRVS lt Display gt euing Monitor Queuing Monitor lt Display gt gt lt Display gt Date Time amp Qu extension no lt DSS gt lt DSS gt lt DSS gt Busy Status Monitor EXIT Busy Status Monitor Log in Log out Monitor EXIT lt Display gt Call Log History lt DSS gt ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Busy Status Monitor Monitoring the Status of Waiting Calls The Supervisor extension can monitor the status of calls waiting to be answered in the queue If an incoming call distribution group has an overflowed cal
189. ecall phone number new party hookswitch Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation To complete a conversation PT SLT PS During a conversation HP On hook Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit an ISDN Hold button User Manual 95 96 1 4 6 Mute 1 4 6 Mute You can disable the microphone or the handset to consult privately with others in the room while listening to the other party on the phone through the speaker or the handset oP To set cancel PT KX UT series During a conversation Ga d x AUTO ANS VOICE CALL MUTE MUTE Press MUTE a The AUTO ANS MUTE or VOICE CALL MUTE button light for PTs or the SP PHONE button light for KX UT series SIP phones shows the current status as follows Off Normal Flashing red Mute If mute is used during OHCA it will become Handset Mute PS users Refer to the documentation for your phone User Manual 1 4 7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation Off hook Monitor 1 4 7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation Off hook Monitor You can let other people in the room listen to the conversation through the speaker while continuing the conversation using the handset oP To set cancel PT KX UT series During a conversation using the handset SP PHONE Press SP PHONE The SP PHONE button light shows the cur
190. eceived that matches one of these numbers the caller you is automatically logged in to the mailbox Note that this telephone number must be unique for each mailbox Auto Login Caller ID Password Entry Requirement Specifies if a password is required for entry when automatic login is performed using the Caller ID of the number set in Auto Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2 Notice If this is set to No ensure that unauthorised third parties are not allowed access to that mailbox using the number assigned to Auto Login Caller ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2 Auto Login Toll Saver Allows you to call the Unified Messaging system and know whether or not new messages have been recorded in your mailbox by the number of rings you hear before the Unified Messaging system answers your calls Toll Saver is available under the same conditions as Automatic Login you can use Toll Saver when calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID number or by dialling a telephone number assigned to a specified DID number or trunk e Disable Disables the Toll Saver feature e DID Toll Saver functions when the system receives the preprogrammed DID number from the PBX e Caller ID Toll Saver functions when Caller ID information is received that matches one of the preprogrammed numbers Caller ID 1 or 2 Trunk Toll Saver functions when the system receives a call on the preprogrammed trunk Use
191. ed Custom Service Menu Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service 3 Click OK to finish Call Transfer Anytime in Incomplete Handling Menu Specifies whether callers can input an extension number to transfer their call while the Automated Attendant service is playing an Incomplete Call Handling menu Advanced Call Transfer Setting Item Description Advanced Call Transfer Setting By combining the settings for Call Transfer and Incomplete Call Handling you can create call handling scenarios for your extension Up to 20 scenarios can be created and a scenario can be assigned to each absent message in Scenario Setting 1 Click Edit for creating scenarios 2 Select a Scenario number 1 20 from the drop down list 3 Type the scenario name in the Scenario Name box 4 Assign the following options in each section Click OK when finished Call Transfer Status Determines how the Unified Messaging system will handle a call in the selected scenario User Manual 329 3 2 1 User Programming 330 Item Description Selection Determines how the Unified Messaging system will handle a call in the selected scenario Select the setting from the following items None Rings your extension e Call blocking Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer setting for your extension Your extension will not ring e Call screening The caller is
192. ed Telephone One numbered EXTENSION saina esl aeaiiai aea Eana a daaa A A Aa Aeons ia 213 1 9 14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension Extension Feature Clear eee 214 1 10 Utilising the Call Centre sicscitecsttieasatnatetnenetawaaiantnennnnatiasianeamennetiansaeumeenasadaxeniianeauaadaaneiee 216 1 10 1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out Wrap up 00 216 1 10 2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor svestsvestedectedecexsicexseasavareccenseceeetrasenasdiaencboieceetdeavieiaeweds 219 1 10 3 Forwarding a Waiting Call Manual Queue Redirection ssssessserieeeeerrrrererrrrrrneenena 222 1 11 Using User supplied Equipment seeeeeeesseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 223 1 11 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 223 1 11 2 If an External Relay is Connected 2 xcespica ra coiccose coiccecaeen take eaGss eae oh cetiees andeaieere 225 1 11 3 If an External Sensor is Connected crcsiicccccccecccanstcusescecsccessteaenceadestasbidectateeonmeeabeesetbies 226 1 11 4 If a Host PBX is Connected esssessssssssiiristtttteettirrritttttteeeetttttinnntnsnnnsttnnnnnnnsnanteeenn 227 1 11 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected ecceeececccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeseeees 228 1 12 Administr
193. edit subscriber mailboxes by following the steps below When creating a new mailbox or editing a mailbox s parameters the following parameters can be set e Mailbox Number e Subscriber s Name The system allows a maximum of 10 seconds for each name The name should be spoken slowly and clearly We recommend using the subscriber s last name e Extension Number e First 4 Letters of the Subscriber s Last Name Enter only the first 4 letters of the owner s last name e First 4 Letters of the Subscriber s First Name Enter only the first 4 letters of the subscriber s first name e Class of Service Number Enter any COS number 1 64 Interview Mailbox Number Interview Mailbox Numbers must not be the same number as an existing mailbox All Calls Transfer To Mailbox Change Logical Extension Status If this parameter is enabled the extension is considered to be a Logical Extension and therefore calls directed to the extension via Automated Attendant service are automatically forwarded to the extension mailbox The extension does not ring when a call is received e Message Waiting Lamp Notification If this parameter is enabled the Message Waiting Lamp of the subscriber s telephone turns on when a new message is recorded External Message Delivery Allows a subscriber to send a message to several subscribers and non subscribers including outside parties If enabled the prompt mode setting determines the language heard
194. eeting then go to STEP A in To record a personalised gt gt greeting for the first time LOR 3 Delete the greeting P gt QS On hook User Manual 147 1 8 2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox To assign Caller ID numbers for the first time PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt 401 C4 gt personalised greeting no gt 2 gt gt Enter 414 Enter the personalised Enter 2 greeting number 1 4 to accept To continue STEP B gt gt Caeo J gt D gt Enter the caller ID number Enter 2 caller s telephone number to accept 20 digits max and Enter 1 or 2 On hook several telephone numbers to match the Caller ID number that you assigned For example if you store the Caller ID number as 012 X enter the number of Xs as required for telephone numbers in your area any telephone number that begins with 012 for example all callers from the 012 area code will hear your personalised greeting i e While entering a Caller ID number you can press to enter a wild card This allows on To add delete review Caller ID numbers later PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt 401 C4 gt personalised greeting no gt 2 gt gt Enter 414 Enter the personalised Enter 2 greeting number 1 4 to accept Add a Caller ID number then go to STEP B in To assign Caller ID numbers for the first time CD Delete all numbers ORJ then go on hook to
195. efault must be specified For more Fy information consult your System Administrator e When a6 line display PT is used the number of new unplayed messages will be displayed while the message waiting lamp is lit If the telephone has a Message button the Message light will also turn on when you receive a new message Log in to the Message Manager s mailbox 1 2 2 3 1 to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status 4 C1 to change C2 to accept Setting Notification by External Device The system calls the preprogrammed telephone number when a new message is recorded in the Message Manager s mailbox Set the following parameters as needed To assign notification numbers A maximum of 3 telephone numbers can be set for message notification It is also possible to have the caller select whether or not he or she wishes to enter a callback number User Manual 2 2 2 Message Manager Features PO ND a ot or Log in to the Message Manager s mailbox 2 C3 to assign a telephone number Enter the desired number C1 to change the first telephone number C2 to change the second telephone number C3 to change the third telephone number 1 to accept Dial the telephone number C2 to accept C1 to change the telephone number to accept to review to add more digits to insert a pause to insert a wait for dial tone GIGIGHCAS To set device status For
196. efore timeout The call is disconnected when the timer runs out unless the originating extension returns to the conference 90 User Manual 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation EE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Conference button User Manual 91 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation Leaving a Conference Leaving Three party Conference The person who originated a conference with two other parties can leave the conference and allow the other parties to continue the conversation To leave a conference involving at least one other extension PT SLT PS KX UT series During a three party conference RP On hook To leave a conference involving two outside parties During a three party conference TRANSFER Press TRANSFER On hook q 4 FRA Press Recall hookswitch On hook a e To leave a conference call involving two outside parties and have the conversation continue your extension must be enabled to transfer calls to outside lines through COS programming 92 User Manual 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation Letting a Third Party Join Your Call Privacy Release conversation You can also leave the conversation and then let the two other parties You can let a third party join your current outside call and establish a three party To let a third party join your conversation and establish a three party conversation Your extension on t
197. election amp Parameter nput The display shows your PT or PS s extension number Your extension information 0 0 lt Example gt Ext 101 EB Light Display Contrast Selection Li ttle Light Preferred display contrast m 2 alas level from the 4 levels Little Dark available Vane man 4 Dark 308 User Manual 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Item Programming Selection amp Parameter number being displayed on the called party s telephone Input 11 English Display Language 2 ena anguee Selection Which display language do ma 5 E 3rd Language ou prefer ee C4 4th Language D 5th Language No Manual The display keeps showing all of the outside Display Switching Mode Co caller s information unless you Would you like the call change it to the call duration duration to be shown mm manually automatically on the display Yes Automatic The first when answering an outside call line of the display will change C1 to the call duration automatically when you answer an outside call Display Backlight Co Yes Automatic Selection Would you like to turn on the 0 4 TB Yes always On display backlight of the telephone C2 No always Off Self Labelling Display C1 Light Contrast Pref
198. ement OHCA Whisper OHCA The caller s name or number is displayed for five seconds in fifteen second intervals while waiting to be answered User Manual 83 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting EE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Call Waiting Tone Type Selection If you select Tone 1 you will hear the same tone for Call Waiting from an outside party and an extension If you select Tone 2 you will hear different tones for Call Waiting from an outside party and an extension 7 a man Special Tones E 1 5s e Only tone 1 is available for KX UT series SIP phones Answering Call Waiting from the Telephone Company This is an optional telephone company service You can receive a call waiting tone and the caller s information For details consult your telephone company PT PS KX UT series PT SLT PS While hearing a tone While hearing a tone R FLASH TRANSFER RECALL q gt Gaceacoa EZE E Press TRANSFER Enter 60 or Recall hookswitch Press FLASH RECALL or EFA N e To return to the original party repeat the operation e In this case the FLASH RECALL button on a proprietary telephone or KX UT series SIP phone must be set to External Feature Access EFA mode through system programming EE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit an External Feature Access EFA button 84 User Manual 1 4 5 Multiple Party
199. end Enter 2 to accept recording C1 Review To record your greeting messages 2 Accept 2 4 C1 Aeee Ne ai gt gt C Tone CD Add Record your greeting message Enter 1 to end GE Delete and exit recording Enter the desired option To confirm the settings EB Enter 1 On hook e CAUTION gt e Itis strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access e To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX keep the password secret If it becomes known to others the PBX may be misused e Change the password periodically 144 User Manual 1 8 2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages After callers reach your mailbox they will hear your personal greeting message You can record 6 kinds of Personal Greetings the appropriate greeting will be played for callers If you delete or do not record a greeting message a prerecorded greeting message will be used No Answer Greeting Heard by callers when you do not answer their calls A common example might be This is name can t take your call right now Busy Signal Greeting Heard by callers when you are on another call A common example might be This is name I m on another call right now After Hours Greeting Heard by callers when the Unified Messaging system is in night mode A common example might be This is name I ve gon
200. ension 5 Message Waiting Call Forwarding FWD Timed Reminder Do Not Disturb DND Call Waiting for intercom calls Call Waiting for outside calls Data Line Security Log in Log out Features Default Setting Hot Line Off Message Waiting All the messages that have been left by other Off extension users Call Pickup Deny Allow Call Forwarding FWD Off Absent Message Off Paging Deny Allow Timed Reminder Cleared Do Not Disturb DND Off Call Waiting for intercom calls Call Waiting for outside calls Disable No call Disable No tone Executive Busy Override Deny Allow BGM Off Data Line Security Off Parallelled Telephone The telephone in parallel rings Log in Log out Log in 1 These features may not be reset depending on the system programming User Manual 1 9 14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension Extension Feature Clear PT SLT PS SIP Extn S gt a eS C Tone Off hook Enter 790 On hook a e For Users in Canada Only After performing Extension Feature Clear the setting of Call Waiting becomes Enable Tone In this case dial tone 2 will be heard when you go off hook User Manual 215 1 10 1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out Wrap up 1 10 Utilising the Call Centre 1 10 1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out Wrap up
201. enter a maximum of 16 characters consisting of 0 9 X and special codes D Disconnecting F Flash Recall R Ringback Tone Detection e T Dial Tone Detection e Dial Pause default 1 s e Dial Pause default 3 s e X Extension Dialling 0 9 X Dial Code No Answer Time Selection No Answer Time Other Specifies the length of time that the Unified Messaging system waits before handling unanswered calls to the extension 1 Select System or Other 2 If Other is selected specify 10 60 s User Manual 327 3 2 1 User Programming 328 Item Description Call Transfer Status Determines how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when it reaches your extension 1 Click Edit 2 Select the setting from the following items e None Rings your extension e Call blocking Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer setting for your extension Your extension will not ring e Call screening The caller is prompted to record his or her name The Unified Messaging system then calls you and plays back the caller name You can choose whether to answer the call Intercom Paging Pages you by intercom e Transfer to Mailbox Transfers the caller to the mailbox e Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service e Transfer to specified telephone number 1 5 Transfers the caller to one of the specified
202. ephone to Ring Parallelled Telephone 1 9 11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring Parallelled Telephone proprietary telephone you can choose whether the parallelled single line telephone will ring to an incoming call or not Default Ring In the case where a single line telephone is connected in parallel to your digital 4 Rin S gt Ga gt D amp Co No ring Off hook Enter 39 Enter 1 to ring On hook or 0 not to ring x e Even if No ring is selected calls can be made and answered on the single line telephone by lifting the handset Ifyou go off hook while your parallelled telephone is in use the call will switch over to you e This feature is not available for the KX T7665 User Manual 211 1 9 12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 1 9 12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 212 Your PS can be used in parallel with a PT SLT or SIP phone When in this mode incoming calls to a wired telephone also ring the paired PS To set gt Ba gt D gt Gam amp C Tone Press TALK Enter 48 Enter 1 Enter extension number Press CANCEL of the paired telephone To cancel O gt mmaa mo l G C Tone Press TALK Enter 48 Enter 0 Press CANCEL N Some wired telephones are prohibited from using this feature Ifyou go off hook while your parallelled telephone is in us
203. er 1 32 then go to step 13 10 C1 to change the setting to accept 11 Select the desired setting entry to set Voice Mail Service then go to step 13 to set Automated Attendant Service then go to step 13 to set Custom Service to set Interview Service to set Transfer to Mailbox 12 Enter the Custom Service number 1 200 or the Mailbox number 13 2 to accept To change the service group assignment 1 ee AD C5 C1 Log in to the System Manager s mailbox C3 to change the Service Group Assignment Enter the Unified Messaging extension number C1 to change the service group then go to step 6 C2 to accept Enter the Service Group Number 1 64 C2 to accept User Manual 2 2 1 System Manager Features Broadcasting Messages The System Manager can deliver a message to multiple subscribers with one operation Messages can be sent to all subscribers Broadcasting Message feature or to specified subscribers only When delivering a message to specified subscribers the System Manager can receive verification when the recipients listen to the message i e The System Manager can set the date and time when a message is delivered The date can be set up to one month in advance EE To deliver messages to all mailboxes Broadcasting Messages The Broadcasting Messages feature allows the System Manager to deliver a message to multiple subscribers with
204. er Owner Name You can record your name in the Unified Messaging system The system can then announce your name for callers to let them know that they have reached the correct mailbox To change delete your subscriber name PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt 4 3 JC 1 2 ms gt C1 gt gt C Tone Enten asi State your name Enter 1 to end recording Enter 433 to delete your subscriber name then go on hook to finish gt gt 2 gt aS Enter 2 to accept On hook Common Service Commands and Navigation Commands Commands for Changing the Current Unified Messaging System Service After going off hook and pressing the MESSAGE button Voice Mail Transfer button or enter the UM group s floating extension number you can enter a service command to access certain Unified Messaging system features quickly While guidance is being provided you can also use service commands to for example switch to a different Unified Messaging system service mode 1 For KX UT series SIP phone users When using the MESSAGE button please press the MESSAGE button before going off hook User Manual 149 1 8 2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox 150 Dialling by Name Custom Service You will be guided to enter a Custom Service number 1 200 Log in HB Sie A el SIE Voice Mail Service followed by and your mailbox number 7 Restart Return to Main Menu
205. er Time Out v v v v v 1 8 Using the Unified Messaging Features vy v v y v 1 9 1 Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder v v v v 1 9 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND Do Not Disturb DND v v v v v Switching FWD DND Status Using Fixed V3 FWD DND Button 1 9 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook 2 z V Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA 1 9 4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller s Telephone Calling z 7 s Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 9 5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller s Telephone Connected v v v v v Line Identification Restriction COLR 1 9 6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party s Telephone Calling Line v v v v v Identification Restriction CLIR 1 9 7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your V y Y Conversation Executive Busy Override Deny 1 9 8 Turning on the Background Music BGM v 1 9 9 Protecting Your Line against Notification g z J Tones Data Line Security 1 9 10 Checking the Time Service Status v 1 9 11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring ys Parallelled Telephone 1 9 12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired p Telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 1 9 13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired s Y V Telephone One numbered extension 366 User Manual 5 1 1 List of Operations by Telephone Type Telephone T
206. erred display contrast 2 Little Light level from the 4 levels 0 5 available for Self Labelling 3 Little Dark KX NT366 KX NT553 KX NT556 only C4 Dark desired no max 32 digits Hot Line is DL Available characters 0 9 P Pause Would you like to dial a preset number simply by going Co Do not use off hook C1 2 a Use Calling Line Identification D No Allows your number Restriction CLIR to be displayed Should you prevent your 1 B9 C41 Yes Prevent your number being displayed User Manual 309 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 310 Item Programming Selection amp Parameter Input Calling Connected Line E Caller ID assigned to your Identification Presentation extension CLIP COLP m Which number should be TE Caller ID assigned on the displayed on the called and outside line being used calling party s telephone C0 No line C1 An idle outside line C2 The CO line no Preferred Line assigned to the Assignment Outgoing flexible button A CO ICD Group button Which do you prefer to seize 1 9 or when you go off hook to make calls CO ED Intercom On a PDN 9i extension an idle PDN button is aa selected when going off hook O PDN C0 No line TD The longest ringing line when multiple calls arrive Preferre
207. ers Follow the steps below to edit a Personal Custom Service 1 2 3 4 Click Edit For each Key specify an Assigned Operation For each Assigned Operation that is specified specify a Value from the following e Transfer to specified mailbox Allow the caller to leave messages in a specified mailbox e Transfer to specified extension Transfers the caller to a specified extension Transfer to Voice Mail Service Allows the caller to access Voice Mail Service Transfer to Automated Attendant Service Allows the caller to access Automated Attendant Service e Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu Transfers the caller to the Custom Service specified here e Transfer to operator Connects the caller to an operator e Transfer to outside specified number Transfers the caller to a specified outside telephone number Enter the Outside Numbers list index 1 4 e Page the party Pages you Repeat greeting Repeats the greeting e None No operation assigned Click OK when finished Outside Numbers Specifies the outside telephone numbers that can be used for the Transfer to outside specified number operation in the Personal Custom Service settings 1 Click Edit 2 Enter Outside Number 1 4 Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 x and special codes e T Dial Tone Detection e Dial Pause default 1 s e 5 Dial Pause default 3 s e 0 9 x Dial Code Click OK when finished
208. es The CLIR button light shows the current status as follows Off shows your telephone number Red on prevents your telephone number being displayed e Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company IE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR button 206 User Manual 1 9 7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation Executive Busy Override Deny 1 9 7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation Executive Busy Override Deny PT SLT PS SIP Extn C1 Prevent D X amaa gt 4 T C0_ Aiow C Tone hd Off hook Enter 733 Enter 1 to prevent On hook or 0 to allow o e Some extensions may be prohibited from performing this feature A User Manual 207 1 9 8 Turning on the Background Music BGM 1 9 8 Turning on the Background Music BGM You can listen to the background music through your telephone speaker while on hook An external music source such as a radio can be connected oP If your extension becomes busy off hook making or receiving a call etc the music stops temporarily When you go back on hook the music starts again To select and set cancel Emo amp gt Ua gt e ca Co Cancel C Tone Off hook Enter 751 Enter BGM number On hook 1 digit or 0 to cancel o e System programming may be required for some IP PT users to lis
209. es are programmable allowing recognition of call type Outside Intercom or Doorphone Tone 1 1 4s Tone 2 18s Tone 3 1s Tone 4 1s When going off hook Dial Tones Tone 1 As Normal L For KX UT series SIP phone users Tone 1 will be heard when any of the following features are set e Absent Message e Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting e Extension Dial Lock e Executive Busy Override Deny User Manual 385 5 4 1 What is This Tone Tone 2 e When there are messages that have previously been listened to and no new messages recorded by the SVM feature When any of the following features are set e Absent Message e Background Music e Call Forwarding e Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting Do Not Disturb e Extension Dial Lock e Executive Busy Override Deny Hot Line Timed Reminder For KX UT series SIP phone users Tone 2 will be heard when any of the following features are set e Display Lock e Call Forwarding e Do Not Disturb Tone 3 e When answering an external sensor Call Not available for KX UT series SIP phones After pressing TRANSFER or Recall hookswitch to hold a call temporarily e g Call Splitting e While a called PS is being searched e When Account Code Entry is performed e When answering a Timed Reminder call with no message Tone 4 Message waiting indication was received When you make calls Busy Tone 386 User Manual Ann nnannnnnnnninnnnnnnnnn 5
210. essage Call through Service Continued on next page Set Call Transfer Status 1 Call Blocking 2 Call Screening 3 Intercom Paging 4 Transfer to Mailbox 5 Transferring to Specified Custom Service 6 All Disable Incomplete Handling Status For No Answer 1 Leaving a Message 2 Covering Extension 3 Intercom Paging 4 Set Transferring to Custom Service 5 Operator 6 Return to AA Service Top Menu Incomplete Handling Status For Busy 1 Leaving a Message 2 Covering Extension 3 Intercom Paging 4 Set Transferring to Custom Service 5 Operator 6 Return to AA Service Top Menu User Manual 195 1 8 7 Quick Reference 196 Continued from previous page Set Other Features 1 Listen to Deleted Message 2 Set Interview Mailbox 3 Set External Delivery Message 4 Set Remote Call Forwarding 5 Set Timed Reminder Listen to Deleted Messages 1 Voice Message All Messages EE Interview Mailbox Management 1 Record Question 2 Set Answer Length 3 Erase Question External Message Delivery 1 Record Message 2 Set a Mailing List Remote Call Forwarding Set 1 FWD AIl Calls 2 FWD Busy 3 FWD No Answer 4 FWD Busy No Answer 5 FWD to an Outside Line 6 FWD Cancel User Manual Receive Deleted Message During or after playback 1 Repeat Message 1 1 Previous Message 2 Next Message 3 Recover Message 6 Message Enve
211. essage Manager and the System Manager respectively a Ifthe Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console the System Manager cannot set COS parameters The system will announce Sorry this function is not available To set COS parameters Follow the steps detailed below to set the following Class of Service parameters A Follow system prompts Log in to the System class of parameter below Enter 52 Enter the class of service number 1 66 Parameters Steps Personal Greeting Length 4 T to change the greeting length C2 to accept the current setting then go to the next parameter 2 Enter the greeting length 1 360 s 3 2 to accept New Message Retention 1 1 to change the retention time Time C2 to accept the current setting then go to the next parameter 2 Enter the retention time a maximum of 30 days or 0 Unlimited 3 2 to accept Saved Message Retention 4 T to change the retention time Time C2 to accept the current setting then go to the next parameter Enter the retention time a maximum of 30 days or 0 Unlimited C2 to accept N aa User Manual 2 2 1 System Manager Features Parameters Steps Message Length 1 1 to change the message length C2 to accept the current setting then go to the next parameter 2 Enter the message length 1 60 min or 0 Unlimite
212. essage delivery time However please note that you cannot reply to receipt messages pe e Only new and old messages can be replied to To reply to a deleted message recover the message first refer to Recovering Deleted Messages To call back the message sender PT SLT PS SIP Extn During or after voice message playback 4 gt TE Enter 4 Enter 1 to call the sender User Manual 1 8 3 Message Playback and Related Features To leave a message for the sender PT SLT PS SIP Extn During or after voice message playback 4 gt 2 x G4 CO Enter 4 Enter 2 Record your message Enter 1 to begin recording to end recording You can pause and resume recording by pressing 2 If you pause for more than 20 seconds recording will stop automatically CDCI Set the delivery time of the message gt gt 2 gt CDJ Send the message immediately gt gt Accept then go on hook Enter 2 Enter 11 12 or 2 to accept To set the delivery time of the message gt gt desired GE p gt f desired day of the month gt 2 gt gt delivery time bord for delivery CG PM Enter the desired Enter 1 for AM Enter the day of the month Enter 2 delivery time and 2 for PM for delivery and to accept Make the message urgent C1 Make the message private gt gt gt 2 Continue Continue Enter 1 or 2 Enter 1 or 2 CD Request a receipt LOR C2 Continue Enter 1 or 2 On hook
213. et to Yes the device is called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox Scheduled The selected device is called only during the selected times Time Frame If Scheduled is selected here follow the steps below to specify the time frame 1 Click a day Sunday Saturday tab 2 Click Enable Time Frame No 1 or 2 3 Enter the start and end times in the Start At HH MM and End At HH MM fields 4 To specify if sent voice message is deleted from the Unified Message system after they are sent by e mail select Yes for Delete After Send Voice File or Delete After Send Fax File 5 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed and then Click OK External Message Delivery Item Description External Message Delivery Active If set to Yes you are able to utilise the External Message Delivery feature External Message Delivery Prompt Mode When an external message is delivered the receiver will be greeted by the system in the specified language If set to Primary the default language will be used If set to Selective the receiver has a choice of prompts Auto Forwarding Item Description Auto Forwarding Active If set to Yes the Unified Messaging system automatically forwards messages that have not been played for a specified length of time to another mailbox User Manual 3 2 1 User Programming Item Description Auto F
214. ethods available Default Hands free mode Hands free mode You can monitor the message automatically live through the telephone speaker Private mode You will hear an alarm tone while the caller is leaving a message User Manual DF 1 11 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Before operating e Create a Live Call Screening LCS button Personal Programming e Select the mode either Hands free or Private Personal Programming e Set the extension PIN Personal Identification Number e Set the Live Call Screening feature To set Live Call Screening PIN Personal Identification Number CO i Live Call gt extension PIN Screening Press Live Call Enter extension PIN Screening max 10 digits This is required only when an extension PIN is stored To cancel Live Call Screening Co Live Call Screening Press red Live Call Screening User Manual 231 1 11 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Operation Flowchart The operations in the shaded areas can be done hands free Hands free Mode Private Mode Alarm Tone Monitoring Hands free Monitoring Handset BSR z ibili pr PHONE C sane QP Live Call No operation I k SOn NY Press SP PHONE MONITOR or Live Call Off hook Screening Stop monitoring Answering SP PHONE Live Call Screening Stop Answering Stop Answering Se Call monitoring the call monitoring the call Press Q id Cc SP PHONE gt
215. extension with DND set this feature will temporarily be deactivated When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from outside calls DND set cancel we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD DND Outside calls and FWD DND Intercom calls because a the light patterns of the FWD DND Both calls button including FWD DND button fixed button will indicate the setting for either outside calls or intercoms calls but not both Note The DND icon on PS display reflects the setting for outside calls only b pressing the FWD DND Both calls button including FWD DND button fixed button will not change the FWD or DND mode for intercom calls and outside calls separately Customising Your Phone 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit FWD DND Both calls Outside calls Intercom calls buttons Switching FWD DND Status Using Fixed FWD DND Button Using a proprietary telephone PT or KX UT series SIP phone except KX UT670 Gp 200 you can easily switch the FWD DND status for outside intercom calls without clearing any FWD destination that was set previously User Manual 1 9 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND a e For KX UT670 SIP phone users There is no physical FWD DND button on the phone To set and clear the FWD DND status refer to the documentation for your phone To switch the FWD DND status for outside calls While on hook when in FWD DND Setting Mode lt eke FWD D
216. f a os Ji Enter Talk If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call extensions outside telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code Entry codes can consist of the digits 0 through 9 When is used for an entry code no one can join a conversation that is already in progress When you are using an outside telephone through DISA or TIE Line it is possible to join the conversation after accessing your extension using Walking COS Extensions outside telephones can join the conversation using this feature only when the conference group call has already been established between the extension originating a conversation and at least one member To join a conversation that is already in progress extensions outside telephones must be using an idle extension with no held calls If a conversation has reached the maximum number of participants this feature cannot be used to join the conversation Starting a Conference Group Call using Hands free Answerback If the Hands free Answerback feature is enabled with at least one conference group member the call can be automatically answered and the conversation begins with only one participant the caller Then up to 6 participants can use the Join After Time Out feature to join the conversation User Manual 139 1 8 1 What is the Unified Messaging system 1 8 Using the Unified Messaging Features 1 8 1 What is
217. f hook Enter 750 Enter 0 On hook User Manual 115 1 6 2 Showing a Message on the Caller s Telephone Display Absent Message o e Enter the desired value in the positions You must enter the correct number of characters 5 as represented by the using 0 to 9 or x e The preprogrammed messages can be changed through system programming e To create your personal message Message no 9 refer to 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 116 User Manual 1 6 3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone Extension Dial Lock 1 6 3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone Extension Dial Lock You can lock your extension so that other users cannot make unauthorised outside calls This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout To lock PT SLT PS SIP Extn D gt Gam C Tone Off hook Enter 77 Enter 1 On hook To unlock PT SLT PS SIP Extn PIN Personal Identification Number S gt Da gt gt Gasmm 2 ap C Tone Off hook Enter 77 Enter 0 Enter extension PIN On hook max 10 digits Pe Ifyou forget the extension PIN or cannot unlock your extension consult your manager He can clear your extension PIN Then you can set the new PIN and unlock your extension by entering it e If your extension is locked by this feature it cannot perform features as follows Making outside calls Changing the call forwarding destination e If you do not se
218. fo To forward or refuse some or 32 di it your extension is busy all of your incoming calls for outside calls max igits 4 desired No Answer Forwarded za 2 no when you do not answer for intercom max 32 digits calls Busy No d d EE ar Answer Forwarded when you aod do not answer or when your max 32 digits extension is busy FWD N A Timer To set the timer for No 0O 120 seconds Answer and Busy No w Default 15 seconds Answer Call Pickup Deny 0 No Allow Should you prohibit other o eople from picking up your ralle ii C1 ves Deny Headset Operation Ka No Hpadaet OR 2 Do you use the headset TB yes H adset n ie Busy Override 0 No Allow eny Do you prohibit other people 6 2 from joining your C Yes Deny conversation User Manual 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Programming Item Selection amp Parameter Input Paging Deny Co No Allow Would you like to prohibit 6 C3 paging announcements C1 Yes Deny Key Pad Tone Set Co No Off Do you prefer to hear the key 6 4 pad tone C1 Yes On Background Music BGM Co No Off Do you want background music through your telephone C6 5 C1 BGMno Yes On speaker while on hook 1 digit Bluetooth Registration To register a Bluetooth T wireless headset on your CEJ LE Base Rey MA
219. forwarding setting has not been completed properly possibly because a nonexistent extension number has been entered as the destination For more information consult your System Administrator Setting the Timed Reminder The Message Manager can set or cancel the Timed Reminder The telephone will ring at the set time according to the set mode Once Daily o e This feature is not available for PSs e This feature is not available when the Message Manager s extension assigned for Operator 1 in the Day Mode is default In this case it should be changed to the operator s extension number For more information consult your System Administrator User Manual 299 2 2 2 Message Manager Features To set cancel 1 Log into the Message Manager s mailbox 2 Ca 3 Enter the desired number C1 to change the setting C2 to accept then go on hook to finish C3 to cancel turn off then go on hook to finish 4 Enter the desired time then 5 Enter the desired number C1 for AM C2 for PM 6 Enter the desired number C1 to set once C2 to set daily 7 2 to accept a This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24 hour time The time format 12 or 24 hour is determined by the Position of AM PM in Time Stamp setting For more information consult your System Administrator Day Night Recording Menu A Day and Night Menu can be recorded as Custom Service
220. from your extension Automatic login must be enabled to use Direct Service Access refer to Automatic log in For details about these Unified Messaging extension numbers consult your System Administrator Personal Greetings for Caller ID You can record personalised greetings for specific callers If you have assigned their telephone numbers Caller ID numbers to a personalised greeting they will hear the appropriate greeting when they call you instead of your other greeting messages normally played for callers You can record 4 personalised greetings and assign 8 callers to each greeting Record your personalised greetings before assigning Caller ID numbers This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox To record a personalised greeting for the first time PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt 401 C4 gt personalised greeting no gt gt Enter 414 Enter the personalised greeting number 1 4 STEP A Go gt p CS gt gt D gt oon C Tone LOR Record your greeting Enter1toend Enter 2 To assign Caller ID Numbers to message recording to accept the personalised greeting go to STEP B in To assign gt gt Caller ID numbers for the first time To change a personalised greeting PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt 4 1 4 gt personalised greeting no Enter 414 Enter the personalised greeting number 1 4 CD Change the gr
221. g e Play back voice messages e Save voice message data to your PC e Delete voice messages User Manual 191 1 8 6 Other Features 192 p e For configuring an IMAP account consult your System Administrator UM IMAP Session Controller for Microsoft Outlook If you will be accessing Unified Messaging data through an IMAP connection you must install the IMAP Session Controller software This software is a plug in for Microsoft Windows When installed it appears in the notification area The software changes the selected account in the Outlook user interface from the Unified Messaging IMAP account to the default Outlook inbox after a specified time period Doing so enables multiple users efficiently interact with the PBX through Microsoft Outlook To download IMAP Session Controller You can download the IMAP Session Controller software from Web Maintenance Console 1 Log in to Web Maintenance Console 2 On the Edit User screen click the Unified Message tab 3 Click Download for Unified Messaging Plug in to access the download site for the IMAP Session Controller software o For details about Web Maintenance Console refer to 3 2 System Programming Using Web Maintenance Console To install IMAP Session Controller Double click UmicSetup exe and then follow the on screen guidance to install the software To uninstall IMAP Session Controller Uninstall this software using the programme uninstall feature in the Control
222. g gt gt D Tone Enter Dial extension number Talk to the Enter new party hg Talk with multiple parties Talking to Two Parties Alternately Call Splitting Cellular Phone During a conversation CF mmm gt g D D Tone Enter Dial extensi Enter nter ial extension number Talk to the nter other party Ge gt C Tone Enter 3 gt 4 Talk to the original party The other party will be on hold User Manual 263 1 15 1 Cellular Phone Features Paging and then Transferring a Call Cellular Phone During a conversation S CEGA gt Painggrour D Tone Enter Enter 33 Dial paging group number 2 digits The party is placed on hold ED gt hk gt T Talk On hook The held party and the paged extension are connected and start a conversation 264 User Manual 4 gt gt Announce Section 2 Manager Operation This section shows the manager how to control the other extensions or the PBX User Manual 265 2 1 1 Extension Control 2 1 Control Features 2 1 1 Extension Control The manager extension can control the settings of other extensions gt Changing the Settings of Other Extensions Changing the Settings of Other Extensions To lock unlock other extensions Remote Extension Dial Lock This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control PT SLT PS SIP Extn 29 Unlock S gt aa
223. g in PT SLT PS SIP Extn oC Enter Message Manager s SS gt Sm gt Message Manager password gt wees g g Transfer Off hook Enter Message Manager password and UM group s floating extension no Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail Transfer or enter UM group s floating extension number o e This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox A User Manual 289 2 2 2 Message Manager Features Remote automatic log in From Outside Telephone Call the Unified Messaging system from the preprogrammed Enter Message Manager s outside telephone number gt Message Manager password L gt Mailbox 2 assigned as a Caller ID number Enter Message Manager password and o CAUTION e Itis strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access e To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX keep the password secret If it becomes known to others the PBX may be misused e Change the password periodically Notice e When disabling the password requirement ensure that an unauthorised third party is not allowed access to your extension Managing the General Delivery Mailbox One of the Message Manager s functions is to check the General Delivery Mailbox for messages and transfer them to the appropriate mailbox or mailboxes Mailbox Groups may be used This can be done at any time using the telephone To lis
224. group To enter leave Not Ready mode PT SLT PS SIP Extn 4 Not Ready D X gt maa gt g C Tone Ready Enter 735 Enter 1 or 0 User Manual 217 1 10 1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out Wrap up To set cancel Not Ready mode or to leave Wrap up mode To enter Ready mode PT PS KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 While on hook Wrap up Press red or flashing red Wrap up ae e The status will be as follows Ready Not Ready Not Ready gt Ready Wrap up gt Not Ready The Log in Log out of a specified group button light shows the current status as follows Off Log in mode Red on Log out mode e The Wrap up button alternates the setting of Wrap up mode Not Ready mode or Ready mode The Wrap up button light shows the current status as follows Off Ready mode Red on Not Ready mode Flashing red Wrap up mode e In Wrap up mode Not Ready mode your extension does not receive calls through any group even if it belongs to multiple groups e The last remaining logged in extension may not be allowed to log out depending on system programming e The Supervisor extension can control the Log in Log out status of other extensions For more information refer to 1 10 2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Cr
225. gt Enter the outside line access number Dial the outside telephone number needed for making outside calls including area code if needed To store an extension number simply enter the extension number then skip the next step 2 Enter 2 to accept On hook 180 User Manual 1 8 6 Other Features S If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode to insert a pause or special command in the middle of the telephone number pause momentarily while entering the fF telephone number You will hear a list of available options for example To add more digits press 4 To insert a pause press 5 e Ifyou are using a PRI line you may need to enter at the end of outside telephone numbers Consult your System Administrator for more information Personal Caller Name Announcement By storing caller telephone numbers and recording caller names you can have the Unified Messaging system announce the caller name to you when e You play back a message from one of the assigned callers e The system transfers a call to you from one of the assigned callers e The system pages you to inform you that you have a call from one of the assigned callers This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt 4305001 gt gt Enter 451 STEPA J caller ID no J gt
226. h 9 When is used for an entry code no one can join a conversation that is already in progress must be used by itself i e you may not combine it with numeric digits For details refer to Join After Time Out e Aconversation can be established with a maximum of 8 parties including the caller e Ifthe Hands free Answerback feature is enabled the called extension can answer the conference group call without going off hook KX UT series SIP phones do not support the Hands free Answerback feature for a conference group call e With PTs and KX WT125 Canada only KX TCA175 KX TCA275 KX T CA185 KX TCA285 KX TCA385 PSs a conference group call can be automatically answered without going off hook This mode is selected through system programming e Ifusing an SLT or SIP phone the caller can only originate a conference group call and cannot control the called parties call status manually For a caller To end a conversation with a specific party During a conversation To end a conversation with a specific party DSS Press DSS To end a conversation with the party who joined the conversation last TRANSFER Press TRANSFER To disconnect the party who joined the conversation last from the conference group call R FLASH RECALL Press FLASH RECALL a e In this case the FLASH RECALL button must be set to Flash Recall mode through system programming Broadcast Mode If this mode
227. h calls button including FWD DND button fixed button or the Group FWD Both calls button will not change the FWD or DND mode for intercom calls and outside calls separately Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit FWD DND Both calls Outside calls Intercom calls buttons or Group FWD Both calls Outside calls Intercom calls buttons Remote FWD Settings Using Group FWD Button Using a proprietary telephone PT you can easily switch the FWD status of another phone First the extension that will allow remote forwarding operation must specify an ox extension to perform remote forwarding Then the extension to perform remote forwarding can assign a Group FWD button for this purpose The forwarding status of the target extension can be checked via the LED of the button This feature allows users to forward calls to themselves from another extension User Manual 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls To set cancel Remote FWD setting On the other While on hook extension Cc Group FWD target extension changes gt accordingly The forwarding status of the J FWD status Press Group FWD changed remotely Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit Group FWD Both calls Outside calls Intercom calls buttons FWD DND Settings Using Fixed FWD DND Button Using a proprietary telephone PT or KX UT series SIP phone except KX UT670 you can easily switch
228. hanging or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages Personal Greetings for Caller ID Changing Your Password Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber Owner Name Common Service Commands and Navigation Commands l O e e e eee Logging in to Your Mailbox for the First Time The first time you log in to your mailbox there are certain mailbox settings you should perform before using any other Subscriber Services These settings identify you as the owner of your mailbox and are described in Logging in to Your Mailbox e Password e Subscriber s Name e Personal Greeting Messages Your Unified Messaging system may be programmed to initiate a Subscriber Tutorial the first time you log in to your mailbox If the Subscriber Tutorial is enabled Unified Messaging system prompts will guide you through the mailbox configuration process Logging in to Your Mailbox In order to access Subscriber Services to play messages change mailbox settings etc you must first log in to your mailbox There are 2 ways to log in to your mailbox Manual Log in Manual Log in is necessary when logging in to your mailbox using someone else s extension or when Automatic Log in is not enabled for your mailbox Automatic Log in When logging in to your mailbox from your own extension you do not need to enter any special commands or your mailbox number i e The UM group s default floating extension number depends on system programming For more i
229. he mailbox numbers and mailbox owners names 3 Click Delete 4 Click OK Remote Call Item Description Remote Call Telephone Number 1 2 0 9 Specifies the telephone numbers of destinations to which callers are forwarded when you set Remote Call Forwarding 2 telephone numbers can be specified per mailbox Make sure you begin the telephone number with an outside line access number to seize an outside line Note This feature may be disabled by system programming for your mailbox User Manual 337 3 2 1 User Programming 338 Automatic Login item Description Auto Login Extension When this item is set to Enable you are able to access your mailbox directly without entering the mailbox number You can automatically log in from your extensions by calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as a Caller ID number or by dialling a telephone number assigned to a specified DID number or trunk When logging in from outside telephones the Toll Saver feature is also available Auto Login Extension Password Entry Requirement Specifies if a password is required for the Automatic Login Extension feature Notice If this is set to No ensure that unauthorised third parties are not allowed access to that mailbox Auto Login Caller ID 1 2 Specifies the telephone number from which you can automatically be logged in from When Caller ID information is r
230. he outside call co Wait for an answer S CO gt To prolong press J es the S CO again C Tone Press green Talk The S CO button will flash at all extensions that have Other extension that S CO button eo SD oe es Press the flashing Off hook Talk S CO within 5 seconds A three party conversation is now established x e Only an S CO button can be used for this operation J e You can leave a three party conversation and let the two other parties talk by simply going on hook Adding a Third Party during a Conversation Using the ISDN Service Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN During a conversation A desired 7 D Ta gt GS gt 8 2 h Press ISDN Hold Dial desired phone Talk to the Press CONF Talk with multiple number new party parties Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number User Manual 93 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation During a conversation a 65o aaa C Tone Press TRANSFER Enter 62 gt GJ EA es Enter 3 Talk with multiple During a conversation desired Ranier gt CS gt 5 gt Dial desired Talk to the Press TRANSFER phone number new party Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number parties tn 2 Ceca gt ee gt FS gt FFA C Tone Press Recall Enter 62 hookswitch d C3 NA A Enter 3 Talk with multiple parties 94 User Manual Dial desired Talk to the Press R
231. he previous question then repeat this step P P 4 Select a specific question Enter 922 Enter the question number and then repeat this step Enter the desired option To continue gt gt answer length gt Enter the answer length 1 60 in seconds To delete questions PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt C9 2 3 gt gt Enter 923 Delete the current question 2 Skip to the next question then repeat this step CB Skip to the previous question then repeat this step C4 Select a specific question Enter the question number and then repeat this step Enter the desired option If finished go on hook Message Reception Mode If you have an interview mailbox in addition to your regular mailbox Message Reception Mode determines which mailbox is used when e Calls are directed to your mailbox by the Leaving a Message setting of the Incomplete Call Handling feature refer to Incomplete Call Handling e Your extension is a Logical Extension i e your mailbox receives your calls automatically perhaps because you do not have your own telephone for regular use To set a message mode PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt C5 03 gt 1 Enter 53 Enter 1 to toggle between On hook Interview Mode interview mailbox and Message Recording Mode regular mailbox 178 User Manual 1 8 6 Other Features e Not all subscribers have interview mailboxe
232. hone except KX UT670 users When Hands free Answerback is set the AUTO ANS icon appears on the display PS and KX UT670 users Refer to the documentation for your phone 58 User Manual 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup Answering a Call from Another Telephone Call Pickup gt Denying Other People the Possibility of Picking Up Your Calls Call Pickup Deny Answering a Call from Another Telephone Call Pickup You can answer an incoming call that is ringing at another extension or group from your phone without leaving your desk The following types of pickup are available Group Call Pickup Picks up a call within your group Directed Call Pickup Picks up a specified extension s call PT SLT PS SIP Extn DSS oR D Do gt BADE cow ohne Md Ga Gacis Direct Off hook Talk Press flashing DSS Enter 40 and then dial group number 2 digits Or enter 41 and then dial extension number Caller Information Display before Call Pickup using DSS button Depending on system programming you can confirm the caller information of a call to another extension using the DSS button before picking up the call Pressing the corresponding DSS button will call the extension receiving the call rather than picking up the call While hearing the busy tone you can check the caller information on the display
233. id unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX we strongly recommend a Keeping the password secret b Selecting a complex random password that cannot be easily guessed c Changing your password regularly 5 Perform the following when sending the PBX for repair or handing it over to a third party a Make a backup of data stored in the System Memory 6 When user information is sent from the PBX to a PC or a USB memory device the confidentiality of that information becomes the responsibility of the customer Before disposing of the PC or the USB memory device ensure that data cannot be retrieved from it by formatting the hard disk and or rendering it physically unusable User Manual 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones What Kind of Telephone Can Be Used You can use the following types of telephone with this PBX e Panasonic IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT e g KX NT300 series KX NT500 series Panasonic Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT e g KX T7600 series KX DT300 series KX DT500 series e Panasonic Analogue Proprietary Telephone APT e g KX T7700 series e Panasonic Portable Station PS e g KX TCA364 KX WT115 e SIP phone e g KX UT series SIP phones Third party SIP phones e Single Line Telephone SLT e g rotary pulse telephone Which features are available depend on the type of telephone being used If you are using a Panasonic REDIAL
234. in the General Delivery Mailbox should be transferred to their intended recipients on a regular basis The Message Manager can add his or her own voice comments when necessary When a message is transferred the original message is not deleted from the General Delivery Mailbox it must be deleted manually 1 Start with step 1 5 in To listen to messages above C5 while listening to the message to transfer 2 Enter the destination mailbox number 3 2 to accept 4 2 torecord a comment e Enter 1 to transfer messages without comment Enter 3_ to add a mailbox number Enter 4 to review the Mailing List 5 1 toend recording C2 to accept D User Manual 291 2 2 2 Message Manager Features 292 Setting Up Message Waiting Notification The Unified Messaging system can notify the Message Manager when unplayed messages are waiting in his or her mailbox by turning on the message waiting lamp and or calling an external device i e telephone The Unified Messaging system can also send notification via e mail if the System Administrator has enabled this feature To set notification by Message Waiting Lamp The system lights the message waiting lamp on the Message Manager s extension when a new message is recorded in the Message Manager s mailbox a e Extensions assigned as operators can be called by dialling 9 0 default However when setting this feature the extension number not 9 0 d
235. ine before entered you hear an alarm tone entering an outside phone number To call with a verification code Verification Code Entry PT SLT PS SIP Extn PIN Personal Identification Number SS gt GGG gt amp gt Eeificaioncoi gt gt Off hook Enter 47 Enter Enter verification code max 4 digits gt verification code PIN Bal Ea 5 D Tone Enter verification code Dial desired PIN max 10 digits phone number If a wrong verification code PIN is Seize an outside line before entered you hear an alarm tone entering an outside phone number User Manual 1 2 8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 2 8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside Direct Inward System Access DISA Calling through DISA Calling through DISA When outside callers access extensions in the PBX a prerecorded message greets the caller and gives information about how to access an extension You do not need the operator s assistance You may be able to access system features or call an outside party with your password depending on the security mode To call an extension From Outside Telephone PIN Personal Identification Number n No Security Mode Trunk Security Mode gt DISA 2 desired a phone no ee extension no DISA message Off hook Dial DISA Dial desired phone number extension number our DISA D atienelan n
236. ing Your Calls Call Forwarding FWD FWD DND Settings Using Fixed FWD DND Button Forwarding Your Calls Using ISDN Service Call Forwarding CF by ISDN Forwarding Your Calls Call Forwarding FWD You can have your incoming calls forwarded to a specified destination All Calls All calls are forwarded Preset extensions may also forward from their own receiving group Busy All calls are forwarded when your extension is busy No Answer All calls are forwarded when you do not answer the call within a specified time period Busy No Answer BSY NA All calls are forwarded when you do not answer within a specified time period or when your extension is busy Follow Me From If you fail to set the above mentioned All Calls to forward before you leave your desk you can set the same feature from the destination extension o Incoming calls can be forwarded up to four times A 104 User Manual 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls i e You can set the UM group s floating extension number as a forward destination You can set the floating extension number of a voice mail group or the SVM feature as a an forward destination e You can set your cellular phone as the forward destination Boss amp Secretary feature The extension which has been set as the destination can call the forwarding extension lt Example gt Call qp Forward ay Forwarding set destination extension To set cancel PT SL
237. ing a conversation F gt The called gt RELEASE party answers Press DSS Press RELEASE The other party is placed on hold and the destination extension is called immediately To end a conversation During a conversation a RELEASE Press RELEASE LE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit an Answer button or a Release button User Manual 63 1 3 6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties Malicious Call Identification MCID 1 3 6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties Malicious Call Identification MCID You can ask your telephone company to trace a malicious calling party during a conversation or after the calling party hangs up You will receive the information on the malicious call later on To request MCID PT SLT PS During a conversation or when hearing a reorder tone after the calling party hangs up TRANSFER C Tone D p gt ma F rN Press TRANSFER or Enter 7 3 Talk or on hook Recall hookswitch o e Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company A 64 User Manual 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer 1 4 During a Conversation 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer Transferring to an Extension in the PBX Transferring to an Outside Party Using the PBX Service Transferring a Call Using the ISDN Service Call Transfer CT by ISDN Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP
238. ing the C1 Yes Keep recording call in the LCS mode Automatic Call Waiting 0 No Off Would you prefer to automatically hear a call waiting tone when you receive 3 CD y o a call while already on the PI phone co No call Off 1 Tone BSS Manual Call Waiting How would you prefer to Voice announcement receive call waiting aD D 2 through the built in speaker notifications for intercom OHCA calls Voice announcement C3 through the handset Whisper OHCA Call Waiting Tone Type TE Tone 1 Selection Which type of call waiting tone 3 2 cn T 2 do you prefer 20 User Manual 311 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 312 Item Programming Selection amp Parameter Input c0 No Off Absent Message Would you like to show a san message no 1 Yes Shows the selected message on the caller s 8 message telephone display ED Yes Shows your personal message Personal Absent Message Creating your personal 4 1 message max 16 characters message o Off 1 Do Not Disturb DND aa C2 desired CIOS ii All Forward all calls max 32 digits Sic ding FWD D for both calls all Forwardin o i a 3 desired Busy Forwarded when Not Disturb DND EREE Ga
239. ion CLIR Allow Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Caller ID assigned on your extension Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Intercom Preferred Line Assignment Incoming The longest ringing line Alternate Receiving Ring Voice Ringing Tone Call Parallelled Telephone Paired SLT will ring Forced Answerback Selection Disable Live Call Screening Mode Set Hands free mode 316 User Manual 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Features Default Setting LCS Mode Set After Answering Stop recording Automatic Call Waiting Off Manual Call Waiting Intercom Calls Off No call No tone Call Waiting Tone Type Selection Tone 1 Absent Message Off Personal Absent Message Cleared Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Intercom Outside Off Calls FWD N A Timer 15 seconds Call Pickup Deny Allow Headset Operation Headset off Executive Busy Override Deny Allow Paging Deny Allow Key Pad Tone Set On Background Music BGM Off Data Line Security Off Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Allow Log in Log out Log in Message Waiting Off Timed Reminder Cleared To change the above features back to their default settings gt gt s es D ys AUTO DIAL AUTO DIAL PAUSE STORE STORE Press ENTER Press ENTER or STORE or STORE Press PROGRAM or PAUSE Enter Press PROGRAM or PA
240. ion Initiation Protocol phones However some PBX features may not be available for SIP phones depending on your telephone type Under power failure conditions the connected telephones may not operate Please ensure that a separate telephone not dependent on local power is available for emergency use Prior to connection of this product please verify that the intended operating environment is supported Satisfactory performance cannot be guaranteed for the following User Manual Feature Highlights interoperability and compatibility with all devices and systems connected to this product proper operation and compatibility with services provided by telecommunications companies over connected networks NOTES Some optional hardware software and features are not available in some countries areas or for some PBX models Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information This manual provides basic information on how you can access commonly used PBX functions with proprietary telephones PTs single line telephones SLTs portable stations PSs SIP phones and DSS Consoles For detailed information about each feature or setting consult your dealer In this manual several kinds of PTs appear as follows IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT Analogue Proprietary Telephone APT Proprietary Telephone with a Display Display PT PT is used as a generic term to
241. ir the power cord or plug If the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre for a replacement When mounting the PBX on a 19 inch rack only use the 19 inch rack mounting equipment attachment bracket screws made for use with the PBX If damage to the unit exposes any internal parts disconnect the power supply cord immediately and return the unit to your dealer Unplug this unit from the AC outlet if it emits smoke an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise These conditions can cause fire or electric shock Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre This unit is equipped with an earthed plug For safety reasons this plug must only be connected to an earthed outlet that has been installed according to applicable regulations Plug the power cord firmly into an AC outlet Otherwise it can cause fire or electric shock User Manual 1 1 1 For Your Safety ZA CAUTION For All Telephone Equipment e The product should be kept free of dust moisture high temperature more than 40 C and vibration and should not be exposed to direct sunlight e Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning Wipe the product with a soft cloth Do not clean with abrasive powders or with chemical agents such as benzine or thinner Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners e When relocating the equipment first disconnect the telecom c
242. is not available for the KX T7665 8 The button may not be available depending on the networking method in use or the settings of the PBX 9 It is possible to set delayed ringing for each SDN button 10 This button is used for the integrated voice mail features 11 The UM group s default floating extension number is 500 To exit at any time lift the handset For KX NT366 KX NT553 KX NT556 KX NT560 users After customising a flexible button you can set the displayed text for Self Labelling To enter characters refer to Entering Characters 12 You can set a Unified Messaging port extension number as an extension number for the DSS button You can select the parameter with the Navigator Key Up or Down instead of entering a number User Manual 321 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons To specify the ringing tones for each CO ICD Group PDN SDN or INTERCOM button DPT IP PT only INT Press INTERCOM PROGRAM Press CO ICD Group PDN SDN or INTERCOM To continue gt tone type no J R T one SDN INT INTERCOM Enter tone type number Press CO ICD Group PDN SDN or INTERCOM 30 01 20 tone 21 30 melody are available KX NT265 KX NT321 KX DT321 KX T7665 Only tone types 01 to 08 are available It is possible to enter a tone type number from 09 to 30 but you will hear tone type 01 Press ENTER or STORE gt gt AUTO DIAL STORE Press PROGRAM
243. is selected through system programming the caller can call multiple parties in a conference group make a voice announcement and then establish a multiple party conversation with the called parties This 134 User Manual 1 7 3 Making a Conference Group Call conversation will be heard by all called parties Called parties can listen to the announcement simply by going off hook They can send a notification tone if they want to join the conversation To make answer a conference group call PT SLT PS SIP Extn Caller SS gt Eaa gt oe e Coo bP Off hook Enter 32 Dial conference Enter entry code toa max 8 digits Wait for an g answer t Enter Announce Any Telephone Called Party The telephone rings Off hook If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call extensions outside telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code Entry codes can consist of the digits 0 through 9 When X is used for an entry code no one can join a conversation that is already in progress X must be used by itself i e you may not combine it with numeric digits For details refer to Join After Time Out With PTs and KX WT125 Canada only KX TCA175 KX TCA275 KX TCA185 KX TCA285 KX TCA385 PSs a conference group call can be automatically answered without going off hook This mode is selected through system programming If the Hands free Answer
244. its before retrying message notification when the called device does not answer User Manual 3 2 1 User Programming Item Description Use Mode Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification You can also specify the use mode from your telephone Not use The selected device is not used for message notification Continuously The device is called whenever a message is recorded in the mailbox If Only Urgent Messages is set to Yes the device is called whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox e Scheduled The selected device is called only during the selected times Time Frame If Scheduled is selected here follow the steps below to specify the time frame 1 Click a day Sunday Saturday tab 2 Click Enable Time Frame No 1 or 2 3 Enter the start and end times in the Start At HH MM and End At HH MM fields 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed and then Click OK Telephone Specifies the length of time the system waits after anew message is received Device Device before sending message waiting notification Notification Timer Device Start Delay Time 0 120 min Telephone Device Device Notification Timer Device Interval Time between Device 1 2 3 and Next Device Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending Message Waiting Notification to Device 1 2 or 3 before sending notification to the next device E mail Text
245. l the display shows the status automatically The following information is displayed lt Queuing Monitor gt e The current date time e The ICD Group extension number name e The number of waiting calls The longest waiting time lt Call Log History gt e The date time when cleared at last time e The total number of received calls e The number of overflowed calls e The number of unanswered calls The average waiting time of queuing calls User Manual 219 1 10 2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor To monitor Displ ay PT ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group ICD G D SS gt maa gt ya C Tone Off hook Enter 739 Enter ICD Group On hook extension number To clear Call Log History Display PT Press LOG Press CLEAR a e The accumulated data is cleared WHEE shows if the number to be displayed exceeds the maximum displayable digits Monitoring and Changing the Log in Log out Status of Extensions The Supervisor extension can monitor the Log in Log out status of the incoming call distribution group members by the DSS button light It can also change their Log in Log out status if needed To monitor Display PT After viewing the status of waiting calls SPRVS cc Press SPRVS 220 User Manual 1 10 2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distributio
246. lbox 1 2 3 9 10 Enter the desired number 11 Dial the telephone number 0 9 max 32 digits 12 C2 to accept 13 Enter the desired number 14 Dial the telephone number 0 9 max 32 digits 15 2 to accept Log in to the Message Manager s mailbox ED C1 to change the password C2 to accept Enter the password then C2 to accept Enter the desired number C1 to change or assign the operator s extension C2 to accept C3 to delete then go to step 9 e Operator 1 s extension number cannot be deleted Dial the extension number C2 to accept Repeat steps 6 8 to assign or to delete the extension number for the Day Night Lunch and Break Modes for each operator C1 to change or assign the telephone number 1 setting C2 to accept the current setting then go to step 13 e Make sure you begin the telephone number with an outside line access number to seize an outside line C1 to change or assign the telephone number 2 setting C2 to accept the current setting Recording Messages The Message Manager is responsible for recording various system messages menus voice labels system prompts and system caller names and is also responsible for maintaining the following Company Greetings Amaximum of 32 company greetings for business non business and lunch break hours as well as holidays can be selected recorded or deleted as
247. lbox gt gt Caa gt distribution list no gt gt gt Enter 44 Enter the desired personal group Enter 3 to delete distribution list number 1 4 a group member Delete all members then go on hook to finish 4 Delete the announced member as gt 2 Keep the member and 2 Delete one member announce the next member On hook Enter 1 or 2 Enter 1 or 2 Repeat this step to delete other members 162 User Manual 1 8 4 Sending Messages To change personal group distribution list names PT SLT PS SIP Extn z desired personal grou Leg in to your melles gt Caa gt distribution ieina gt 1 gt gt Enter 44 Enter the desired personal group Enter 1 to change distribution list number 1 4 the list name Change record the list name D 7 gt gt CG Delete Te list name 4 h gt 1 gt 2 gt F ini C Tone then go onhoak to finish State the list name Enter 1 Enter 2 On hook Enter 1 or 3 to end recording to accept distribution lists except they can be used by other subscribers For more information consult i e The System Administrator can create Mailbox Groups which are similar to personal group EE your System Administrator External Message Delivery You can send messages to outside parties and to extension users who do not have their own mailboxes After you record your message the system will dial the appropriate telephone numbers and or extension numbers an
248. lephone Type Telephone Type SIP phone Features PT PS SLT Non KXUT GUT series i series Cleaned up v 1 12 2 Recording Information Using Preprogrammed Messages Printing Message 1 13 1 Walking Extension v v 1 13 2 Enhanced Walking Extension v v 1 14 1 Using the Call Log y v 1 14 2 Using the Directories v 1 14 3 Accessing System Features System Feature so r Access 1 14 4 Self Labelling KX NT366 KX NT553 yn yi KX NT556 KX NT560 KX UT 248 KX UT670 only 2 1 1 Extension Control 2 1 2 Time Service Mode Control 2 1 3 Restriction Level Control Dial Tone Transfer 2 1 4 Turning on the External Background Music 7 V s Vv BGM 2 1 5 Recording Outgoing Messages OGM v 2 1 6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable s Outside Line Trunk Busy Out 2 1 7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Monitor 2 2 Configuring Unified Messaging Features v v v vy v 3 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension Extension PIN Personal Identification v v v 4 y Number 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons v 4 1 Manager Programming Changing Call Charges and Extension Control Only available for the KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 and KX UT670 2 Available telephones are as follows 368 User Manual 5 1 1
249. ll Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA During a conversation you can be informed of a call waiting with a tone or voice announcement through your built in speaker or handset Default Disable No call Intercom calls No tone Outside calls Call Waiting Tone a waiting tone through the built in speaker of PT nandset of SLT To change the tone from PT refer to 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode OHCA a voice announcement through the built in speaker Whisper OHCA a voice announcement through the handset To set cancel for intercom calls Manual Call Waiting PT SLT PS SIP Extn C0 No call a Ses J Dy gt DIAA Eua P amp Off hook Enter 731 Whisper OHCA On hook Enter 0 to 3 as you desire To set cancel for outside calls Automatic Call Waiting PT SLT PS SIP Extn C0 No tone X gt Waa gt 1 Tone Off hook Enter 732 On hook Enter 0 or 1 e OHCA is only available with certain digital proprietary telephones e Whisper OHCA is only available with certain digital proprietary telephones and IP proprietary telephones In addition both you and the other party must use supported telephones User Manual 203 1 9 4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller s Telephone Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 9 4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller s Telephone Calling Connected Line Identificatio
250. ll be assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes To change a password for a mailbox 1 Click Edit 2 In the window that appears enter the new password 4 16 characters in length and then enter it again to confirm it 3 Click OK Mailbox Password Message Client Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client software program If a default password is programmed by an administrator that password will be assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes To change a password for a mailbox 1 Click Edit 2 In the window that appears enter the new password 4 16 characters in length and then enter it again to confirm it 3 Click OK Covering Extension Enter a desired extension number you want to assign for transferring to your Covering Extension in the box 1 8 digits Interview Mailbox Enter an interview mailbox number you want to assign for your mailbox in the box 2 8 digits the maximum number of digits may be less than 8 depending on system programming All Calls Transfer to Mailbox Select Yes or No If Yes is selected calls are automatically forwarded to your mailbox Call Transfer Sequence Selection Call Transfer Sequence Other Specifies the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox Allows each mailbox to be assigned its own Call Transfer Sequence Personal Transfer Sequence 1 Select System or Other 2 f Other is specified
251. lls can be recorded Intercom internal calls Outside external calls Incoming ICD group calls only i e when recording outside calls limit recording to incoming ICD group calls only e This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two way Recording 5 supervisors e Forwarded calls and calls retrieved from being on hold will also be automatically recorded However conference calls will not be recorded e Recording will automatically stop when the mailbox reaches its capacity Delete older messages in order to use this feature again e Ifthe enabled extension has a Two way Record button assigned to it the button will flash during recording However that button cannot be used to cancel this feature e An extension whose conversation is being recorded cannot be the target of the following features Executive Busy Override Call Monitor Whisper OHCA Note You should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded User Manual 345 3 2 1 User Programming 346 Editing Recording Settings On this screen a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two way Recording settings for extensions they are supervising Information for each extension including the extension s supervisor UM Group number and Automatic Two way Recording destination mailbox is displayed You can specify which types of calls will recorded for each extension 1 2 3 4 On the left side
252. lls to outside destinations follow this procedure to test the outside lines 1 Disconnect the PBX from all outside lines 2 Connect known working single line telephones SLTs to those outside lines 3 Make a call to an external destination using those SLTs If a call cannot be carried out correctly there may be a problem with the outside line that the SLT is connected to Contact your telephone company If all SLTs operate properly there may be a problem with your PBX Do not reconnect the PBX to the outside lines until it has been serviced by an authorised Panasonic Factory Service Centre For All Telephone Equipment Never attempt to insert wires pins etc into the vents or holes of the product User Manual 1 1 2 Important Safety Instructions 1 1 2 Important Safety Instructions When using your telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following Do not use the product near water for example near a bathtub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Avoid using wired telephones during an electrical storm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak Rack Mount Instructions The following or similar rack mount instructions are included with the installation instructions Elevated Oper
253. lope 7 Rewind During playback only 8 Pause Restart During playback only 8 4 Volume Up During playback only 9 Fast Forward During playback only 0 Help 1 9 1 Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder 1 9 Setting the Telephone According to Your Needs 1 9 1 Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder You can receive an alarm at your telephone to remind you of a meeting appointment or as a wake up call The alarm can occur either once or daily every day until cancelled at a preset time When you go off hook to answer you will hear a special dial tone or prerecorded message To set PT SLT SIP Extn 12H p S amp S gt GagaGaGa gt ca gt gt 24H Off hook Enter 760 Enter 1 Enter hour 01 12 and minute 00 59 and then 0 for AM or 1 for PM Or enter hour 00 23 and minute 00 59 C0 Once C1 Daily Enter 0 for once On hook or 1 for daily gt gt an Enter the time in the format assigned to your PBX 12 hour or 24 hour To cancel PT SLT SIP Extn X gt Gaga gt oP C Tone Off hook Enter 760 Enter 0 On hook To stop or answer the ringback PT SLT SIP Extn INT INTERCOM Press INTERCOM or off hook User Manual 197 1 9 1 Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder To confirm T TRANSFER Press TRANSFER several times a e You can also confirm the Timed Reminder by using the soft button J e The alarm keeps ringing for preprogram
254. ls including area code if needed To specify an extension instead of an outside telephone number enter the extension number then skip the next step gt pS gt C Tone Enter 2 Enter a 4 digit password State the recipient s name to accept required for listening to the message Press if you do not want to set a password gt gt 1 gt C gt Go to To record your message Enter 1 Enter for immediate delivery to end recording To set message delivery time go to To set message delivery time gt gt Continued on next page j e Ifyou are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode to insert a pause or special command in the middle of the telephone number pause momentarily while entering the telephone number You will hear a list of available options for example To add more digits press 4 To insert a pause press 5 164 User Manual 1 8 4 Sending Messages PT SLT PS SIP Extn Continued from previous page gt p To specify multiple recipients external message delivery list gt gt 2 gt desired list no gt 4 digit password gt gt Enter 2 Enter the desired list number 1 or 2 Enter a 4 digit password required for listening to the message Press if you do not want to set a password E3 fore To record your message Enter for immediate delivery To set message delivery time go to To set message delivery time To set message delivery time C
255. me On hook seconds 2 digits User Manual 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls To set cancel Call Forwarding FWD for your Incoming Call Distribution Group PT SLT PS SIP Extn ICD Group Incoming Call Distribution Group 49 Both Calls CD Set Outside Calls ICD Grou D GGG gt Bw D cea ansinto gt 2 Cancel 69 Intercom Calls Off hook Enter 71 Enter 4 to 6 as Enter 1 to set Enter ICD Group you desire or 0 to cancel extension number For Cancel go on hook directly after entering ICD Group extension number extension no lt p Sas gt gt outside line gt outside gt c A g hone no rong access no pho max 32 digits Enter destination extension number Enter On hook Or enter outside line access number and then outside phone number aN For KX UT series SIP phones except KX UT670 when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled FWD DND appears on the display in stand by mode For KX UT670 when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled a status icon appears on the display For details refer to the documentation for your phone The FWD DND button light shows the current status as follows Off Both features are not set Red on FWD mode Flashing red slowly DND mode For KX UT series SIP phones you can see the current status on the display The Group FWD button light shows the current status as follows Off No set Red on FWD mode User Manual 107 1
256. med seconds e Ifyou receive an incoming call during ringback the ringing starts after the ringback stops Ifyou are having a conversation exceeding alarm ringing period the ringback will start after your conversation 198 User Manual 1 9 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND 1 9 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND Do Not Disturb DND Switching FWD DND Status Using Fixed FWD DND Button Do Not Disturb DND You can set this feature to prevent incoming calls from ringing at your extension This can be useful for example when you are in a meeting or busy To set cancel PT SLT PS SIP Extn 09 Both Calls 1 J set SS gt GCG gt Bowman p Cancel C25 Intercom Calls Lo Off hook o Enter 71 Enter 0 to 2 as you desire Enter 1 to set On hook or 0 to cancel When using a proprietary telephone you can set or cancel Do Not Disturb by pressing the FWD DND button fixed button instead of X710 When using a KX UT series SIP phone except KX UT670 you can also press the FWD DND button and then press up or down with the Navigator Key to set or cancel Do Not Disturb for all calls For KX UT670 there is no physical FWD DND button on the phone For details refer to the documentation for your phone For KX UT series SIP phones except KX UT670 when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled FWD DND appears on the display in stand by mode For KX
257. message box so that callers can leave voice messages when you cannot answer the phone To set cancel PT SLT PS 09 Both Calls Cancel All Calls N gt CILA gt G Outside Calls gt Bley No Answer E Intercom Calls Busy No Answer Off hook Enter 71 Enter 0 to 2 as you desire Enter required number For Cancel go on hook directly after entering 0 floating extension no D GSO as for the SVM feature gt Ce y Enter the floating extension Enter On hook number for the SVM feature e The default floating extension number 591 for the SVM feature depends on system programming For more information consult your System Administrator or System Manager aa User Manual 123 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Leaving Voice Messages If the extension user you called is not able to answer your call and your call is redirected to the message box you will hear the greeting message Then you can leave a voice message for that extension It is also possible to leave a voice message directly in the message box of a desired extension by following the steps below To leave a voice message directly to another extension s message box PT SLT PS A GaGa gt gt Gem gt Off hook Enter 38 Enter 6 Dial extension number gt gt You hear the 2 4 gt greeting message C Tone Record On hook or press any message dial key 0 9 a e Voice messag
258. minder can also be set from the room extension For information about setting Timed Reminder refer to 1 9 1 Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder The most recent setting will be valid no matter which extension made the setting When a Timed Reminder starts and when it is answered or not answered detailed Timed Reminder information is recorded automatically This requires system programming lt Example gt 02 02 00 02 45PM 1234 Timed Reminder Start 02 02 00 02 47PM 1234 Timed Reminder Answer Users of PTs without displays can confirm only whether a Timed Reminder has been set or not by following the steps shown above If set a confirmation tone will be heard Cleaned up The hotel operator can change the room status of extensions depending on whether the room has been cleaned or not by using the Cleaned up button assigned on his her extension This allows the hotel operator to confirm that the room is clean and ready for the next guest 240 To change the cleaning status of a room Display PT While on hook Cleaned up Press User Manual extension no gt eg DSS Cleaned up Dial extension number and then press Press EXIT Cleaned up ENTER or press desired DSS or Cleaned up 1 12 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features EE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Cleaned up button User Manual 241 1 12 2 Recording
259. mmediately after confirmation tone To change the method PT SLT PS After dialling C Tone e GA Enter Talk N e Voice calling from a SIP extension is not available e Ifthe called party uses a SIP extension single line telephone SLT or portable station PS FH Voice calling is not available e This feature is not available when the called party s telephone is in the Voice Call Deny mode Customising Your Phone e 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Alternate Receiving Ring Voice Select the alerting method either ring or the other party s voice User Manual 51 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension Remote COS Access Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension Remote COS Access 52 You can use your calling privileges Class of Service at another extension You may override restrictions which have been set To use this feature an original extension number and an extension PIN Personal Identification Number are required You can make a call by entering a verification code and verification code PIN To call Walking COS PT SLT PS PIN Personal Identification Number your D desired ay gt aama gt sion oe D Tone Off hook Enter 47 Dial your Enter extension PIN Dial desired extension number max 10 digits phone number If a wrong extension PIN is Seize an outside l
260. mming 348 User Manual Section 4 Customising Extensions and the System for Managers This section shows managers how to customise the PBX s extension and system settings according to their needs Find the desired setting and program as necessary User Manual 349 4 1 1 Programming Information 4 1 Manager Programming 4 1 1 Programming Information 350 The manager can programme the following items Call Charges e Other Extensions Control Available Extension The extension assigned as a manager Required Telephone A Panasonic Proprietary Telephone with display 2 lines or more e g KX NT343 KX NT546 KX DT346 KX DT546 KX T7636 Manager Password To enter programming mode the manager password max 10 digits is required Default 1234 CAUTION e The PBX has a default password preset For security change the password the first time that you programme the PBX e It is strongly recommended that a password of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in the password refer to Entering Characters e To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX keep the password secret If it becomes known to others the PBX may be misused e Change the password periodically Conditions The programming extension must be idle on hook and holding no calls User Manual 4 1 2 Manager Programming 4 1 2 Manager P
261. mote Setting 1 2 9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA Remote Setting You can set the following features on your telephone from another extension or through DISA Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND e Changing the Log in Log out Status of Extensions e Absent Message e Extension Dial Lock Time Service Changing the Time Mode Day Night Lunch Break From another extension PT SLT PS PIN Personal Identification Number your D desired D EA sakine gt ersen o D Tone Off hook Enter 47 Dial your Enter extension PIN Dial desired extension number max 10 digits feature number If a wrong extension PIN is entered you hear an alarm tone Through DISA From Outside Telephone PIN Personal Identification Number DISA 2 our gt aot A gt p DISA message Off hook Dial DISA Enter 47 Dial your phone number extension number m gt gt extension PIN ee feature no D Tone Enter extension PIN Dial desired max 10 digits feature number If a wrong extension PIN is entered you hear an alarm tone 56 User Manual 1 3 1 Answering Calls 1 3 Receiving Calls 1 3 1 Answering Calls PT SLT PS SIP Extn D gt Ged Off hook Talk Select one of the following methods Lift the handset to receive the preferred line Default Ringing line is selected Press the SP PHONE button Press the flashing CO INTERCOM ICD Group PDN SDN
262. mpt number you want to change refer to List of Prompts for VM and AA Service c The system plays the prompt number and its prompt If a prompt has not yet been recorded the system plays the system prompt If a prompt is turned off The prompt is now turned off will play before the prompt d 1 torecord e 1 to end recording f 2 to accept g Repeat steps 5b to 5f to record other prompts 6 To change all prompts one after another a 2 b Enter the prompt number you want to change c 1 to change d 1 to end recording e 2 to accept f The system plays the next prompt number g Repeat steps 6c to 6f to record other prompts e Itis possible to restore the original system prompts Consult your System Administrator about this feature aa To record system caller names Before recording System Caller Names the associated telephone numbers must first be programmed using Web Maintenance Console For more information consult your System Administrator User Manual 297 2 2 2 Message Manager Features a et E Log in to the Message Manager s mailbox 4 to modify system caller names Enter the Caller ID List Number 1 200 e Guidance is Caller Name Announcement number Enter to go to step 3 C1 to change the name e faname has not yet been recorded for this Caller ID number go to step 6 e Enter 2 toaccept or 3 to erase the current name then go to step 4 C1
263. n s first name 220 Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person s first or last name 1019 To make this message urgent press 1 AA Prompts Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 592 Please enter your party s extension 1224 You have a call 690 Sorry no one is available to answer the call 302 User Manual 2 2 2 Message Manager Features Prompt No Modifiable Prompts 1006 To leave a message press 1 971 To enter another extension press 698 Sorry this line is busy 388 If you would like to hold press 1 847 To cancel holding press 2 now Otherwise lII try your party again User Manual 303 2 2 2 Message Manager Features 304 User Manual Section 3 Customising Your Phone amp System This section shows you how to customise your individual telephone or PBX according to your needs Find the desired setting and program as necessary User Manual 305 3 1 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming 3 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming 3 1 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming You can customise your telephone features For example you can change the initial settings or button features according to your needs gt Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension Extension PIN Personal Identification Number i e If you change your desk and extension refer to 1 13 1 Walking Extension EE Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension
264. n Presentation CLIP COLP CLIP When making an outside call you can present your preprogrammed telephone number to the called party COLP When receiving an outside call you can present your preprogrammed telephone number to the calling party You can select the telephone number sent either the number of the line used or the number assigned to your extension If you select Public the calling called party sees the number of the line used subscriber s number If you select Your extension they see the telephone number assigned on your extension To show either the number assigned to the outside line or your extension PT SLT PS SIP Extn C1 Pubic D S gt EmA gt 4 C2 Your extension C Tone y Off hook Enter 7 2 Enter 1 for public or 2 On hook for your extension N e Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company e When you forward a call to an outside party the CLIP number for that call will be that of the calling party or of the forwarding extension depending on system programming e Ifyou use the ICD Group button to make a call to the other party the telephone number assigned to the ICD Group will be used 204 User Manual 1 9 5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller s Telephone Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR 1 9 5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller s Telephone Connected Line Iden
265. n Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor To change the Log in Log out mode Display PT Press desired DSS The DSS button light shows the current status as follows Off The extension is not in the group Green on Log in Ready mode Flashing green Log in Not Ready mode Red on Log out mode User Manual 221 1 10 3 Forwarding a Waiting Call Manual Queue Redirection 1 10 3 Forwarding a Waiting Call Manual Queue Redirection arriving calls are put in a waiting queue Extensions can check the status of the queue with the Hurry up button light and forward the longest waiting call in the queue to a preset destination manually This feature is also known as Hurry up Transfer When your incoming call distribution group is busy and other outside calls arrive the Gp To forward the waiting call Hurry up Press red or flashing red Hurry up o The Hurry up button light shows the current status as follows em Off No waiting call Red on Some calls are waiting Flashing red The number of calls exceeds the manual queue redirection level im Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Hurry up button 222 User Manual 1 11 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected 1 11 Using User supplied Equipment 1 11 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected You can talk to a person at the door through the doorphone Preprogrammed extensions or an outside party
266. ne no which is held 3 digits Specified with a holding extension 51 extension no which has a held call number Holding in a System Parking Zone x52 Call Park Toset parking zone no 2 digits To retrieve stored parking zone no 2 digits 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting Answering Call Waiting in the PBX 50 User Manual 5 3 1 Feature Number Table Feature While dial tone is heard Ga Additional digits buttons Answering Call Waiting from the X60 Telephone Company 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation Adding a Third Party during a phone no TRANSFER button 3 Conversation Using the ISDN Service x62 Three party Conference BPTY by ISDN 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls Forwarding Your Calls Call Forwarding FWD 1 9 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND 0 Cancel _ 1 Do Not Disturb DND pourcels arty 2 All calls phone no _ 3 Busy phone no Outside Calle wet 4 No Answer phone no 5 Busy No Answer phone no Intercom Calls me 7 Follow Me your extension no 8 Follow Me Cancel your extension no To set the timer for No Answer 713 00 99 second and Busy No Answer To set cancel Call Forwarding FWD for your Incoming Call Distribution Group Both Calls X714 i 1 Set ICD Group extension no Outside Calls X715 phone no Intercom Calls 716 0 C
267. necessary Company Name Custom Service Menus A maximum of 200 custom service menus can be recorded These menus guide callers to the services they require without the need for a human operator Voice Labels A maximum of 20 Mailbox Groups can be created by the System Administrator Each list can have a voice label System Prompts The Message Manager can change system prompts by recording new prompts and restoring them User Manual 295 2 2 2 Message Manager Features 296 Multilingual Selection Menu With this menu callers can select the language they prefer for voice guidance For example the Message Manager can record a menu that announces For English press 7 For French press 8 The System Caller Names A maximum of 200 Caller ID numbers can be registered by the System Administrator The Message Manager is responsible for recording a name for each Caller ID number On Hold Announcement Menu With this menu callers in a queue can listen to the announcement or music while they are on hold a e Ifthe Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console the Message Manager cannot record any messages The system will announce Sorry this function is not available To record menus and voice labels 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 1 8 Log in to the Message Manager s mailbox 4 to record messages Enter the desired number to record for Company Greetings fo
268. nformation consult your System Administrator or System Manager aa x e Mailbox Capacity Warning When your mailbox is almost full you will receive a Mailbox Capacity Warning shortly after logging in to your mailbox When you hear a Mailbox Capacity Warning you should delete unnecessary messages to make more recording time in your mailbox available The amount of recording time that remains when you hear the Mailbox Capacity Warning depends on how your mailbox is configured This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox For more information consult your System Administrator or System Manager e For KX UT series SIP phone users When using the MESSAGE button please press the MESSAGE button before going off hook User Manual 141 1 8 2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox Manual log in PT SLT PS SIP Extn p MESSAGE c gt CHIE gt Voice Mail Transfer Enter 6 UM group s floating extension no Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail Transfer or enter UM group s floating extension number gt gt gt CED gt Etter your mailbox Enter and your mailbox number Enter your password and You can skip this step if your mailbox requires no password Automatic log in PT SLT PS SIP Extn SS gt Voice Mail gt C _ gt Enter your mailbox Transfer Off hook Enter your password and UM group s floating extension no Y
269. nnot disconnect one party and maintain the conversation with the other parties Non KX UT series SIP phone users cannot originate a conference call but can be added as a member When a KX UT series SIP phone user originates a conference call and one of the other parties leaves the conference the KX UT series SIP phone user will still be able to talk to the remaining party but will not be able to hold the call Customising Your Phone 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Conference button User Manual 89 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation Leaving a Conference Unattended Conference The person who originated a conference can leave the conference and allow the other parties to continue the conversation oP pe e KX UT series SIP phone users If you originated a conference you cannot leave the gt conference and allow the other parties to continue the conversation When you go on hook the conference is terminated and the other parties are disconnected To leave a conference During 3 to 7 party conference y Press CONF On hook To return while others are talking a a a wr LOR ICD Group PDN ORJ SDM GEP NTERCOM Press flashing green CO ICD Group PDN SDN or INTERCOM To complete a conversation During a conversation T On hook a e Time limit Both parties will hear an alarm tone before a specified timeout The originating extension user will hear an alarm tone b
270. nt R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting http www ptc panasonic eu Contact to Authorised Representative Panasonic Testing Centre Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Winsbergring 15 22525 Hamburg Germany User Manual 21 1 1 4 Data Security 1 1 4 Data Security 22 In order to use the PBX safely and correctly the Security Requirements below must be observed Failure to do so may result in e Loss leakage falsification or theft of user information e Illegal use of the PBX by a third party e Interference or suspension of service caused by a third party What is User Information User Information is defined as 1 Information stored in the System Memory System data error data and activation key files 2 Information sent from the PBX to a PC or a USB memory device System data sound files for MOH Music on Hold and OGM Outgoing Messages and activation key files Requirements 1 The System Memory contains software for all the processes of the PBX and all the customer data Therefore do not allow unauthorised access to prevent data leakage 2 Always make backups of data stored in the System Memory and or perform regular system data backups to a USB memory device or a NAS For details consult your dealer 3 To prevent illegal access from the Internet activate a Firewall 4 To avo
271. nt status as follows Off Day mode Green on Lunch mode Flashing green Break mode Red on Night mode Flashing red Holiday mode The Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual button light shows the current status as follows Off Automatic Red on Manual User Manual 267 2 1 2 Time Service Mode Control EE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Time Service Day Night Lunch Break button or a Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual button 268 User Manual 2 1 3 Restriction Level Control Dial Tone Transfer 2 1 3 Restriction Level Control Dial Tone Transfer The manager extension can change the restriction level permitting an extension to make a call During a conversation with an extension 2 AS Toll Restriction Call Barring C Tone y Press Toll Restriction On hook Call Barring The extension can hear the dial tone and then make a call e The restriction level is changed to the preprogrammed level of Toll Restriction Call Barring button e The restriction level of SIP phones cannot be changed IE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Toll Restriction Call Barring button EP User Manual 269 2 1 4 Turning on the External Background Music BGM 2 1 4 Turning on the External Background Music BGM The manager extension can select and broadcast background music in the office through external spe
272. number of total messages the number of new messages or the length of new messages These announcements depend on the mailbox settings and Class of Service COS settings of your mailbox Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button Subscriber Tutorial Easy Mailbox Configuration Your Unified Messaging system may be programmed to present a Subscriber Tutorial to you the first time you log in to your mailbox If the Subscriber Tutorial is enabled Unified Messaging system prompts will guide you through the mailbox configuration process Simply by following the prompts you can configure the following items You can configure these items later manually if necessary as explained later in this section This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox a You may be asked to enter your password after logging in to your mailbox If you do not know this password ask your System Administrator e The subscriber tutorial may be simplified or not available depending on your COS settings Password If your mailbox has a password you must enter it using the dial keys 0 9 whenever you log in to your mailbox Your password can contain up to 16 digits Subscriber s Name This is a recording of your name Other subscribers will hear your name when they listen to messages you left for them It may also be heard by calle
273. o NN gt phone no af CLL gt a b 1one n All Security Mode DISA message coae Off hook Dial DISA Enter 47 Dial your extension number phone number or enter and then verification code extension PIN desired gt gt verification code PIN Enter extension PIN or Dial desired verification code PIN max 10 digits extension number User Manual 53 1 2 8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside Direct Inward System Access DISA To call an outside party From Outside Telephone PIN Personal Identification Number n No Security Mode gt DISA 2 outside N phone no R B Tone amp phone no DISA message Off hook Dial DISA Dial outside phone phone number number Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number n Trunk Security Mode All Security Mode your D DISA lt AA gt R B Tone amp CALLA gt gt gt DISA message verification code Off hook Dial DISA Enter 47 Dial your extension number phone number or enter and then verification code extension PIN D outside gt J TFT C Tone amp verification code PIN D Tone Enter extension PIN or Dial outside phone verification code PIN number max 10 digits Seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number e e Callers from preprogrammed outside numbers can access the PBX through DISA without a password extension PIN verification code PIN DISA Aut
274. oderately A call is on hold temporarily or on Exclusive Call Hold A call answered with the SDN button is on hold temporarily or on Exclusive Call Hold Flashing green rapidly The PDN extension is receiving an incoming call An SDN extension is receiving a Hold Recall or callback ringing from a call answered with the SDN button Red on A corresponding SDN extension is using the The corresponding PDN extension or line another corresponding SDN extension is using the line Flashing red A corresponding SDN extension is holding a Another corresponding SDN extension slowly call or the PDN extension itself is holding a call User Manual 1 5 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Light Pattern PDN Button Status SDN Button Status Flashing red The PDN extension is receiving an incoming The corresponding PDN extension is rapidly call to an incoming call distribution ICD receiving an incoming call group SDN Direct Dial Using an SDN button you can easily call the corresponding PDN extension SDN buttons are in one of two modes depending on system programming and the operation procedure differs as follows Enhanced DSS Key Mode TN d CS Off hook Press corresponding Talk SDN Ca g SDN i 4 D Tone Off hook Press corresponding Press the SDN again Talk SDN ae e When performing SDN Direct Dial to call the corres
275. of the screen click Users Automatic Two way Recording Edit a Recording For an extension click the setting for Internal call External Call or ICDG Incoming Only e Internal call Extension to extension calls are recorded e External Call Calls with outside parties are recorded e ICDG Incoming Only Only calls that are received by the extension through an incoming call distribution group are recorded Note To set ICDG Incoming Only to On External Call must first be set to On Select On or Off for that setting Click OK when finished Viewing and Playing Messages Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two way Recording feature een S On the left side of the screen click Users Automatic Two way Recording Record List Select a UM group number from the Select a Destination UM Group No drop down list Click List View to display a list of the Automatic Two way Recording mailboxes of the selected UM group Select one or more mailboxes and click OK Messages recorded in the selected mailbox es will be displayed You can filter the list of messages displayed or play a message To filter the list of messages Specify any number of the following conditions and then click Search to display the messages that match those conditions e Mailbox Specify an Automatic Two way Recording mailbox or select ALL e Extension Specify an extension to view all calls that were re
276. om Status Control mode and the light of the DSS button for each room extension will show the current room status This allows the hotel operator to manage guests and rooms with just a telephone In addition the hotel operator can set automatic wake up calls for guest rooms In a hotel type environment an extension assigned as a hotel operator can be used to Gap e Note i Hospitality features cannot be used at the same time as the Supervisory Monitor ACD EE Control feature Refer to 4 1 3 Supervisory Monitor ACD Control For details consult your system administrator Check in Check out Setting a Timed Reminder to a Room Extension Remote Wake up Call Cleaned up The hotel operator must be using a 6 line display PT to use the Check in Check out and Cleaned up features While in Room Status Control mode a The hotel operator s extension can only check extensions in out and ready not ready All other operations will be ignored b The light of each DSS button shows the room status of the corresponding extension as follows Off Checked out and Ready Flashing Red Checked out and Not Ready Red on Checked in c The lights of other buttons may not show their normal display d The hotel operator s extension is considered to be busy Callers to that extension will hear a busy tone Uy amp amp amp e Check in The hotel operator can change the room status of extensions to check in by using the Check in bu
277. omatic Walking COS FH When making an outside call using Walking COS through DISA the CLIP number for that call will be that of the extension seized by Walking COS From Outside Telephone To dial a different number during a conversation with an outside party or while hearing the ringback reorder or busy tone CO jf O DISA message Enter Dial phone number Dial a line access number as the first digit when calling an outside party 54 User Manual 1 2 8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside Direct Inward System Access DISA CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside to Outside Call feature of DISA The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Enabling DISA security Trunk Security or All Security b Keeping your passwords verification code PIN extension PIN secret c Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed d Changing PINs regularly Time limit Both parties will hear an alarm tone fifteen seconds before the specified time limit To extend press any dial button except x If Built in Automated Attendant service is set you can access the desired extension simply by pressing a single digit 0 9 from the options given the prerecorded message User Manual 55 1 2 9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA Re
278. on codes ao Verification code User Manual 351 4 1 2 Manager Programming Item Programming Input Verification code PIN max 10 digits Setting the verification code PIN 2 C gt CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your password verification code PIN The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Keeping your PIN secret b Selecting a complex random PIN that cannot be easily guessed c Changing your PIN regularly e To enter a decimal point press x 352 User Manual 4 1 3 Supervisory Monitor ACD Control 4 1 3 Supervisory Monitor ACD Control Monitor Control amp Execute ACD Report Analysis e Note The Supervisory Monitor ACD Control feature cannot be used at the same time as EE Hospitality features Refer to 1 12 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features For details consult your system administrator By specifying an ACD Supervisor for extension users the ACD Supervisor can check and analyse the operating conditions of an ICD group This is done by monitoring the current condition of the ICD group and by collecting and analysing statistical ACD report information ICD group monitoring enables recording of ACD report data and allows v
279. one operation Broadcast messages have priority over other regular or urgent messages but otherwise are treated like regular messages This feature is useful when informing subscribers about the current system status such as remaining capacity requesting that unnecessary messages be erased etc 1 Log in to the System Manager s mailbox 2 C1 to record a broadcast message C1 to end recording C2 to accept ofS N To deliver messages to specified mailboxes Use this feature to deliver the same message to one or more subscribers by specifying their mailbox numbers User Manual 285 2 2 1 System Manager Features 1 Log in to the System Manager s mailbox 2 2 2 3 Enter the mailbox number of the intended recipient e Enter by name by pressing first Use a Mailbox Group by specifying its number 4 2 to accept 5 1 torecord a message e Enter 2 to add mailbox numbers Enter 3_ to review the mailing list Enter to cancel message transfer 6 1 to end recording 7 2 to accept 8 1 1 to specify the delivery time e Enter 1 2 tosend the message immediately then go to step 13 9 Enter the desired delivery time then 10 1 for AM C2 for PM This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24 hour time 11 Enter the day of the month for delivery then CE Example e If today is February 16 and you enter 1 7 _ the message will be delive
280. onnection before disconnecting the power connection When the unit is installed in the new location reconnect the power first and then reconnect the telecom connection e The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device Ensure that the AC outlet is located near the equipment and is easily accessible e Slots and openings in the front back and bottom of the cabinet are provided for ventilation to protect it from overheating these openings must not be blocked or covered The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed sofa rug or other similar surface while in use The product should never be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source This product should not be placed in a sealed environment unless proper ventilation is provided e When this product is no longer in use make sure to detach it from the rack or wall To protect this unit from static electricity do not touch any external connectors of the unit For the PBX User Manual 17 1 1 1 For Your Safety 18 Notice For All Telephone Equipment Read and understand all instructions When using a Panasonic proprietary telephone PT use only the correct Panasonic handset For the PBX Note Keep the unit away from heating appliances and devices that generate electrical noise such as fluorescent lamps motors and televisions These noise sources can interfere with the performance of the PBX If you are having problems making ca
281. op left of each procedure and indicate which types of telephones support the operation However in some cases a specific model number is given instead e g KX UT136 KX UT series User Manual 29 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones 30 Abbreviation Telephone Type PT Proprietary Telephone e g KX NT300 series KX NT500 series KX NT265 KX T7700 series DPT Digital Proprietary Telephone e g KX T7600 series KX DT300 series KX DT500 series Display PT Proprietary Telephone with a Display e g KX NT346 KX NT546 KX DT346 KX DT546 KX T7636 PS Portable Station e g KX TCA364 KX WT115 SIP Extn SIP phone e g KX UT series SIP phones Third party SIP phones SLT Single Line Telephone e g KX T7710 User Manual 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones Connection Example This diagram shows you a connection example Telephone Company IP PBX Private J s ITSP gt IP Network 9 Network gt f Fax Machine WAN a Router DCE LJ E e g ADSL CS PS Modem External Sensor EA IP Softphone E CA Client PC Peg Doorphone amp Door Opener Ca CTI Server BGM Music On Hold MOH SIP Phone A 3 o U O IP CS PS e A ean Voice Processing Pager Amplifier System Speaker PC i 1 ITSP Internet Telephony Service Provider 2 DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment 3 CA Communication Assistant
282. orwarding Mailbox Number Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be forwarded Note A Mailbox Group number cannot be specified as a destination Auto Forwarding Delay Time Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the system waits before forwarding unplayed messages The maximum delay time is 99 h 59 min Note The delay time must be shorter than the New Message Retention Time or else messages will be deleted before being forwarded Auto Forwarding Mode Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the original mailbox When set to Copy copies of the messages are retained in the original mailbox after forwarding When set to Move messages are forwarded to the receiving mailbox and are not retained in the original mailbox Auto Forwarding Mode Message Remains New Specifies if the forwarded messages remain marked as new This setting is available only when Auto Forwarding Mode is set to Copy Auto Forwarding Expires Specifies the date and time of day for when forwarding of messages will expire User Manual 335 3 2 1 User Programming 336 Personal Custom Service Item Description Personal Custom Service Specifies the Personal Custom Service Note e Make sure to add an outside line access number when you store an outside telephone number e Ifyou are using a PRI line you may need to enter at the end of outside telephone numb
283. ou can skip this step if your mailbox requires no password Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail Transfer or enter UM group s floating extension number o CAUTION e Itis strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access e To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX keep the password secret If it becomes known to others the PBX may be misused e Change the password periodically Notice e When disabling the password requirement ensure that an unauthorised third party is not allowed access to your extension 142 User Manual 1 8 2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox e When following audible prompts only if Autoplay New Messages is enabled for your mailbox new messages will be played back automatically each time you log in to your mailbox an Whether or not new messages will be played back one after the other automatically depends on system programming For more information consult your System Administrator e If Message Waiting Lamp is enabled for your mailbox the message lamp on your telephone will light when you receive a new message You can log in to your mailbox and play back a new message automatically simply by going off hook and pressing the Message button on your telephone The Unified Messaging system will play back the first new message only To play back other messages press the appropriate button e After logging in the system will announce the
284. ou have assigned for transferring to your Covering Extension For example To speak with my assistant press 0 Remote Call Forwarding You can programme the Unified Messaging system to forward your calls to another extension or to an outside telephone if authorised You can do this even when you are away from the office This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox There are 6 forwarding settings available FWD Ali Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number FWD Busy Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you are already on another call FWD No Answer Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you do not answer your telephone FWD Busy and No Answer Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you are on another call or do not answer your telephone FWD to Outside Forwards all incoming calls to the specified outside telephone number if you are authorised to use this feature FWD Cancel Cancels the forwarding setting User Manual 1 8 5 Transferring Calls To assign outside telephone numbers for Remote Call Forwarding PT SLT PS SIP Extn Change telephone number 1 Log in to your mailbox gt 48 gt ORJ 2 Change telephone number 2 Enter 48 Enter 1 or 2 If you have already set a telephone number and wish to change it press 1 after selecting telephone number 1 or
285. outside line Dial outside phone During a conversation number D outside 2 m e Gi Press Recall hookswitch SIP Extn During a conversation aren J C Tone HOLD KX UT series only KX UT series Press TRANSFER Other than KX UT series Press HOLD Seize outside line Dial outside phone On hook number eT outside outside line gt phone no gt hu gt aS Seize outside line Dial outside phone Talk On hook number This step can be omitted KX UT series only User Manual 67 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer pe e For SIP phone users instead of going on hook if you press the TRANSFER button KX UT series except KX UT670 Transfer Cancel button KX UT670 once or the HOLD button non KX UT series once or twice depending on the telephone being used you can return to the held call The call with the transferred party will be disconnected e Time limit Both the caller and the transferred party will hear an alarm tone fifteen seconds before a specified time period and the call will be disconnected e To return to the held call before the destination answers press the TRANSFER button the corresponding CO ICD Group INTERCOM or DN button or the hookswitch Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Direct Station Selection DSS button Transferring a Call Using the ISDN Service Call Transfer CT by ISDN During
286. p Check out DSS Press Check out Dial extension number and then press To check out without an invoice ENTER or press desired DSS NEXT Cc Press NEXT Cc oO Press YES Check out Press EXIT or Check out To record edit room charges and check out a room with without printing an invoice Display PT While on hook ENTER lt ensionno gt ER gt b Co Check out y DSS Press Check out Dial extension number and then press Enter minibar charge Press Down ENTER or press desired DSS To check out with an invoice PRINT gt NEXT Cc Cc Press PRINT Press NEXT YES b gt athercharges gt y To check out without an invoice Enter other charges NEXT Press YES co Press NEXT co Check out Press EXIT or Check out User Manual 237 1 12 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features x e After check out Remote Extension Dial Lock is activated and outside calls from the room extension are restricted Refer to 2 1 1 Extension Control e After check out wake up call and Call Log information for the room extension are cleared automatically In addition features set on the room extension are reset to the default settings For a list of features that are reset refer to 1 9 14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension Extension Feature Clear When the room status of extensions is changed
287. p gt To record your message i 1 G4 gt 1 Enter 1 to record Record your message Enter 1 your message to end recording You can pause and resume Press 2 to add another recipient recording by pressing 2 then go to To specify recipients by If you pause for more than number or To specify recipients by 20 seconds recording will name dialling by name A maximum of 100 stop automatically recipients can be specified Or press 3 to review the recipients CCG Set the delivery time of the message gt gt 2 gt COC Send the message immediately Accept then go on hook Enter 2 Enter 11 12 or 2 to accept To set the delivery time of the message CD AM gt gt desired CE gt gt desired day of GH gt p delivery time PM the month for delivery Enter the desired Enter 1 for AM Enter the day of the month Enter 2 delivery time and 2 for PM for delivery and to accept CD Make the message urgent C Make the message private CD Request a receipt gt gt gt gt gt a 2 Continue 2 Continue 2 Continue Enter 1 or 2 Enter 1 or 2 Enter 1 or 2 On hook ae e 1 Example To enter 5 00 press 5 To enter 5 15 press 515 e 2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24 hour time e 3 Example If today is February 16 and you enter 17 the message will be delivered tomorrow If today is February 16 and you enter 5 the message will be
288. pient enters an incorrect password 3 times the system will announce the following i information if it has been programmed This information can help the recipient track down the EE message or message sender you Company name Callback telephone number Your subscriber name e The Unified Messaging system may be able to guide recipients using a different language For more information consult your System Administrator 168 User Manual 1 8 5 Transferring Calls 1 8 5 Transferring Calls Call Transfer Incomplete Call Handling Assigning Your Covering Extension Remote Call Forwarding Assigning and Cancelling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to Outside Line Voice Mail Transfer l O e e e ee Call Transfer When a call reaches your extension via the Automated Attendant service normally your extension will ring and you can answer the call If you use the Call Transfer feature however the Unified Messaging system can handle the call in a number of ways The status you set for Call Transfer determines what happens to the call You can set one of the following Call Blocking The call will be handled by the Incomplete Call Handling feature refer to Incomplete Call Handling which allows you to have your calls ring at another extension transferred to your mailbox transferred to the operator etc The call will not ring at your extension The call will be handled according to the settings you have made for
289. ponding PDN extension the SDN button light shows the current status of the destination extension as follows Green on You are using the line Red on The line is being used The PDN extension or another SDN extension when multiple extensions have SDN buttons to a same PDN extension is using the line Even if a PDN extension has set Do Not Disturb DND you can call the extension as normal by pressing the SDN button When an SDN button is in Standard SDN Key Mode you can dial a telephone number while Ld hearing a dial tone instead of pressing the SDN button again Depending on system EE programming your call will be made using either your normal calling privileges Class of Service or those of the corresponding PDN extension SDN Walking COS User Manual 101 1 5 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Call Hold and Call Hold Retrieve You can put calls answered with a PDN or SDN button on hold normally gt 1 4 2 Holding a Call You can also retrieve a call held at your extension another extension with a simple operation regardless of the call type Call Hold Retrieve To retrieve a call at the holding extension SY gt z gt h Off hook Press flashing green PDN or SDN To retrieve a call from another extension only Regular Hold gt 4 Off hook Press flashing red PDN or SDN e Ifacallis not retrieved within a specified time you will hear an alarm as
290. r default 999 extension no Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail Transfer or enter UM group s floating extension number Enter System Manager s gt System Manager password C gt C Enter System Manager password and Remote automatic log in From Outside Telephone Call the Unified Messaging system from the preprogrammed gt System Manager password gt Pnr siem Manager s outside telephone number assigned as a Caller ID number Enter System Manager password and o CAUTION e Itis strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access e To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX keep the password secret If it becomes known to others the PBX may be misused e Change the password periodically Notice e When disabling the password requirement ensure that an unauthorised third party is not allowed access to your extension 276 User Manual 2 2 1 System Manager Features Setting Up Mailboxes The System Manager s primary function is to create mailboxes for new subscribers and to maintain system organisation by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes x e If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console the gt System Manager cannot create or edit mailboxes The system will announce Sorry this function is not available Creating and Editing a Mailbox The System Manager can create and
291. r ACD Report window Maximum 64 groups displayed Click gt to move the ICD group you selected in step b to the Selected Group for ACD Report window Maximum 64 groups To delete an ICD group from the Selected Group for ACD Report window click the ICD group name and then click lt Click OK Select the target time period for the ACD report on Call Filter Settings Select Period Select the target for an ACD report from the following and then configure the filter settings on the Call Call Filter Mode screen Caller ID CLIP Filter You can filter by Caller ID or CLIP a Click Caller ID CLIP Filter b Enter the caller ID or CLIP as the target to analyse maximum 10 Talk Wait Duration Filter You can filter by continuous talk time or wait time a Click Talk Wait Duration Filter b Select Talk Time or Wait Time from the Mode drop down list c Set the target time range to filter To set the minimum time duration click Min and set the time 0 00 23 59 To set the maximum time duration click Max and set the time 0 00 23 59 Lost Call Filter You can filter by lost calls a Click Lost Call Filter To show the report on a group basis perform the following steps a Click View Report The ACD Report Call Report screen is displayed The filtered data is shown as follows Call ACD Report Start Date The start date of the call eeuieepol Start Time The sta
292. r Company Name for Custom Service Menus for Voice Labels for Mailbox Groups for System Prompts for Multilingual Selection Menu NEGA RE 7_ for System Caller Names for On Hold Announcement Menu For the item selected in step 3 follow these steps a For Company Greetings Enter the Company Greeting Number 1 32 b For the Company Name Go to step 5 c For Custom Service Menus Enter a Custom Service Number 1 200 e Enter 0 to record the Custom Service exit prompt d For Voice Labels Enter the number of the Mailbox Group to be labelled The System Administrator assigns list numbers e For the Multilingual Selection Menu Go to step 5 f For the On Hold Announcement Menu Go to step 5 1 to change the message e Ifa message has not yet been recorded go to step 7 1 to record a message C2 to erase the current message then go to step 3 or 4 1 to end recording C2 to accept Repeat steps 4 8 to record other Company Greetings Custom Service Menus and or Voice Labels User Manual 2 2 2 Message Manager Features To record system prompts 1 Log in to the Message Manager s mailbox 2 4 5 torecord messages 3 Enter the system prompt number you want to change 4 To change specific prompts go to step 5 To change all prompts one after another without reviewing the current recording go to step 6 5 To change specific prompts a 1 b Enter the pro
293. r Manual Direct Service 3 2 1 User Programming Item Description Direct Service UM Extension Specifies which features can be directly accessed by dialling a Unified Messaging extension number Record No Answer Greeting You can record the greeting played when there is no answer Record Busy Greeting You can record the greeting played when their extension is busy Record After Hours Greeting You can record the greeting played when the system is in night mode Record Temporary Greeting You can record a greeting that is used exclusively until you disable it e Change Day Main Menu Change the Day Main Menu greeting Only the Message Manager may make this change e Change Night Main Menu Change the Night Main Menu greeting Only the Message Manager may make this change Change Emergency Greeting Change the Emergency Greeting Only the Message Manager may make this change Note Automatic Login must be enabled for extensions to use this Direct Service Access Announce Number of Messages Item Description Subscriber Service All New Messages Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new messages in your mailbox when you log in Subscriber Service All Messages Specifies if the system announces to you the number of all messages in your mailbox when you log in Subscriber Service New Voice Messages Specifies if the system announces to you the n
294. r mailbox while it is ringing While on hook Voice Mail Transfer Press Voice Mail Transfer To transfer a call to a mailbox During a conversation DSS Voice Mail gt Transfer desired extension no Press Voice Mail Press DSS or dial desired Transfer extension number User Manual 229 1 11 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected 230 To transfer your own call to the called extension s mailbox J R B Tone E B Tone DSS Dial extension number DND Tone or press DSS extension no Voice Mail Transfer Off hook Transfer To listen to messages PT SLT PS Ba MESSAGE C a Voice Mail Transfer voice mail floating extension no Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail Transfer or enter voice mail floating extension number Off hook Indication tone after going off hook gt s i lt gt ell mr Press Voice Mail e If using a PS in parallel with a PT or SLT in Wireless XDP Parallel mode you cannot use the Voice Mail Transfer button to forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button IS Screening Calls Live Call Screening LCS While a caller is leaving a message in your mailbox you can monitor the call without answering If you so desire you can answer the call while monitoring There are two m
295. r that is in use for another conversation you will hear gt a busy tone and cannot establish a multiple party conversation e Ifyou fail to seize idle outside lines necessary for all members assigned in the conference group you will hear a reorder tone and cannot make a conference group call When making a conference group call to an outside party the CLIP number for that call will be the one you select for making calls to an outside line Refer to 1 9 4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller s Telephone Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Conference Mode If this mode is selected through system programming the called parties can join the conversation simply by going off hook The caller can end the conversation with a specific party manually To make answer a conference group call PT SLT PS SIP Extn Caller SS gt GaGa gt e 5 Coon gt Off hook Enter 32 Dial conference Enter entry code ea aaa max 8 digits Wait fi D g ED 2 kes Enter Talk A multiple party Any Telephone conversation is now established Ce Do GS Off hook Talk Called Party User Manual 133 1 7 3 Making a Conference Group Call x Ifyou do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call extensions outside telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code e Entry codes can consist of the digits 0 throug
296. re Number Table 382 Feature While dial tone is heard aa Additional digits buttons Accessing External Services 60 service code External Feature Access EFA 1 11 5 Ifa Voice Processing System is Connected Call Forwarding to Voice Mail Voice Mail Integration Both Calls 710 0 Cancel 2 All Calls Outside Calls 711 3 Busy 4 No Answer Intercom Calls X712 5 Busy No Answer voice mail floating extension no 1 12 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features 5 Setting a Timed Reminder to a 76 Room Extension Remote Wake up Call Toset 12H 1 extension no hour minute 0 AM 1 PM 0 once 1 daily 24H 1 extension no hour minute 0 once 1 daily To cancel 0 extension no To confirm 2 extension no 1 12 2 Recording Information Using 761 message no parameter Preprogrammed Messages Printing Message 1 13 1 Walking Extension X727 your extension no extension PIN 1 13 2 Enhanced Walking Extension To set an extension status to X727 Service out To set an extension status to your extension no extension PIN Service in 2 1 1 Extension Control To lock unlock other extensions Remote Extension Dial Lock To unlock 782 extension no To lock 783 extension no User Manual 5 3 1 Feature Number Table Fe
297. re cordless telephones wireless LAN Home RF microwave ovens and other ISM devices These systems may cause minor noise For KX UT248 and KX NT560 users You may not be able to use all of the functionality available on a Bluetooth headset For example redialling will not work with a REDIAL button on a Bluetooth headset and during hands free mode you cannot switch the call to the Bluetooth headset through headset operation For KX NT500 series except KX NT551 KX DT543 KX DT546 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 and KX UT670 telephone users You can use Electric Hook Switch EHS headsets For the latest information about headsets that have been tested with this unit consult your dealer LE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Headset Operation Select the equipment to use e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Headset button User Manual 99 1 5 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension 1 5 Using a PDN SDN Button 1 5 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Primary Directory Number PDN buttons and Secondary Directory Number SDN buttons are useful when extension users will handle calls for other extensions For example a secretary or multiple secretaries can handle calls and check the call status of a boss or multiple bosses The functions of PDN and SDN buttons are as follows PDN button This button c
298. red tomorrow e f today is February 16 and you enter 5 _ _ the message will be delivered on March 5 12 C2 to accept 13 C1 to make the message urgent C2 to continue 14 C1 to make the message private C2 to continue Changing the System Manager s Password The System Manager must enter the System Manager password in order to log in before performing any System Manager tasks In order to ensure system security we recommend selecting a long max 16 digits password that cannot be easily guessed x e Ifthe Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console the System Manager cannot change the System Manager password The system will announce Sorry this function is not available 286 User Manual 2 2 1 System Manager Features To change the System Manager s password 1 Log in to the System Manager s mailbox 2 B9 3 1 to change the mailbox password C2 to accept the current setting Enter the desired password then C2 to accept ooa User Manual 287 2 2 2 Message Manager Features 2 2 2 Message Manager Features The Message Manager can maintain the general delivery mailbox change notification settings record delete prompts etc Logging in to the Message Manager s Mailbox Managing the General Delivery Mailbox Setting Up Message Waiting Notification Customising the Message Manager s Mailbox Recording Messages Remote
299. rent status as follows Off The voice is heard through the handset FH On The voice is heard through the speaker and the handset e This feature requires system programming e Hands free operation i You can have a conversation in hands free mode using the SP PHONE button You can EE perform other tasks simultaneously Helpful hints for hands free operation Ifitis difficult to hear the other party s voice Increase the volume using the Navigator Key Jog Dial or Volume Key Ifthe other party has difficulty hearing you Decrease the volume Ifthe other party reports that your voice echoes Use the telephone in a room that has curtains carpeting or both If parts of the conversation cannot be heard If you and the other party speak at the same time parts of your conversation may be lost To avoid this try to speak alternately User Manual 97 1 4 8 Using the Headset Headset Operation 1 4 8 Using the Headset Headset Operation You can have a conversation using a headset In this case you must select Headset on in programming mode or set the Headset button TP on red in advance However for the KX UT113 KX UT123 Headset mode is enabled automatically when a headset is connected to the headset jack of the telephone This feature is also Known as Handset Headset Selection To talk using the headset PT KX UT series SP PHONE Press SP PHONE To use the handset during a conversation using the
300. represent all of these PTs If a PBX feature only supports specific PTs such as IP PTs the available telephone types are clearly indicated IP PTs SIP extensions may become busy and you may not be able to make or receive calls depending on the network status The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version as indicated on the cover of this manual To confirm the software version of your PBX consult your dealer Product specifications are subject to change without notice The preset melodies in this product are used with permission of 2010 Copyrights Vision Inc Notes for SIP Phone Users Before using a SIP phone please read the following notes For All SIP phone users A tone may not be heard during an operation depending on the type of SIP phone being used The following operation is an example However for KX UT series SIP phones a tone may be heard depending on the system settings For details consult your administrator Example To use an account code Account Code Entry PT SLT PS SIP Extn a_ Account D gt gt om gt GQ Fo pm z CLL f Off hook Press Account or Enter account code Enter enter 49 max 10 digits outside gt gt Dial outside phone number SIP phone users will not hear this tone Seize an outside line before entering an outside phone number User Manual 5 Feature Highlights For KX UT series SIP phone
301. ricted at your extension depending on system programming and the type of telephone being used Icon Descriptions The following icons show you the feature availability notes and action to use the features DT This feature cannot be used with a single line telephone ISSY See Programming for Related Programming if necessary Cc co OR con C99 outside line Seize an outside line One of the following e Press the CO button e Dial automatic line access number 0 9 e Dial outside line group access number and outside line group number D Off hook One of the following e Lift the handset e Press the SP PHONE button e Press the MONITOR button To start talking lift the handset e Press TALK button ooo0000 ooo0000 Ooo000 popogi A000000 F Press the Call button on the Doorphone On hook One of the following Hang up e Press the SP PHONE button e Press the MONITOR button e Press CANCEL button Press the hookswitch lightly Press the corresponding feature button on the proprietary telephone or KX UT series SIP phone Talk or make an announcement User Manual 25 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones Enter the account code Enter the required number D lt Example gt a You will hear a busy confirmation dial ring or ringback tone B Tone Busy Tone C Tone Confirmation Tone D Tone Dial Tone
302. ring a conversation TRANSFER XFER 8 gt k C Tone t HOLD KX UT series only KX UT series Dial extension number Talk On hook Press TRANSFER 5 ee This step can be omitted Other than KX UT series OCUT series only Press HOLD a e For SIP phone users instead of going on hook if you press the TRANSFER button KX UT series except KX UT670 Transfer Cancel button KX UT670 once or the HOLD fF button non KX UT series once or twice depending on the telephone being used you can return to the held call The call with the transferred party will be disconnected e For all types of telephone users if the call is not transferred within a specified time you will hear an alarm Transfer Recall e For the transfer operation using an SDN button refer to 1 5 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension aa To transfer with one touch One touch Transfer During a conversation with an outside party gt 4 gt EQ Press DSS Talk On hook This step can be omitted 66 User Manual 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer o e System programming is required to use the One touch Transfer feature during a conversation FF with an extension Transferring to an Outside Party Using the PBX Service Some extensions may be restricted from performing this feature During a conversation N D 7 A outside 4 cam gt BE Ck gt Press TRANSFER Seize
303. rks identified herein are the property of their respective owners e Microsoft product screen shot s reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation Open Source Software This product uses Open Source Software For details click the Information button in Web Maintenance Console 8 User Manual Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Operati N sisisi tees a eeccted csc eee eee ewes 13 1 1 Before Operating the Telephones 22 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaaneeeeeeeeeees 14 1 1 1 For Your Safety Soke aceasta eneee neare P Ea net TaI LE GREE AE Ea A EAE EAEn Sack 14 1 1 2 Important Safety Instructions cz scs gsccncitscgsdscesdstocactssusesGarnnediacterestesacedeiiGeda ner cxteeaiuaetnerees 19 1 1 3 Precautions ys eann E A E E rent tre peer errr terres 20 1 1 4 es SN snae E acta eae 22 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeaeeaceeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 23 1 2 Making Calls ici taiese ptr iinciseantacccotansirod sannatien can aunt vnc a eaaa aaa Saa aaaea SaNa 32 1 2 1 Basie G aling eaen a erect er eee rer te ene Ree re er eee mee AA E E 32 1 2 2 Easy Dialling eese E E E 37 1 2 3 Redial a aoee ee e a e E E E a a Ei 40 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No AnSWET ccccsceseseeeeneeeeneeeeeeenes 41 1 2 5 Accessing the ISDN Service ISDN Service Access 2222 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeteeeeeeeeees 50 1 2 6 Alternating th
304. rogramming Changing Call Charges and Extension Control To enter the programming mode PROG PROGRAM manager 2 coco E om PAUSE Press PROGRAM Enter 1 or PAUSE Enter manager password ji PROG To continue RORA input Follow programming input Press PROGRAM or PAUSE Item Programming Input Changing the manager password CO Password max 10 digits Viewing extension call charges 1 Extension no Clearing extension call charges C1 Extension no Setting the budget for extension call charges 2 Extension no Charge Viewing call charges for each verification code 3 Verification code Clearing call charges for each verification code G Verification code Setting the budget for each verification code 4 Verification code Charge Viewing call charges for each outside line 5 C Outside line no 3 digits Assigning a charge rate for each outside line group AEN ALEE E EEE 6 Outside line group no 2 digits Charge rate Clearing all charges Printing the total call charge Locking unlocking other extensions Remote Extension Dial Lock 9 0 Extension no 1 to lock 0 to unlock Clearing the PIN and PIN lock for extensions 9 1 Extension no Clearing the PIN and PIN lock for verificati
305. rs when they use the Dialling by Name feature Personal Greetings The following Personal Greeting Messages can be recorded in the subscriber tutorial After the greeting is played a tone will sound and the caller can leave a message No Answer Greeting Heard by callers when you do not answer their calls A common example might be This is name can t take your call right now Busy Signal Greeting Heard by callers when you are on another call A common example might be This is name I m on another call right now After Hours Greeting Heard by callers when the Unified Messaging system is in night mode A common example might be This is name I ve gone home for the day Jd e Ifyou do not record a greeting message a prerecorded greeting message will be used an User Manual 143 1 8 2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox To start the Subscriber Tutorial PT SLT PS SIP Extn The Unified Messaging system will announce Log in to your mailbox gt gt Welcome to the Panasonic Unified Messaging gt gt System This is the Subscriber Tutorial service To set your password for the first time Gorman CQ gt Enter your password and Enter 2 to accept To change your password gt ows CO gt D Enter 1 Enter your new password and Enter 2 to accept To record the Owner s Name Your Subscriber Name 2 Rs cs TD C Tone State your name Enter 1 to
306. rt time of the call HH MM SS End Date The end date of the call End Time The end time of the call HH MM SS Result The processing result Answered Abandoned Overflowed ICDG The incoming ICD Group number Answering The answering member Extension Agent Name Extension Number Talk Time The talking time HH MM SS Wait Time The waiting time HH MM SS Trunk The incoming trunk group number Caller ID The callers number CLIP No graphical data is supported for Call Report Abandoned calls are included in the ACD report depending on what filter is selected User Manual 359 4 1 3 Supervisory Monitor ACD Control If it is necessary to show results without abandoned calls then export the CSV and delete that type of call from the data b The results report can be output in one of the following 2 ways e Export Click Export and save the report file e Print Click Print to print the report c Click Close 360 User Manual Section 5 Appendix This section provides the List of Operations by Telephone Type the Troubleshooting the Feature Number Table and Tone List Check the Troubleshooting section before consulting your dealer User Manual 361 5 1 1 List of Operations by Telephone Type 5 1 List of Operations by Telephone Type 5 1 1 List of Operations by Telephone Type The features that each type of telephone supports are marked with a v Features without a v for a certain telephone type are no
307. rvice out Extension gt Seivicedin gt gt Status SP UserB Extn No 102 i Extn No 102 Service out Service out In this example extension users A and B work in shifts and use the same extension in turn User A sets the extension status to Service out when he she finishes work Then user B can set the extension status to Service in and have his her own settings available at the extension To set an extension to Service out status PT SLT S gt ua gt D o ee C Tone Off hook Enter 727 Enter On hook To set an extension to Service in status and have your own settings available PT SLT PIN Personal Identification Number SD gt Waa gt gt lo gt gt Off hook Enter 727 Enter Dial your extension number gt gt ann PD Enter extension PIN On hook max 10 digits a e An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature Refer to J Assigning an Extension PIN to Your Extension Extension PIN Personal Identification Number in 3 1 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming e Extension settings can be exchanged between SLT and SLT PT and PT or SLT and PT User Manual 245 1 14 1 Using the Call Log iP 14 Using a Telephone with a Display 1 14 1 Using the Call Log 246 This is available for display proprietary telephones portable stations and KX UT series SIP phones gt Calling with the Incoming C
308. s User Manual 1 14 1 Using the Call Log To confirm the log information with the Navigator Key KX NT300 KX NT500 KX DT300 KX DT500 KX T7600 While on hook aleren Press Left twice Press Up or Down until desired party appears To clear the log information Display PT While confirming the log information Call Log ja TRANSFER gt Press Call Log or Up or Down Press TRANSFER until desired party appears To call Display PT While confirming the log information D Call Log Press Call Log or Up or Down until desired party appears To store the caller s information in personal speed dialling Display PT While confirming the log information Call Log dD AUTO DIAL STORE Press Call Log or Up or Down Press STORE until desired party appears User Manual 247 1 14 1 Using the Call Log pe e The Call Log button light shows the current status as follows gt Off No incoming call Or you have already viewed the call log Red on You have missed calls to view e If your call is answered by another extension the caller s information is recorded on the displays of both your extension and the answering extension e You can lock your call log display by using an extension PIN Personal Identification Number so that you can prohibit access to your logged information Display Lock Refer to 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode You can also have a Call Log button for an
309. s disabled for the Message Manager s mailbox For more information consult your System Administrator e Direct Service Access Jd If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings you can access this feature directly by EE dialling a specific Unified Messaging extension number from your extension Automatic login must be enabled to use Direct Service Access refer to Automatic log in For details about these Unified Messaging extension numbers consult your System Administrator List of Prompts for VM and AA Service There are over 1000 system prompts in the Unified Messaging system These prompts can be customised by re recording them to change their content or can be recorded in various languages The maximum length of a prompt is fixed at 6 minutes When recording prompts in other languages most often it is not necessary to record all prompts contained in the Unified Messaging system recording over 1000 system prompts is a big undertaking When a caller is connected to AA service or VM service most likely he or she will only hear a small selection of the following prompts Therefore it is necessary only to record or modify the prompts that callers will hear Please change prompts to suit the application For example prompt no 1211 could be re recorded to announce Thank you for calling ABCD Travel instead of Welcome to the Unified Messaging System It is possible to record the prompts you wish to modify on your
310. s Press ENTER Cu gt QS a TRANSFER D 7 XFER Wi outside 4 outside line hg SD AA phone no KX UT seri us series y KX UT series Seize outside line Dial outside phone Talk On hook Press TRANSFER number f J Other than KX UT series This step can be omitted Press HOLD KX UT series only 6 User Manual Feature Highlights To establish a conference call KX UT series During a conversation i For KX UT series dal Press ENTER A CONFERENCE desired i A D gt GS gt te 2 h Dial desired phone Talk to the Press CONFERENCE Talk with multiple number new party parties C Tone Press CONFERENCE Seize an outside line before For KX UT670 dialling an outside phone number Press Conference Start To set cancel Call Forwarding PT SLT PS SIP Extn CD Both Calls Cancel After entering 0 for Cancel for KX UT series u Press ENTER Go on hook All Calls gt gt CB outsecats gt a E No Answer BAHNA C Intercom Calls Busy No Answer Off hook Enter 71 Enter 0 to 2 as Enter required you desire number For Cancel go on hook directly after entering 0 destination extension no COR access no phone no max 32 digits a For KX UT series d Press ENTER Enter destination extension number Enter Or enter outside
311. s For more information consult your System o Administrator Message Waiting Notification The Message Waiting Notification feature lets you know you have received new messages in your mailbox by Message Waiting Lamp The message lamp on your telephone if it has one will light when you receive a new message If you have a 6 line display PT you can also see the number of new messages you have on your display If your telephone has a Message button the Message light will also turn on when you receive a new message Device Notification Notifying you via a device i e an outside telephone another PBX extension your cellular phone etc You can assign three different devices For each device you have the option of receiving notification for urgent messages only or for all messages You can also choose to receive notification during certain hours only called scheduling which is useful if you do not want to be disturbed at night for example For more information on scheduling consult your System Administrator If you turn device notification on for more than one device the lowest numbered device 1 2 or 3 will be used first If notification is not possible for example if your outside telephone is busy the next device will be used Message notification by e mail may also be available for your mailbox When you receive new messages in your mailbox you can receive notification by e mail The recorded message can also
312. s at different locations such as another branch office or at home b two or more people use the same telephone in turn lt Example a gt When using extension settings at a different location See ee eee eee ee ee ee eee eee ee ee eee eee eee eee ee ee eee ee eee eee ee i Main Office E i Service in Service out l I I Extension status N gt gt gt gt I O of Telephone A lt 1 p D P i i ray ae 3 BA oa fae rege Cage ree AEE ER i I Extn No 101 oon 1 Extn No 102 i i Service out P Service out i Service out BY ee ge eR sr Bo J A A A A E cece eceeesesesestecoleeces S E E E pE E E E E E E N E she E DE E E E E T E E E EEE LJ s v7 f E ay Branch Office H 1 1 ae oe a H 1 ees otckec peed ae ota i Extn No 102 Extn No 102 0 go i Service out Service out gt jy C INI et CIVIC OU 4 1 Extension status Pb Pe of Telephone B 1 I i 1 4 LA i a sar ki yj SH E enc Ps a tm pe In this example extension user A sets his her own extension status to Service out at the main office Then he she can set another extension status to Service in at the branch office to have his her own extension settings available at the extension User Manual 1 13 2 Enhanced Walking Extension lt Example b gt When two users share one telephone Extn No 101 Service in User A Extn No 101 i Extn No 101 Fort Sevice OU ad Service out Se
313. s for subscribers etc O e e e eee Logging in to the System Manager s Mailbox Setting Up Mailboxes Setting Class of Service COS Parameters Remote Time Service Mode Setting Changing the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting Broadcasting Messages Changing the System Manager s Password Logging in to the System Manager s Mailbox The procedures described in this section require the System Manager to use a telephone however many of these procedures can also be performed using a PC with Web Maintenance Console For more information consult your dealer In order to perform these procedures with a telephone the System Manager must log in before performing any System Manager tasks To log in as the System Manager 3 items of information must be known the UM group s floating extension number to access the Unified Messaging system the System Manager s mailbox number and the System Manager s mailbox password The System Manager s mailbox number is 999 default depending on the mailbox number length specified in system programming The System Manager s password can be assigned by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance Console or by the System Manager using his or her extension telephone refer to Changing the System Manager s Password 8 Before the System Manager can perform any System Manager tasks System Manager Access from Telephone must be enabled and Password for System Manager Up to
314. s set to an outside line o e Ifthe Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console the 5 Message Manager cannot customise his or her mailbox The system will announce Sorry this function is not available Message Manager s Password The Message Manager must enter the Message Manager password in order to log in before performing any Message Manager tasks In order to ensure system security we recommend selecting a long max 16 digits password that cannot be easily guessed Operator s Extensions When callers require help they can dial the operator call number to be transferred to an operator A maximum of 3 operators can be programmed for each time mode these operators are not necessarily the same as the operator extensions programmed for the PBX The extension assigned as Operator 1 for the day mode is designated as the Message Manager Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to Outside After programming changing the telephone numbers used for Remote Call Forward to Outside the Message Manager must reset the remote call forwarding setting refer to Remote Call Forwarding Set even if it was already enabled Telephone numbers set here will not be effective until remote call forwarding is reset If you do not reset remote call forwarding calls will be forwarded to the old telephone numbers User Manual 2 2 2 Message Manager Features To customise the message manager s mai
315. s the call i e if you do not answer if you are on another call or if you have set Call Blocking it will be transferred to your Covering Extension if you have set Incomplete Call Handling to Transfer to Covering Extension refer to Incomplete Call Handling By pressing the specified dialling key 0 3 9 If the caller presses the key assigned for Transfer to the Specified Extension during your greeting message or while recording a message for you the call will be transferred to your Covering Extension assign the Transfer to Operator option in your Personal Custom Service to a dialling key callers who press that dialling key will be transferred to your Covering Extension refer to Personal Custom Service e If you do not assign your Covering Extension callers will be transferred to the operator instead i You can change the dialling key that transfers your callers to your Covering Extension If you aa User Manual 171 1 8 5 Transferring Calls 172 To assign your Covering Extension PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt C5 C2 gt Enter 52 Enter the desired extension number If you have already assigned your Covering Extension and want to assign a different extension press 1 before entering the desired extension number Enter 2 to accept On hook N e Once you assign a Covering Extension remember to tell callers in your greeting message that they can press the button y
316. saging system as a subscriber you need to know the following information The System Manager can help you if you do not know this information The extension number that you should dial in order to access the Unified Messaging system Your mailbox number and extension number In many cases these are the same number but it is possible they are not e Your mailbox password if set e The System Manager s telephone number The System Manager is the person you should refer to when you have any problems with the Unified Messaging system Prompts Prompts are recorded voice guidance messages that help you set and use Unified Messaging system features Prompts also help callers when the system is handing their calls Depending on how your Unified Messaging system is programmed subscribers and callers can select the language they prefer for system prompts lt Prompt example gt To leave a message press 1 Please leave a message at the tone To end recording hang up or press 1 for more features me e Not all prompts are described in each operation J e The prompts in each operation are not exactly the same as the actual prompts you will hear from the Unified Messaging system Follow the instructions provided by the voice guidance User Manual 1 8 2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox 1 8 2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox Logging in to Your Mailbox Subscriber Tutorial Easy Mailbox Configuration C
317. same way as the Message button EE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Message button or Message for Another Extension button Joining an Existing Call Executive Busy Override The preprogrammed extension can call someone who is busy on the telephone and establish a three party conversation After pressing a DSS button you can check the caller information of the call to another extension on the display before establishing a three party conversation 46 User Manual 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer To join an intercom call PT SLT PS Party joining the call A busy tone is heard and the caller information of the call to another extension is displayed D gt a2 gt 2 bd SDN 2 ORJ extension no B Tone Press red DSS or SDN or dial extension number Off hook Enter 3 Talk A three party conversation S is now established Parties in the conversation During a conversation 2 4 C Tone Talk To join an outside call Party joining the call Oj S gt 2 GJ one 4 SDN Press red CO or SDN Enter 3 Talk A three party conversation is now established Parties in the conversation During a conversation a 4 C Tone Talk x SIP phone users cannot use this feature but other extensions can call them using Executive gt Busy Override FH To join another conversation you must have Executive Busy Override ena
318. se Group FWD Both calls Used to forward all the calls to your group to a specified destination Group FWD Outside calls Used to forward the outside calls to your group to a specified destination Group FWD Intercom calls Used to forward the intercom calls to your group to a specified destination Account Used to enter an account code Conference Used to establish a multiple party conversation Terminate Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up External Feature Access EFA Used to access special features offered by a host PBX or a telephone company Call Charge Reference Used to check the total call charge for your own extension Call Park Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset parking zone Call Park Automatic Park Zone Used to park a call in an idle parking zone automatically For KX UT series SIP phones except KX UT113 KX UT123 pressing this button selects an idle parking zone from among the Call Park preset parking zone buttons configured on the phone Set both the Call Park Automatic Park Zone button and the Call Park Preset Parking Zone button Call Log Used to show the incoming call information Call Log for ICD Group Used to have a Call Log button for incoming call distribution group Log in Log out Used to switch between the log in and log out mode Log in Log out of a specified group
319. ser Manual 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer To answer while hearing a callback ringing PT SLT PS X Off hook To cancel CCBS Cancel PT SLT PS S gt Gaaace E C Tone Off hook Enter 46 On hook x e If you do not answer within a specified time period this feature will be cancelled j e Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company Sending a Call Waiting Notification Call Waiting You can inform the called party that your call is waiting This feature is also known as Busy Station Signalling BSS PT SLT PS While hearing a busy tone 5 Enter 1 a e Depending on the type of the other party s telephone you may be able to talk to the other party using the speaker and the microphone Off hook Call Announcement OHCA or you can send a call announcement through the handset Whisper OHCA if they are having another conversation using the handset Refer to 1 9 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA e Depending on system programming and the called extension s setting a call waiting tone may be sent automatically without performing the operation above User Manual 43 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer Leaving a Message Waiting Indication Calling Back the Caller Who Left an Indication Message Waiting 44 For an extension le
320. signed to ask questions to callers and record their answers If you have an interview mailbox not all subscribers do you can record up to 10 questions and set the answer recording time individually for each question from 1 to 60 seconds Your interview mailbox can be used for example to allow callers to place orders or request information from your company You can ask them to record their names address and order or request information and then you can note their information later while playing back their messages a e Ifyou would like to use this feature you must first be assigned an Interview Mailbox For more information consult your System Administrator To record questions PT SLT PS SIP Extn CD Change record or re record this question 2 Skip to the next question then repeat this step Log in to your mailbox gt C9 21 gt Skip to the previous question then repeat this step PP 4 Select a specific question Enter 921 Enter the question number and then repeat this step Enter the desired option To continue A k gt 1 gt 2 gt BS If finished go on hook Record the question Enter 1 Enter 2 3 gt y to end recording to accept On hook User Manual 177 1 8 6 Other Features To change answer lengths PT SLT PS SIP Extn Change the answer length CZJ Skip to the next question then repeat this step Log in to your mailbox gt C9 C2 2 D gt 3 Skip to t
321. ssage Waiting Indication Calling Back the Caller Who Left an Indication 4 4 v v v Message Waiting Joining an Existing Call Executive Busy V Vv Override Monitoring Another Extension Call Monitor v v v To an Extension Refusing the Call DND 7 v s Override 1 2 5 Accessing the ISDN Service ISDN Service j Access 1 2 6 Alternating the Calling Method Alternate J V Vv Calling Ring Voice 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions Using Your Calling Privileges at Another 7 y V Extension Remote COS Access 1 2 9 Setting Your Telephone from Another V 7 Extension or through DISA Remote Setting 1 3 1 Answering Calls v v v v v 1 3 2 Answering Hands free Hands free z V p Answerback 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup Answering a Call from Another Telephone 7 Call Pickup Answering a Call from Another Telephone 2 Call Pickup Group Monitor Denying Other People the Possibility of Y Y V 7 Picking Up Your Calls Call Pickup Deny 1 3 4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker yf V Vv Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 1 3 5 Using the ANSWER RELEASE Button v 1 3 6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties Malicious Y Call Identification MCID User Manual 363 5 1 1 List of Operations by Telephone Type Telephone Type SIP phone Features PT PS
322. ssages If you cannot answer calls you can forward them to your mailbox You can select the type of incoming calls Intercom Calls Outside Calls Both Calls that are forwarded If your telephone has a Message button the Message light turns on when a message is left in your mailbox You will hear an indication tone when going off hook regardless of whether or not your telephone has a Message button You can also create a Voice Mail Transfer button on your phone to transfer received outside calls to a mailbox of another extension so that calling parties can leave messages Voice Mail Transfer The duration for recording depends on the Voice Processing System Using the Voice Mail Transfer button you can also perform the following operations with one touch for digital integration only To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing To transfer your own call to the called extension s mailbox To listen to messages User Manual 1 11 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected To forward your calls to your mailbox PT SLT PS CoD Both Calls Cancel ORJ All Calls A gt CILA gt Q Outside Calls gt B sy No Answer C253 Intercom Calls Busy No Answer Off hook Enter 71 Enter 0 to 2 as you desire Enter required number For Cancel go on hook directly after entering 0 voice mail floating Ge gt gt D kr T Enter voice mail floating Enter extension number To forward a call to you
323. stomising the Buttons Create or edit a Check in or a Check out button 238 User Manual 1 12 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features Setting a Timed Reminder to a Room Extension Remote Wake up Call The hotel operator can remotely set or cancel a Timed Reminder to a room extension This allows guests to request wake up calls without having to program the extension themselves The hotel operator can also confirm the current Timed Reminder setting for a room extension To set S gt amaaa gt gt DSS Off hook Enter 76 Enter 1 Dial extension number or press desired DSS Co am 12 H houriminute gt n Once a C1 m a 24 H C1 Paiy Enter 0 for once On hook Enter hour 01 12 and minute 00 59 and then or 1 for daily 0 for AM or 1 for PM Or enter hour 00 23 and minute 00 59 a Enter the time in the format assigned to your PBX 12 hour or 24 hour To cancel gt AALALA gt 10 gt D DSS Off hook Enter 76 Enter 0 Dial extension number On hook or press desired DSS User Manual 239 1 12 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features To confirm Display PT extension no SS gt Wma gt gt Off hook o DSS Enter 76 Enter 2 Dial extension number or press desired DSS The display shows Timed Reminder information On hook Timed Re
324. stomising the Message Manager s Mailbox User Manual 2 2 2 Message Manager Features To assign Remote Call Forwarding set 1 Log in to the Message Manager s mailbox 2 5 3 Select the desired forwarding setting for FWD All for FWD Busy for FWD No Answer for FWD Busy or No Answer for FWD to Outside then go to step 6 for FWD Cancel then go to step 9 GiGiololsis gt Enter the extension number 5 2 to accept the extension number then go to step 10 e Enter 1 to change the extension number then go to step 4 6 Enter the desired number C1 for telephone number 1 then go to step 8 C2 for telephone number 2 then go to step 8 C3 for another telephone number e Before you can forward your calls to telephone number 1 or 2 you should first store the telephone numbers you plan on using with this feature 7 Enter the telephone number 0 9 max 32 digits e Make sure you begin the telephone number with an outside line access number to seize an outside line 8 2 to accept then go to step 10 e Enter 1 to change the telephone number then go to step 6 9 2 to accept 10 The new settings are transmitted to the system If the setting has been completed properly you will hear Call forwarding accepted or Call forwarding is cancelled as appropriate a e If the system announces Call forwarding not accepted Please check the destination number the
325. t Tocancel 730 User Manual 5 3 1 Feature Number Table Default Feature While dial tone is heard New Additional digits buttons 1 9 11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring Parallelled Telephone 39 Ring 1 NoRing 0 1 9 12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a 48 Wired Telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Toset 1 paired wired extension no To cancel 0 1 9 13 Using Your phone in Parallel with a Wired Telephone One numbered extension X48 Toset 1 paired wired extension no To cancel 0 To pickup the call 41 paired wired extension no 1 9 14 Clearing Features Set at Your 790 Extension Extension Feature Clear 1 10 1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out Wrap up Log in 736 1 ICD Group extension no Log out 0 ICD Group extension no To enter leave Not Ready mode X735 1 Not Ready 0 Ready 4 10 2 Monitoring and Controlling the ICD Group extension no Call Status of an Incoming Call 739 Distribution Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor 1 11 1 Ifa Doorphone Door Opener is Connected Doorphone Call 31 doorphone no 2 digits Opening a Door Door Open 55 doorphone no 2 digits 1 11 2 If an External Relay is 56 relay no 2 digits Connected 1 11 4 If a Host PBX is Connected User Manual 381 5 3 1 Featu
326. t d Click OK 3 Select the target time period for the ACD report on Group Filter Settings Select Period 4 To show the report on a group basis perform the following steps a Click View Report The ACD Report Group Report screen is displayed The filtered data is shown as follows 356 User Manual 4 1 3 Supervisory Monitor ACD Control Group Incoming Calls Total The number of incoming calls received by the target ICD group Answered The number of incoming calls answered by the target ICD group Lost The number of incoming calls to the target ICD group cancelled by the caller Overflow The number of overflowed incoming calls from the target ICD group Talk Time Total The total talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group HH MM SS Average The average talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group HH MM SS Max The longest talking time of answered calls for the target ICD group HH MM SS Wait Time Total The total waiting time of Answered answered calls for the target ICD group HH MM SS Average The average waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group HH MM SS Max The longest waiting time of answered calls for the target ICD group HH MM SS Wait Time Lost Total The total waiting time of cancelled calls for the target ICD group HH MM SS Average The average waiting time of cancelled calls for the t
327. t extension PIN you cannot lock and unlock your extension To make an outside call while your extension is locked PT SLT PS PIN Personal Identification Number your J desired ay gt Bam gt eaten C Tone amp D Tone Off hook Enter 47 Dial your Enter extension PIN Dial desired extension number max 10 digits phone number If the wrong extension PIN is Seize an outside line before entered you hear an alarm tone entering an outside phone number User Manual 117 1 6 3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone Extension Dial Lock o After you make an outside call Extension Dial Lock is automatically activated again 8 118 User Manual 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Your PBX can provide you with answering machine service Your extension is assigned a message box into which callers can leave voice messages for you After callers reach your message box they will hear your personal greeting message You can record two kinds of personal greetings a normal greeting message and a greeting message for each time mode You can also play back and clear your greeting messages and the voice messages left by callers Recording a Normal Greeting Message Recording a Greeting Message for Each Time Mode Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message Box Leaving Voice Messages Listening to Voice
328. t supported for that telephone type e Some operations of these features may not be supported by a certain telephone type For details refer to the each section s operations Telephone Type SIP phone Features PT PS SLT Non KAUT CUT series series 1 2 1 Basic Calling Calling Another Extension v Calling an Outside Party Making a Call to a Private Network TIE Line 7 J Access Using an Account Code Account Code y vi P of Entry 1 2 2 Easy Dialling With a One touch Button One touch Y y yt Dialling Using Numbers Stored at Your Extension Y ye Vv Personal Speed Dialling Using Numbers Stored in the PBX System V y V j V Speed Dialling To a Preset Number by Going Off hook Hot V Line Using a Preprogrammed Number Quick 2 Dialling 1 2 3 Redial v v v v v 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer Reserving a Busy Line Automatic Callback V J Busy Setting Callback on an ISDN Line V yp Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 362 User Manual 5 1 1 List of Operations by Telephone Type Telephone Type SIP phone Features PT PS SLT Non REUT I GUT series series Sending a Call Waiting Notification Call y V Waiting Leaving a Me
329. t you have new messages Toll Saver feature For more information an consult your System Administrator User Manual 157 1 8 3 Message Playback and Related Features Remote manual log in From Outside Telephone Call the Unified z Messaging system from gt C JC6 gt gt your password C gt gt gnoutsideitelephong Enter 6 Enter and your Enter your password and mailbox number This step can be omitted if your mailbox requires no password EDEB Call an extension gt A gt OO gt ee CDG Call the operator Enter 9 On hook Follow the prompts when finished or enter 8 or 80 Enter 1 to play back new messages o CAUTION e Itis strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access e To avoid unauthorised access to the PBX keep the password secret If it becomes known to others the PBX may be misused e Change the password periodically Notice e When disabling the password requirement ensure that an unauthorised third party is not allowed access to your extension 158 User Manual 1 8 4 Sending Messages 1 8 4 Sending Messages Message Delivery Personal Group Distribution Lists External Message Delivery External Message Delivery Lists Receiving External Delivery Messages You can record messages and send them to other subscribers to extension users who do not have mailboxes and even to outside parties Messages can be
330. talk to the new party PT PS KX UT series During a conversation with an outside party During a conversation with an outside party desired i yj desired service ar Yi coca gt FA r3 TRANSFER C gt CILA Press FLASH RECALL or EFA Enter desired Press Recall Enter 60 Enter desired Or press TRANSFER and service code hookswitch service code then enter 60 For KX UT series press FLASH RECALL p e In this case the FLASH RECALL button on a proprietary telephone or KX UT series SIP phone must be set to External Feature Access EFA mode through system programming Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit an External Feature Access EFA button User Manual 227 1 11 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected 1 11 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected 228 You or an outside party can access the Voice Processing System from a telephone Call Forwarding to Voice Mail Voice Mail Integration If your PBX has a Panasonic Voice Processing System connected e g KX TVM series using digital integration the following features are also available Screening Calls Live Call Screening LCS Recording a Conversation pe e Voice Processing System features are not available for SIP phone users Call Forwarding to Voice Mail Voice Mail Integration To forward your calls to your mailbox To transfer a call to a mailbox To listen to me
331. tececccace ce cecansccentnccsreceseeveriteeetaceeeceeeenteevne 265 2 1 Control Features usiusitai aaa a a ea aaia aaaea 266 2 1 1 Extension Control issieniicaornnndiei orni a a EE EA OEA EEE 266 10 User Manual Table of Contents 2 1 2 Time Service Mode Control ssssssssessesssesririesestetttttirrritttttettttitttnntnnteesssrtnnnnnnananseeennn 267 2 1 3 Restriction Level Control Dial Tone Transfer 2 2 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 269 2 1 4 Turning on the External Background Music BGM 2 cccccessseessseeeeeeneneeeeeeeees 270 2 1 5 Recording Outgoing Messages OGM isc ccscesciteceaviceucesssriceen tarts desdeeeaeeaaeees 271 2 1 6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line Trunk Busy Out 20 273 2 1 7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Monitor aeee 274 2 2 Configuring Unified Messaging Features ccsseseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeneeeeenes 275 2 2 1 System Manager Features cacccvsncernienatsvatenndeusa ees Ww auete ciceed eaitnaaieareeleeeaedene 275 2 2 2 Message Manager Features ing csecec ccc cctetsen decide cteacanandasdasvugesadinsbecssocthecetecdendearacgasanioers 288 3 Customising Your Phone amp System cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 305 3 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 306 3 1 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming c
332. ted Call Pickup 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup User Manual 1 14 3 Accessing System Features System Feature Access Features Refer to Directed Group Call Pickup 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup Data Line Security 1 9 9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones Data Line Security aa For KX UT670 users Tap Feature access code instead of pressing Up or Down User Manual 257 1 14 4 Self Labelling KX NT366 KX NT553 KX NT556 KX NT560 KX UT248 KX UT670 only 1 14 4 Self Labelling KX NT366 KX NT553 KX NT556 KX NT560 KX UT248 KX UT670 only The KX NT366 KX NT553 KX NT556 KX NT560 IP PT and KX UT248 KX UT670 SIP phone have flexible buttons with an LCD screen next to the buttons For KX NT366 The KX NT366 IP PT has 12 flexible buttons and the telephone s display shows which feature telephone number or extension number is assigned to each button You can press the NEXT PAGE key to display 3 other sets pages of 12 flexible button assignments A different feature telephone number or extension number can be assigned to each button in each set This means that 48 flexible buttons are available For KX NT553 KX NT556 The KX NT553 KX NT556 IP PT has 12 flexible buttons and the telephone s display shows which feature telephone number or extension number is assigned to each button You
333. telephone with a special feature button such as or a display or both you can follow the operations using the buttons or displayed messages for easy programming If you use a large display telephone e g KX NT346 or KX T7636 you can follow the displayed messages to use the features If your telephone does not have feature buttons and or a display you may operate the PBX by entering a feature number instead Follow the operation for your type of telephone e Ifyou use a Panasonic proprietary i telephone which does not have feature EE buttons you may change one of the unused flexible buttons to a feature button Refer to 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Registration for your Portable Station PS SIP Phone Your PS or SIP phone must be registered with the PBX and assigned an extension number before initial use through system programming To confirm the extension number of your PS refer to Your extension information in 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode For SIP phone users follow the instructions for your phone Feature Numbers To use certain features you need to enter specified feature numbers and an additional parameter if required There are two types of feature numbers as follows e Flexible feature number e Fixed feature number Fixed feature numbers cannot be changed However you can change the flexible numbers to other numbers for easier use In this manual the default numbers factory installed are used
334. ten to background music 2 208 User Manual 1 9 9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones Data Line Security 1 9 9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones Data Line Security You can protect the line against audible notification tones such as a call waiting tone during a conversation Set this feature if your extension has a data communication device such as a PC or fax machine connected to ensure secure data transmission To set cancel PT SLT PS SIP Extn C1 set 5 D Co Cancel C Tone Off hook Enter 730 Enter 1 to set On hook or 0 to cancel SS gt GaGaGaas gt User Manual 209 1 9 10 Checking the Time Service Status 1 9 10 Checking the Time Service Status You can check the current status of the Time Service on the display Ef While on hook r TRANSFER Time Service Day Night Lunch Break Press TRANSFER or Time Service Day Night Lunch Break e The Time Service Day Night Lunch Break button light shows the current status as follows gt Off Day mode Green on Lunch mode Flashing green Break mode Red on Night mode Flashing red Holiday mode e Any extension user except the managers can check the current status by pressing the Time Service Day Night Lunch Break button Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Time Service Day Night Lunch Break button 210 User Manual 1 9 11 Setting the Parallelled Tel
335. ten to messages The Message Manager can monitor the status of the General Delivery Mailbox through his or her mailbox He or she can listen to the messages stored in the General Delivery Mailbox and if necessary transfer them to their intended recipients 290 User Manual 2 2 2 Message Manager Features 1 Log in to the Message Manager s mailbox C1 to receive the message 3 Enter the desired number C1 to listen to new messages C2 to listen to old messages C3 to listen to deleted messages 4 The system plays each message identifying the sender and indicating when the message was recorded to repeat this message C1 to replay the previous message to play the next message C1 C1 2 C3 to delete this new old message or recover this deleted message 4 to reply to this new old message C5 to transfer this new old message 6 to listen to the message envelope e System programming determines if the message envelope is played before each message after each message or only when you press 6 to pause or restart the message during playback 4 to increase playback volume during playback C5 to set a Bookmark for the voice message during voice message playback C6 to start playback at the Bookmark for the voice message C9 to fast forward during playback C to save as new when the new message is listened CO to listen to the entire menu To transfer messages Messages left
336. ternately Call Splitting 0000 sssseessseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeena 77 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting csscersscieeieteuscverd ct teeterctai Gia Wacees scced ate bc bo sdenetaeeaeesuisgaaceenaneons 79 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation nee Meret eee eee eer eer er er Peter ner errr eeiere mere rarer rere etter etre mre 85 1 4 6 11 gt Gate ee see tere me eee ere Ne ee ne eee ee cer ere ae ee eee 96 1 4 7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation Off hook Monitor eeeeee 97 1 4 8 Using the Headset Headset Operation cescicirdinictinsssacsaatcthiecctececidedinvdnaeviaseiescieiecties 98 1 5 Using a PON SDN Bt sicsseeswscennstesnicnnecacuccamenteeesatinansnredecsaaaniceeseonstunniennianaaaruenuns 100 1 5 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN PS MS OM cestectet reesei a tec irene a EE E aE E dea S E EEO RAEE 100 1 6 Before Leaving Your Desk sssssssseessssnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnn 104 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls ssar arae n EE e a E A EA 104 1 6 2 Showing a Message on the Callers Telephone Display Absent Message 115 1 6 3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone Extension Dial Lock 117 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM eccceeee 119 1 7 Making Answering an Announcement cccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeennees 130 1 7 1 PING cat cscs E A
337. the FWD DND status and set the forward destination for outside oP intercom calls with the FWD DND button fixed button For PT users it is also possible to set outside telephone numbers e g your cellular phone as forward destinations for up to 4 Virtual PSs in an Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group to ring together with other ICD Group members for calls to the group The following settings are available e Switching the FWD DND status and setting FWD destination for outside intercom calls e Timer for No Answer and Busy No Answer e Forwarding status on off and outside destinations to ring in parallel for outside calls for up to 4 virtual PSs in an ICD Group Virtual PS a e A virtual PS is a dedicated Talk e extension number assigned to a pO ta a a gt non existent portable station H ai ve PS to allow access to outside destinations such as a cellular phone A soe Pee eee eee ee XS gt Virtual PS Re il unun C Dials 301 gt Extn No 301 xtn 5 x e For KX UT670 SIP phone users There is no physical FWD DND button on the phone To set and clear the FWD DND status refer to the documentation for your phone User Manual 109 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls To switch FWD DND status for outside calls While on hook when in FWD DND Setting Mode gt The current FWD DND status for outside calls is displayed Press the fixed Press the fixed FWD DND FWD DND button button again
338. the Flexible Buttons in Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console in 3 2 1 User Programming For the KX UT248 the display shows a maximum of 10 characters for each button For the KX UT670 you can specify up to 12 characters but some characters may not be displayed depending on the characters used 260 User Manual 1 15 1 Cellular Phone Features 1 15 Cellular Phone Features 1 15 1 Cellular Phone Features When you are not at your desk or not in the office and receive a forwarded outside call on your cellular phone you can use the following features if enabled through system programming gt Transferring to an Extension in the PBX Transferring to a Private Network TIE Line Access Transferring to an Outside Phone Number Adding Other Parties during a Conversation Conference Talking to Two Parties Alternately Call Splitting Paging and then Transferring a Call e Some features may not be available for cellular phones depending on the type of outside line being used Uy ooo Transferring to an Extension in the PBX To transfer Cellular Phone During a conversation CGO 2 Cmno Co gt amp D Tone Enter Dial extension number Talk On hook This step can be omitted o When transferring a call from an analogue trunk you cannot talk to the destination party after N ap f dialling an extension number e You cannot transfer a call to a DISA floating extension number
339. the Unified Messaging system 140 Introduction to the Unified Messaging system Your PBX can provide you with Unified Messaging system service You or an outside party can access the Unified Messaging system from a telephone As the owner of a mailbox you can Send a message to one or more people inside or outside your office Transfer messages to other subscribers and add your own comments e Access your mailbox and listen to your messages even when out of the office Have the Unified Messaging system call or e mail you when someone leaves you a message Be notified by the message waiting lamp on your extension when new messages have been recorded in your mailbox e Screen your calls e Create a set of options and functions exclusive to your mailbox Personal Custom Service that can be selected by your callers e Voice and e mail messages can be managed in a single inbox using the Communication Assistant plug in for Microsoft Outlook e Voice and e mail messages can be managed via an e mail client that supports IMAP4 e Many other useful messaging features ae e PBX users who are assigned a mailbox in the Unified Messaging system are called subscribers EF e Hospitality Mode If your service mode is set to Hospitality Mode available features such as listening to messages personal greetings etc may be limited according to the COS settings for your mailbox Before You Begin In order to use the Unified Mes
340. ther party is on hold you can swap the calls back and forth alternately x e KX UT series SIP phone users You cannot leave the conversation and let the two remaining parties talk To alternate between the parties leaving one party on hold temporarily PT PS KX UT series During a conversation T A ga pen CI cioe a a os Press TRANSFER Press DSS or dial the other Talk to the Press TRANSFER Talk to the party s extension number other party original party For KX UT670 Press Swap The other party will be on hold During a conversation Poo p TEAN cms a ty gt Gh Press Recall Dial the other party s Talk to the Press Recall Talk to the hookswitch extension number other party hookswitch original party The other party will be on hold KX UT113 KX UT123 During a conversation C Tone D P Cem gt gt rd Press HOLD Dial the other Talk to the Press HOLD Talk to the party s extension other party original party number The other party will be on hold User Manual 77 1 4 3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately Call Splitting KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 During a conversation ap 2 7 aT be CC C Tone t E Press HOLD Dial the other Talk to the party s onen other party Press HOLD This step can be omitted if Automatic Call Hold is enabled on your telephone m i S CO Press the flashing DN Talk to the or S CO original party
341. tification Restriction COLR When receiving an outside call you can select whether the caller can see your telephone number or not To show prevent PT SLT PS SIP Extn 0 show LOR 1 Prevent Off hook Enter 7 0 Enter 0 to show On hook or 1 to prevent SS gt amam gt a e You can change the mode by pressing a preset COLR button while on hook There is no COLR button on KX UT series SIP phones The COLR button light shows the current status as follows Off shows your telephone number Red on prevents your telephone number being displayed e Availability of this feature depends on the ISDN service of your telephone company Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR button User Manual 205 1 9 6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party s Telephone Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR 1 9 6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party s Telephone Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR When making an outside call you can select whether the called party can see your telephone number or not To show prevent PT SLT PS SIP Extn Sh p e gt 4 Prevent Off hook Enter 7 1 Enter 0 to show On hook or 1 to prevent X gt aaa gt me e You can change the mode by pressing a preset CLIR button while on hook There is no CLIR button on KX UT series SIP phon
342. to the specified Custom Service Incomplete Call Handling for Busy Specifies how the scenario handles a call when the destination is busy More than one option can be selected e Leave a Message Allows the caller to record a message e Transfer to a covering extension Transfers the caller to a covering extension e Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging Pages you by intercom e Transfer to operator Transfers the caller to an operator e Return to top menu Lets the caller return to top menu and try another extension e Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu Transfers the caller to the specified Custom Service Scenario Setting You can select scenarios set in Advanced Call Transfer Setting A scenario can be set temporarily or scenarios can be selected for use according to the Absent Message setting of your extension e Current Scenario The scenario that is assigned to the absent message currently set at your extension is displayed here Temporary Scenario Setting a scenario here will use that scenario indefinitely A scenario set here will be used regardless of your extension status Selecting None will remove the setting e Absent Message 1 9 The selected scenario will be used when the corresponding Absent Message is set at your extension User Manual 331 3 2 1 User Programming 332 Notification Parameters Item Description Message Waiting Lamp If set to Enable the
343. to several outside parties and extension users who do not have their own mailboxes at once refer to External Message Delivery You can create and edit 2 External Message Delivery Lists and these lists can only be used by you You can assign up to 8 members to each list and record a name for each member o e This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator A User Manual 1 8 4 Sending Messages To create add to an external message delivery list PT SLT PS SIP Extn Ci List number 1 Log into your mailbox gt 9 3 2 gt D gt 1 p gt 2 List number 2 Enter 932 Enter 1 or 2 Enter 1 da di outside p gt gt cme gt Gm Enter the outside line access number Dial the outside telephone number Enter 2 to accept needed for making outside calls including area code if needed To store an extension number simply enter the extension number then skip the next step J es EB EB State the member s Enter 1 Enter 2 to add to end recording the member To continue Enter 1 or 2 On hook a e If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialling mode to insert a pause or special command in the middle of the telephone number pause momentarily while entering the telephone number You will hear a list of available options for example To add more digits press 4 To insert a pause press 5 To delete members from an external message delivery list PT S
344. to switch the status To switch FWD DND status for intercom calls While on hook when in FWD DND Setting Mode gt The current FWD DND status gt for intercom calls is displayed Press the fixed Press the fixed FWD DND FWD DND button button again to switch the status a When you switch the FWD DND status any FWD destination that was set previously is not cleared 110 User Manual 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls To set and clear FWD DND for outside intercom calls While on hook when in FWD DND Setting Mode mr ele D gt EWO OND C Outside Calls AUTO DIAL gt gt 2 Intercom Calls STORE Press the fixed FWD DND button Enter 1 or 2 Press STORE C FWDIDND off CD DND on Enter 0 or 1 LOR C FWD AII Calls destination extension no 3 FWD Busy gt 4 FWD No Answer outside line p outside 3 FWD Busy No Answer access no phone no a max 32 digits Enter 2 to 5 Enter destination extension number or outside line access number and then outside phone number o e This step can be omitted 5 gt gt AUTO DIAL STORE Press STORE to set A confirmation tone will be heard User Manual 111 1 6 1 Forwarding Calls To set and clear FWD DND for all calls KX UT113 KX UT123 KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 While on hook FWD DND Off FWD DND off Do Not Disturb DND on lt ole ORJ FORWARD gt DO NOT DISTURB destination FWD A11 FWD A
345. to your home consult your dealer or local power company e For safety purposes some products are equipped with an earthed plug If you do not have an earthed outlet please have one installed Do not bypass this safety feature by tampering with the plug e Regularly clean dust off of all equipment Excessive amounts of dust can lead to fire or electric shock and may impair the performance of the product e Unplug the product from the wall outlet and contact your dealer in the following cases a When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed b If liquid has been spilled into the product c Ifthe product has been exposed to rain or water d Ifthe product does not operate according to the operating instructions Adjust only the controls that are explained in the operating instructions Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and may require service by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged f If product performance deteriorates Do not insert foreign objects of any kind into this product as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock For the PBX User Manual 15 1 1 1 For Your Safety 16 Do not pull bend rest objects on or chafe the power cord and plug Damage to the power cord or plug can cause fire or electric shock Do not attempt to repa
346. tton assigned on his her extension User Manual 235 1 12 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features To check in Display PT While on hook ENTER p EE gt Check in DSS Check in Press Check in Dial extension number and then press Press YES Press EXIT ENTER or press desired DSS or Check in ae e After check in Remote Extension Dial Lock is deactivated and the guest can make outside calls from the room extension Refer to 2 1 1 Extension Control FH After check in all billing data previously charged to the extension will be cleared automatically e When the room status of extensions is changed detailed room status information is recorded automatically This requires system programming lt Example gt 02 02 00 03 07PM 1234 Check in Check out The hotel operator can change the room status of extensions to check out by using the Check out button assigned on his her extension Depending on the setting of the PBX the hotel operator can do the following e Record edit charges for Minibar Others e Print out an invoice containing charge information 236 User Manual 1 12 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features To check out a room with without printing an invoice Display PT While on hook To check out with an invoice PRINT gt NEXT ENTER EMER gt Cc gt Press PRINT Press NEXT p
347. u can disconnect it and then talk to the new party again During a conversation hg Press HOLD Talk to the original party INT INTERCOM Press CO ICD Group PDN SDN or INTERCOM Disregard this step if both parties are extensions D gt gt es Talk to the Off hook new party INT INTERCOM Press CO ICD Group PDN SDN or INTERCOM KX UT113 KX UT123 During a conversation a gt bs D gt amp gt h Press HOLD Talk to the On hook Off hook Press HOLD Talk to the original party new party 82 User Manual 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 During a conversation gt 3 4 S CO Press HOLD Press the flashing DN or S CO Talk to the original party 1 7 A gt hg 1E S CO On hook Off hook Press the flashing DN or S CO Talk to the new party During a conversation i e FFA C Tone Press Recall Talk to the hookswitch Enter 50 original party N gt ca 2 es C Tone Talk to the On hook Off hook Enter 50 new party N Depending on the type of your telephone you may be able to talk to the other party using the speaker and the microphone Off hook Call Announcement OHCA or you can receive an announcement through the handset Whisper OHCA if you are having a conversation using the handset Refer to 1 9 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announc
348. ult your manager The feature numbers have changed m Confirm the revised number and try again Even though following the manual instructions none of the operations work when using a proprietary telephone The Intercom line was not seized The seized line when going off hook was changed by personal setting 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode m In the manual going off hook means an Intercom line is seized If the setting has been changed press the INTERCOM or PDN button after going off hook and follow the instructions The parallelled single line telephones do not ring No ring may be selected Change the setting to ring 1 9 11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring Parallelled Telephone My proprietary telephone does not have a feature button Some models do not have the feature button m Change a flexible button to the desired button amp 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons mp Enter the specified feature number instead of the feature button gt 1 1 5 Before Operating the Telephones User Manual 5 2 1 Troubleshooting Problem Remedy A reorder tone is audible or Restricted is e The telephone is locked displayed m Unlock your telephone 1 1 6 3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone Extension Dial Lock 2 1 1 Extension Control e Toll restriction is activated mp Consult your manager or dealer e An account code is required amp
349. umber of only new voice messages in your mailbox when you log in Subscriber Service New Urgent Messages Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new messages marked as urgent in your mailbox when you log in Receiving Message Service All New Messages Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages Receiving Message Service All Messages Specifies if the system announces to you the number all messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages Receiving Message Service New Voice Messages Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new voice messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages Receiving Message Service New Urgent Messages Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new urgent messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages User Manual 339 3 2 1 User Programming Message Client Item Description Message Client Display Specifies the language of information generated by the UM system for the Language mail IMAP client Changing Forward Do Not Disturb Setting You can change your extension s Forward Do Not Disturb settings for outside and intercom calls in the Telephony Feature tab of the Edit User screen as EA 1 In the Telephony Feature tab set
350. unauthorised access to the PBX keep the password secret If it becomes known to others the PBX may be misused e Change the password periodically Edit User Screen The Edit User screen is displayed when you login to Web Maintenance Console On this screen you can edit various user settings Gus To finish editing click OK Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console Changing Your User Name and Displayed Language You can change your account s first name last name and displayed language in the User Information tab of the Edit User screen The information entered in First Name and Last Name are displayed on your telephone 1 Inthe User Information tab edit your First Name max 20 characters and Last Name max 20 characters a a and select the displayed language from the Change oa Language drop down list User Group 2 Click OK Changing Your Contact Information You can change your extension PIN and contact information home number mobile number fax number and e mail address in the Contact tab of the Edit User screen E mail address es specified in Email 1 3 in the Contact tab are used for e mail notifications of missed outside calls 324 User Manual 3 2 1 User Programming 1 Inthe Contact tab edit Extension PIN max 10 digits Fax Phone Home Phone Mobile and Email 1 3 Note Click Edit to edit the extension PIN Entry for the extension PIN is hidden and displayed as
351. up assigned as the operator PT SLT PS SIP Extn Off hook Enter 9 or 0 8 Calling an Outside Party You have to seize an outside line before dialling an outside phone number because external calls are made via your PBX Select one of the following methods e The operator call number default varies depending on country area To select an idle outside line automatically Automatic Line Access PT SLT PS SIP Extn oc L CO tsid A DED 4 Off hook Press L CO or Dial outside phone Talk enter automatic number line access number a e The automatic line access number default varies depending on country area To select an idle outside line in the specified outside line group automatically Outside Line Group Access PT SLT PS SIP Extn O ra outside S gt phone no outside line group no Off hook Press G CO or enter outside line Dial outside phone group access number and then number outside line group number 2 digits User Manual 33 1 2 1 Basic Calling To select the specified outside line PT PS KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 gt co Fa N Fa no E Off hook Press S CO Dial outside phone Talk number a e Each of the S CO button or G CO button light shows the current status as follows Off The line is idle Red on The line is in use You may be restricted from making a call to the specified outside party To make a call refer to 1 2 7 C
352. users a Operations that use feature numbers are limited Also flexible buttons are only available for certain KX UT series SIP phone models Refer to the telephone types displayed at the top left of each operation b A maximum of 32 digits can be input on a KX UT series SIP phone at one time including feature numbers etc c To execute certain operations you may be required to press the ENTER button on a KX UT series SIP phone during the operation The following 5 operations are examples Examples To select an idle outside line automatically PT SLT PS SIP Extn AN te outside gt e gt gt t Off hook E For KX UT series enter Press ENTER Press L CO or Dial outside phone enter automatic number line access number To call with a verification code PIN Personal Identification Number PT SLT PS SIP Extn S gt a gt gt Co gt gt Off hook Enter 47 Enter Enter verification code max 4 digits P verification code PIN ob A Cahn D Tone 5 For KX UT series d Press ENTER Dial desired phone number Enter verification code PIN max 10 digits Seize an outside line before entering an outside phone number If a wrong verification code PIN is entered you hear an alarm tone To transfer to an outside party using the PBX service SIP Extn During a conversation a For KX UT serie
353. using Web Maintenance Console After logging in the system will announce the number of total messages the number of new messages or the length of new messages These announcements depend on the mailbox settings and COS settings for the Message Manager If there are new messages in the mailbox the messages will be played automatically The Message Manager can listen to them continuously without listening to the system prompts This feature is only available when Autoplay New Message is activated for the Message Manager s COS For more information on logging in refer to Logging in to Your Mailbox Manager Service switching You can switch mailboxes simply by pressing from the subscriber service menu in the following order Po service gt Message Manager service gt System Manager service 7 2 2 2 Message Manager Features a e For KX UT series SIP phone users When using the MESSAGE button please press the MESSAGE button before going off hook Manual log in PT SLT PS SIP Extn Bs MESSAGE Message Manager s D gt G amp G ae gt Transfer Off hook F Enter 6 Enter and Message Manager s UM group s floating mailbox number default 998 extension no Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail Transfer or enter UM group s floating extension number gt gt Message Manager password gt ve Message Manager s allDOx Enter Message Manager password and Automatic lo
354. ustomising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit an Account button 36 User Manual 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 1 2 2 Easy Dialling This is convenient for frequently dialled phone numbers With a One touch Button One touch Dialling Using Numbers Stored at Your Extension Personal Speed Dialling Using Numbers Stored in the PBX System Speed Dialling To a Preset Number by Going Off hook Hot Line Using a Preprogrammed Number Quick Dialling l e e ee With a One touch Button One touch Dialling You can store a phone number into the flexible button for one touch operation T PT PS KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 Q gt One touch amp Dialling Off hook Press One touch Dialling im Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a One touch Dialling button store the desired phone number or feature number Using Numbers Stored at Your Extension Personal Speed Dialling You can store up to 100 numbers at your extension for your personal use This feature is also known as Station Speed Dialling To store a phone number PT SLT SIP Extn personal speed desired D SY gt aaa gt gt tetera gt CO oF Fe Off hook Enter 30 Enter personal speed Enter desired On hook dialling number phone number Enter 2 digits max 32 digits Enter outside line access number before outside phone number User Manual 37 1 2 2 Easy Dialling
355. utside party s telephone number needed for making number max 32 digits including outside calls outside line access number STEP B gt gt 2 Enter 2 to accept User Manual 173 1 8 5 Transferring Calls pe This option is announced only if you are authorised to use it through system programming gt for PBX COS Class of Service settings and UM COS settings For more information consult your System Administrator Assigning and Cancelling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to Outside Line When you assign a telephone number for Call Transfer to Outside Line your calls will be transferred to the assigned telephone number when e You have set Call Screening refer to Call Transfer e You have set Disable Call Transfer refer to Call Transfer To assign telephone numbers for call transfer to outside line PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt C56 gt Enter 56 Enter the outside line access number needed for making outside calls If you have already stored a telephone number and wish to change it press 1 before continuing outside party s gt gt DR Dial the outside party s telephone number Enter 2 to accept On hook max 32 digits including outside line access number To cancel telephone numbers for call transfer to outside line PT SLT PS SIP Extn Log in to your mailbox gt 5 C6 3 gt Go y Enter 563 On hook o e This feature must
356. voice messages that have previously been listened to Please note that the information shown on the display may vary depending on the information that was received and the type of telephone used Only users of a 6 line display PT can view all of the above information You can lock the SVM Log display by using an extension PIN Personal Identification Number to prevent other users from viewing the information and from playing back your voice messages Display Lock Refer to 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode If your telephone has a Message for Another Extension button you can access the message box of another extension and listen to voice messages for that extension If a new voice message has been left in your message box you will hear dial tone 4 after going off hook In addition if your telephone has a Message button or Message Ringer Lamp the corresponding button or lamp will light when a voice message has been left Dial Tone 4 1s lt gt i i fo D0 User Manual 1 6 4 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM To listen to voice messages while your display is locked PIN Personal Identification Number SS gt GGG gt celine gt C Pb C Tone amp D Tone Off hook Enter 47 Dial your Enter extension PIN extension number max 10 digits If the wrong extension PIN is entered you hear an alarm tone gt gt a gt 3 Enter 38 Enter 3 aS e When you press th
357. wake up call The alarm can occur either once or daily every day until cancelled at a preset time When you go off hook to answer you will hear a special dial tone or prerecorded message User Manual 189 1 8 6 Other Features To set cancel PT SLT SIP Extn CD Change the setting P 2 Accept the current setting eer gt Lo L5 gt then go on hook to finish C3 Cancel turn off the Timed Reminder Enter 95 ah then go on hook to finish Enter the desired option Ci AM CD Once E gt gt Caram GD gt e gt e gt MD PM 2 Daily Enter the desired time and Enter 1 for AM Enter 1 for once Enter 2 On hook 2 for PM or 2 for daily to accept Jd e 1 Example To enter 5 00 press 5 To enter 5 15 press 515 e 2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24 hour time aa Setting Absent Message Remotely You can set your absent message by accessing the subscriber service menu To login to your mailbox from an outside telephone refer to Remote Access To set cancel From Outside Telephone CD Change the setting 2 Accept the current setting Log int ilbox Gola your mailbox then go on hook to finish C3 Cancel your absent message then go on hook to finish Enter the desired option absent message no Enter an Absent Message Number 1 9 190 User Manual 1 8 6 Other Features Call through Service
358. when the system calls the recipient e Auto Forwarding Moves or copies unplayed messages from one mailbox to another after a specified period of time To create edit delete any mailbox parameter Log in to the System subscriber s gt gt gt gt Enter 51 Enter 1 Enter the subscriber s Enter 2 Enter to assign mailbox number to accept or edit Follow system prompts and set each parameter below User Manual 277 2 2 1 System Manager Features Parameters Steps Subscriber s Name 1 1 to change the current setting 2 Record the subscriber s name 3 2 to accept Extension Number 1 1 to change the current setting 2 Enter the subscriber s extension number 3 2 to accept First 4 Letters of the 1 1 to change the current setting Subscribers Tast Name 2 Enter the first 4 letters of subscriber s last name 3 2 to accept First 4 Letts of the 1 1 to change the current setting Subscribers Finst Mame 2 Enter the first 4 letters of subscriber s first name 3 2 to accept Class of Service Number 1 1 to change the current setting 2 Enter the Class of Service Number 1 64 3 2 to accept Interview Mailbox Number 4 1 to change the current setting 2 Enter the Interview Mailbox Number 3 2 to accept All Calls Transfer To 1 1 to change the current setting enable or disable Mailbox Change Logical 2 Extension Status 2 to accept
359. wo way Transfer During a conversation DSS O Two way gt Transfer another extension no Press Two way Press DSS or enter Transfer another extension number To stop recording press this button again To record into another mailbox with one touch One touch Two way Transfer During a conversation One touch Two way Transfer Press One touch Two way Transfer a The Two way Record button light Two way Transfer button light or One touch Two way Transfer button light shows the current status as follows Off Not recording On Recording the conversation User Manual 233 1 11 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected e Note i When you record your Two way telephone conversations you should inform the other party EE that the conversation is being recorded Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Two way Record button a Two way Transfer button and a One touch Two way Transfer button 234 User Manual 1 12 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features 1 12 Administrative Features 1 12 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features view and set the check in check out cleaned up Ready or Not Ready status of each guest room extension When the hotel operator presses a flexible button assigned as Check in Check out or Cleaned up on his her extension the extension will switch to Ro
360. xtn stored parking D S gt Baa gt cline Gh Off hook Enter 52 Dial stored parking Talk zone number 2 digits 1 4 2 Holding a Call User Manual 75 1 4 2 Holding a Call x e Ifa callis parked automatically confirm the parking zone number on the display e Ifa callis not retrieved within a specified time you will hear an alarm as a reminder Call Park Recall If an outside call is not answered within a specified time it is automatically disconnected e For SIP phone users Any SIP phone user can retrieve a parked call but only KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 SIP phone users can put a call into a parking zone e The Call Park button light shows the current status as follows Flashing red for PT You or another extension has a call parked Flashing red for KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 Another extension has a call parked Flashing green for KX UT133 KX UT136 KX UT248 KX UT670 You have a call parked i Ifyou hear a reorder tone when retrieving a parked call there is no held call Confirm the stored parking zone number EE e After you park a call you can perform other operations LE Customising Your Phone e 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons Create or edit a Call Park button or Call Park Automatic Park Zone button 76 User Manual 1 4 3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately Call Splitting 1 4 3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately Call Splitting When talking to one party while the o
361. y guessed c Changing your PIN regularly e Valid numbers for an extension PIN are 0 through 9 e Ifthe wrong extension PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times the PIN is locked e Ifyou forget your extension PIN or your extension PIN is locked your manager can clear the extension PIN and extension PIN lock User Manual 307 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode You can programme features using the programming mode for a PT or PS Setting Features Clearing Features N e To exit at any time lift the handset e To enter the programming mode when using a PS refer to the documentation for your PS e For KX UT series SIP phone users You cannot programme the following features using a KX UT series SIP phone These features are programmed via Web Maintenance Console For more information consult your System Administrator Setting Features The default settings are shown in bold letters For later reference place a check mark in the boxes below to indicate your customised setting Notice The default value may vary depending on country area PROG PROG programming selection amp z CD pme gt AUTO DIAL STORE STORE Press PROGRAM Follow Press ENTER Follow Selection Press ENTER Press PROGRAM or PAUSE programming or STORE amp Parameter or STORE or PAUSE input Item i la S
362. your desired outside line that is in use by another extension becomes idle You cannot set Automatic Callback Busy for a busy party outside of the PBX When you answer the callback ringing For an outside call The line is seized For an intercom call The called extension starts ringing automatically To set for both extension and outside line PT SLT PS While hearing a busy tone CG Ff GE C Tone y Enter 6 On hook To answer the callback ringing from an idle extension PT SLT PS While hearing a callback ringing N mo 4 Off hook Talk User Manual 41 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer To answer the callback ringing from an idle outside line PT SLT PS While hearing a callback ringing ry S gt ry no gt Ch Off hook Dial outside phone Talk number If you do not answer the callback ringing within 10 seconds this feature will be cancelled To cancel callback ringing Automatic Callback Busy Cancel PT SLT PS YD gt GaGa E Se C Tone Off hook Enter 46 On hook Setting Callback on an ISDN Line Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS You can set the telephone to receive callback ringing when a busy called party on an ISDN line becomes free When you answer the callback ringing the called party s telephone number is automatically dialled PT SLT PS While hearing a busy tone w FOSS C Tone y Enter 6 On hook 42 U
363. ype SIP phone Features PT PS SLT Non REUT GUT series series 1 9 14 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension y V Vv V V Extension Feature Clear 1 10 1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group z s V Log in Log out Wrap up 1 10 2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor Monitoring the Status of Waiting Calls v Monitoring and Changing the Log in Log out s Status of Extensions 1 10 3 Forwarding a Waiting Call Manual Queue Redirection 1 11 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected Doorphone Call v Opening a Door Door Open 1 11 2 If an External Relay is Connected To switch on the relay v v v 1 11 3 If an External Sensor is Connected To answer a sensor call v v v v v 1 11 4_If a Host PBX is Connected Accessing External Services External 7 V Y Feature Access EFA 1 11 5 Ifa Voice Processing System is Connected Call Forwarding to Voice Mail Voice Mail F Integration Screening Calls Live Call Screening LCS Recording a Conversation 1 12 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features Check in v Check out v Setting a Timed Reminder to a Room Extension Remote Wake up Call User Manual 367 5 1 1 List of Operations by Te

User Manual - Green Telecom

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents